JP6780879B1 - Game table - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game table capable of appropriately controlling payout of a game medium. SOLUTION: The game table is provided with a game control means capable of changing the ease of acquiring a game value, and the game control means satisfies a predetermined condition in a state where a first game state is set. Based on the above, it is possible to end the first gaming state and set the second gaming state, and based on the information regarding the player's profit in the first gaming state, the predetermined condition is met. It is possible to change the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state that is set after being satisfied. [Selection diagram] FIG. 33.

Description

The present invention relates to a game table typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, some game consoles shift to a state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-176415

In a conventional game table, depending on the player's pull, such as accidentally continuing to guess the correct push order with a push order bell without navigation, the ball output rate unexpected by the designer can be realized in an advantageous state etc. It was sometimes done.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table capable of appropriately controlling the payout of game media.

The game console according to the present invention is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols and being rotationally driven, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. The stop button, the internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more wins or misses, and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the derived lottery result, depending on the stop control means for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means. A game table provided with a game value giving means for imparting a game value and a game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and changing the ease of acquiring the game value, and the game control means is , A state in which one game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the first game state is set. It is possible to end the first gaming state and set the second gaming state based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the stop button of the player in the first gaming state can be set . based on the operation result, the Ri said second said acquired means der capable of changing the easiness of the game value in the game state of which is set after a predetermined condition is satisfied, the plurality of types of lottery results , The first lottery result is included, and the stop control means holds the plurality of reels when the stop button is operated by the first operation in the game from which the first lottery result is derived. Means for stopping the plurality of reels in the second stop mode when the stop button is operated by the second operation in the game in which the first lottery result is derived. The game value-imparting means grants more game value when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The game control means is the first game when the first lottery result is derived in the first game state and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. The first lottery result is derived in the state, and the said in the second gaming state set after the predetermined condition is satisfied, as compared with the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stopping mode. Change the ease of acquiring game value to the disadvantage of the player It is a game table characterized by the fact that there are cases .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table capable of appropriately controlling the payout of the game medium.

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a front view which shows the slot machine 100 in the state which the front door is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel developed in a plane. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout of each winning combination. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout of each winning combination. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout of each winning combination. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout of each winning combination. It is a figure which shows the type and name of an internal winning combination. (A) It is a figure which shows the type and name of an internal winning combination. (B) It is a figure which showed the relationship between the left reel pressing position of the condition device numbers 15 and 16 and a stop combination. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the internal winning combination in the case of a set value 1 and a set value 6. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the expected value of the base at the time of playing a high base game or a low base game at a set value 1 or a set value 6. It is a figure which showed the modification of the stop combination of the condition apparatus numbers 15 and 16 described with reference to FIG. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main process. It is a flowchart of the game start state processing (step S109) in FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a lottery table of the CZ transition mode, and (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table of the number of CZ transition games. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a game start state B related process (step S1031) in FIG. It is a flowchart of the normal related processing (step S1103) in FIG. It is a flowchart of pt acquisition related processing (step S1221) in FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a lottery table of acquired pt (for normal mode), (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table of acquired pt (for high probability mode), and (c) is a diagram showing pt high probability mode. It is a figure which shows the lottery table, (d) is the figure which shows the lottery table of the number of sets at the time of winning the pt high probability mode. (A) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to CZ and AT state when 1000 pt is reached, (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to AT state during CZ, and (c) is a diagram showing BAR rights and BAR rights. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the distribution of the peach 7 right, (d) is a figure which shows the lottery table of the initial value of the number of AT remaining games. It is a flowchart of CZ-related processing (step S1107) in FIG. (A) is a flowchart of AT-related processing (step S1111) in FIG. 18, and (b) is a flowchart of specialization-related processing (step S1113) in FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a lottery table for adding the number of remaining AT games in the AT state when the AT level is high, and (b) is a diagram showing the number of additional games when the conditional addition is cleared when the AT level is high. It is a figure which shows the lottery table, (c) is the figure which shows the lottery table of the right of the special zone when the AT level is high. (A) is a diagram showing a lottery table for adding the number of remaining AT games in the AT state when the AT level is low, and (b) is a diagram showing the number of additional games when the conditional addition is cleared when the AT level is low. It is a figure which shows the lottery table, (c) is the figure which shows the lottery table of the right of the special zone when the AT level is low. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a scenario selected in the special zone, (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the privilege type, and (c) is the number of games to be added in the special zone. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of. It is a flowchart of the instruction information setting process (step S1121) in FIG. It is a flowchart of the game state update process (step S119) in FIG. It is a flowchart of the normal middle update process (step S1A03) in FIG. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the AT remaining game number initial value lottery table (AT level high) at the time of AT winning. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the AT remaining game number initial value lottery table (AT level low) at the time of AT winning. (A) It is a flowchart of AT level adjustment processing (step S1B17) in FIG. (B) is a flowchart of the AT level determination process (step S1B02) in FIG. 30. It is a figure which showed the change of the net increase number | number when the number of AT addition games was made different by the ratio (the number of times) of a high base game and a low base game at a normal time. It is a figure which showed the change of the net increase number | number when the frequency of the bell navigation in AT is made different by the ratio (the number of times) of a high base game and a low base game at a normal time. It is a flowchart of the update process (step S1A07) in CZ in FIG. (A) is a flowchart of the update process during AT (step S1A11) in FIG. 29, and (b) is a flowchart of the special zone initial setting process (step S1D15) in (a). It is a flowchart of the update process (step S1A13) during specialization in FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the ED state transition determination process in FIG. 36 (a) and FIG. 37. (B) It is a flowchart of the state B end determination process (step S1A23) in FIG. (A) is a flowchart of the MY counter update process (step S1F01) in FIG. 38 (b), and (b) is a flowchart of the automatic settlement and stop processing (step S1F13) in FIG. 38 (b). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process. It is the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400, and (d) is the flowchart of the command processing (step S307) in (a). FIG. 41 (d) is a flowchart of the internal winning command processing (step S343) when the internal winning command is received. It is a flowchart of the effect setting process (step S3007) for each state in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart of the normal middle effect setting process (step S3115) in FIG. 43. It is a flowchart of the CZ middle effect setting process (step S3103) in FIG. 43. (A) is a flowchart of the effect during AT setting process (step S3107) in FIG. 43, and (b) is a flowchart of the effect during specialization setting process (step S3111) in FIG. 43. It is a figure which showed an example of the additional effect set referred to in the additional effect setting. It is a flowchart which shows the ED effect setting process which concerns on Example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ED effect setting process which concerns on Example 2. FIG. 41 (d) is a flowchart of the game state update command process (step S343) when the game state update command is received. It is a flowchart of the special effect update process (step S3A21) in FIG. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. It is the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500, and (d) is the flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case of winning the conditional addition lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG. 53. It is a figure which shows the example of the display of a privilege image. It is a figure which shows the example of the display of the privilege image corresponding to a clear condition. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the condition device number 2 is internally elected in the state which acquired the BAR right in CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the condition device number 3 is internally elected in the state which acquired the right of peach 7 in CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the condition device number 4 is internally elected in the state which acquired the right of peach 7 in CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the condition device number 1 is internally elected in CZ. It is a figure which shows the modification example which applied the aiming effect in CZ to a bonus. It is a timing chart which shows an example when it shifts to a special zone. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 62 is followed. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 62 is followed. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 62 is followed. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 62 is followed. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 62 is followed. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 62 is followed. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 62 is followed. It is a timing chart which shows an example in a special zone. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 70 is followed. It is a timing chart which shows an example in a special zone. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 72 is followed. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition of profit. It is a figure which showed an example of the production mode of the ED effect in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the addition effect at the time of normal time in AT in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the ED effect which concerns on Example 1 in time series. It is a figure which showed the ED effect which concerns on Example 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed the ED effect which concerns on Example 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed the ED effect which concerns on Example 4 in time series. It is a figure which showed the ED effect which concerns on Example 5 in time series. It is a figure which showed the ED effect which concerns on Example 6 in time series. It is a figure which showed the ED effect which concerns on Example 7 in time series. It is a figure which showed the ED effect which concerns on Example 8 in time series. It is a figure which showed the ED effect which concerns on Example 9 in time series. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 according to the second embodiment, and is the drawing corresponding to FIG. (A) It is a figure which shows the transition lottery table to the CZ and AT state at the time of reaching 1000pt. (B) It is a figure which shows the transition lottery table to the AT state in CZ. (C) It is a figure which shows the distribution lottery table of a BAR right and a peach 7 right. (D) It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the initial value of the AT residual number sheets. (A) is a flowchart of AT-related processing according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 24 (a). (B) is a flowchart of specialization-related processing according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 24 (b). (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table which added the AT residual number number. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the special zone right lottery table (low probability). (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the special zone right lottery table (high probability). (D) It is a figure which showed an example of the special zone initial game number lottery table. (E) It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table which added the AT residual number number for a special zone. It is a flowchart of the zone determination process in AT in the AT-related process of FIG. 88 (a). It is a figure which showed an example of the zone management of the AT residual number in time series. It is a figure which showed the effect example during the zone management of the AT residual number sheets. It is a flowchart of the instruction information setting process which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the figure corresponding to FIG. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the navigation lottery table for CZ or a special zone. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the navigation lottery table for AT. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the navigation lottery table for ED. (A) It is a graph which showed an example of the relationship between the presence / absence of addition and the number of AT residual sheets. (B) It is a graph which showed an example of the relationship between the presence / absence of addition and the number of acquired sheets. (A) It is a graph which showed an example of the relationship between the zone management of the AT residual number, and the AT residual number. (B) It is a graph which showed the change of the AT residual number when the addition occurred in a zone. It is a graph which showed the variation image of the acquired number in (a), (b) ED. (A), (b) It is a graph which showed an example of the change of the acquired number when the navigation rate is determined by the state B remaining G number at the time of ED entry (at the time of transition to ED). (A) It is a figure which showed the modification of the navigation lottery table for AT. (B), (c) It is a figure which showed the modification of the navigation lottery table for ED. It is a flowchart of the normal middle update process which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the drawing corresponding to FIG. It is a flowchart of the update process in CZ which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the drawing corresponding to FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of the update process during AT which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the drawing corresponding to FIG. 36A. (A) It is a flowchart of the special zone initial setting process which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the drawing corresponding to FIG. 36 (b). (B) It is a flowchart of the update process during specialization which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the drawing corresponding to FIG. 37. (A) is a flowchart of the ED state transition determination process according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to the above FIG. 38 (a). (B) It is a flowchart of the state B end determination process which concerns on Embodiment 2. (A) It is a flowchart of the effect setting process during AT which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the drawing corresponding to FIG. 46 (a). (B) It is a flowchart of the special effect setting process which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the drawing corresponding to FIG. 46 (b). It is a flowchart of the game state update command processing which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the drawing corresponding to FIG.

<< Embodiment 1 >>
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the game console of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of the present embodiment described below starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. At the same time, based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate the reels. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out the game medium.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. More specifically with reference to FIG. 2, the symbol displayed on the upper stage (position 1 shown in the figure) of the left reel 110 is displayed on the upper stage symbol of the left reel and the middle stage (position 4 shown in the figure) of the left reel 110. The symbol to be displayed is displayed on the left reel middle stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is displayed on the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the upper part of the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle part of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the right reel. The symbols displayed in the middle symbol and the lower symbol of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure) are called the lower symbol of the right reel, respectively, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is connected to each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three in each vertical direction, a total of nine are displayed. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined based on the detection result of the optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7 is displayed. In this embodiment, the left reel middle symbol and the middle reel middle are determined. A middle-stage winning line L1 composed of a symbol and a right-reel middle-stage symbol is provided. FIG. 2 shows the winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment requires three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than this number, no winning line is valid, and when the number of inserted medals is bet by this number. The winning line L1 becomes valid. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol are configured. A total of three winning lines that rise to the right may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a game in which a specific winning combination (specifically, BB1, BB2, RB) is internally won in an internal lottery described later, or is in an RB state or a BB state described later. It is a lamp that informs people. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. When the re-game lamp 122 wins a re-game combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, the re-game can be replayed (no medal is required). It is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The lamp 190 in the state B is a lamp indicating that the state B described later is set. The lamp 190 in this state B is always lit when the state B is set and the push order navigation occurs, and once it is lit, the lit state is maintained until the state B ends. In the state B is set and before the push order navigation occurs, the lights may be turned on at any timing. In the present embodiment, it lights up when the AR preparation state (AR preparation flag is on) and turns off when the state B ends (step S1821 in FIG. 38B).

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, one sheet is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert a medal at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. is there.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the following, in the same sense that it is paid out to the player, to the player

It may be expressed as being granted. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Further, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player. The stop buttons 137 to 139 correspond to an example of the stop button of the present invention.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The effect button 150 is a button used for effect.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 to the outside is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal) arranged behind the shutter 163. (Display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ) Has a structure that appears.

It should be noted that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device but may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface. The effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of the effect means or the notification means of the present invention.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door open. The housing 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the housing 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 is arranged inside. A reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the reel unit 700. A sub-control board storage case 220 in which the sub-control board is housed is arranged on the side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply having a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reel unit 700. The device 252 is arranged, and the power switch 244 is arranged on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the AC power supply to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, and each device. Further, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the housing 101. ing.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the housing 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board for controlling the effect device 160 are placed on the upper part of the design display window 113. (Not shown), an upper speaker 272, is provided. At the lower part of the symbol display window 113, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

Further, although not shown, the main control board is provided with a switch for enabling the stop function and a switch for enabling the automatic settlement function. The position where these switches are provided is not particularly limited, and may be provided on the sub-control board, separately from these boards, or at separate locations. .. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the physical switch is provided, and for example, the configuration may be such that it is possible to set whether or not to enable the stop function and the automatic settlement function in a program that changes the set value of the game console. .. In this case, these functions may be configured to be set by using the start lever 135 and the stop buttons 137 to 139. When a physical switch is provided, a variable indicating the state of this switch is stored when the power is turned on, and a process for enabling the stop function and the automatic settlement function is executed based on this variable. This variable is maintained unless the power is turned on again. Further, in addition to the above switch, a stop release switch for releasing the stop is also provided.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, with respect to the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. Therefore, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 And the data capacity of RAM 308 is limited. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the game control means, the internal lottery means, the stop control means, the payout control means, and the privilege giving means of the present invention, and the first sub control unit 400 corresponds to the effect control of the present invention. It corresponds to an example of means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel symbol. A ROM 306 that stores an array, stop position, etc., a RAM 308 that temporarily stores data, an I / O 310 that controls input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 that measures time, number of times, etc. And, WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 has a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). Start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 uses various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 The state of the optical sensor, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, the switch for enabling the stop function and the automatic settlement function (if adopted), etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 to detect a start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the loading operation when loading. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and are provided on the reel frame to block light. Every time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotation position information indicating how much the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level to the next L level is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. Will be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero. This rotation position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 to drive the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, state B middle lamp 190, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp A drive circuit 328 for driving 121, a stored number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and is capable of communicating with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and the basic circuit 402 temporarily stores data with the CPU 404. RAM 408, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277. The speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of the directing means or the notifying means of the present invention.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, etc.) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. (Reel backlight, etc.) is connected. The various lamps 420 correspond to an example of the directing means or the notifying means of the present invention.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the CPU 404 monitors the state of various sensors 428 (shutter 163 sensor, effect button 150 sensor, etc.) for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various effect drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ), Etc., and may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512 and. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (9 types in this embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the frame number 17 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon symbol", the frame number 17 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell symbol", and the frame number 14 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1". "Designs" are arranged respectively.

In order to improve the enjoyment of the game, the slot machine 100 in the present embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retracting range (less than 5 frames in the present embodiment) from the stopped operation position. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 7, 8, and 9. 6, FIG. 7, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payout of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include replaying combinations 1 to 18 and small winning combinations 1 to 58. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the replaying roles 1 to 18 are roles that enable replaying without inserting a new medal. The replaying combinations 1 to 18 may be referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the replay combination 1 Includes ~ 18 prizes.

The re-gaming roles 1 to 18 are winning roles (acting roles) that allow the game to be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game by winning, and the medals are not paid out. The symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combinations 1 to 18 are as shown in FIG. 6, for example, the replay combination 1 is "replay-replay-replay". In addition, replays 1 and 2 are "normal replays", replays 3 to 5 are "blue 7 out of replay", replays 6 are "blue 7 replays", and replays 7 to 9 are "BAR out of replays". , Replay roles 10 are "BAR replays", regame roles 11 to 14 are "peach 7 out of place replays", replay roles 15 and 16 are "peach 7 replays", and replay roles 17 to 18 are "special" respectively. "Replays 1 and 2" and special replays 1 and 2 may be collectively referred to as "special replay" or "special lip".

The re-gaming combinations 1 to 18 may be any combination in which the player can play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when a prize is won in the replay, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in the medal insertion number storage area described later), or the medals are inserted in the game that won the replay. The medals may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small winning combinations 1 to 58 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIGS. 7, 8 and 9. For example, the small winning combination 1 is "Seven 1-Cherry-Replay". The corresponding payout numbers are as shown in FIGS. 7, 8 and 9. Small roles 1 and 2 are "weak cherries", small roles 3 and 4 are "strong cherries", small roles 5 are "watermelons", small roles 6 to 17 are "one piece", and small roles 18 and 19 are The "bell" and the small winning combination 55-58 may be collectively referred to as "special bells 1 to 4" and the special bells 1 to 4 as "special bells", respectively.

In this example, when the small winning combination 55 (special bell 1) or the small winning combination 56 (special bell 2) is won, 12 medals are paid out, while the small winning combination 57 (special bell 3) or If you win the small role 58 (special bell 4), 8 medals will be paid out. Hereinafter, the small role 55 (special bell 1) or the small role 56 (special bell 2) may be referred to as a "12-card combination", and the small role 57 (special bell 3) or the small role 58 (special bell 4) may be referred to as "a special bell 4". It may be called "8-card role".

<Type of internal winner>
Next, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 and 11 (a) are diagrams showing the types and names of internal winning combinations.

10 and 11 (a) show 16 types of internal winning combinations (conditional device numbers 1 to 16) in which the combinations described in FIGS. 6, 7, 8 and 9 are combined. The winning combination in the game is one of the roles corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by a lottery at the start operation of the game.

<Condition devices 1 to 14>
First, condition device numbers 1 to 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

Conditional device number 1 is a conditional device in which the replaying combinations 1 to 4, 7, and 8 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, the replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won by the left first stop and the middle first stop. In the case of the first right stop, one of the replays 1, 3, 4, 7, and 8 (normal replay, blue 7 out-of-order replay, and BAR out-of-game replay) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation. In the case of the first right stop, if the Seven 1 symbol or the BAR symbol is a winning combination symbol on the reel that has been stopped, and this symbol is within the maximum pull-in range, this symbol Priority is given to stop.

Conditional device number 2 is a conditional device in which the replaying combinations 1 to 10 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, the replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won by the left first stop and the middle first stop. Further, in the case of the first right stop, one of the replays 1, 3 to 10 (normal replay, blue 7 off replay, blue 7 replay, BAR off replay, BAR replay) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation. In the case of the first stop on the right, the odor of the reel that has been stopped

If the Seven 1 symbol or the BAR symbol is a constituent symbol of a winning combination and this symbol is within the maximum pull-in range, this symbol is preferentially stopped.

Conditional device number 3 is a conditional device in which replays 1 to 6, 11 to 13 and 16 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, the replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won by the left first stop and the middle first stop. In the case of the first right stop, replays 1, 3 to 6, 11 to 13, 16 (normal replay, blue 7 off replay, blue 7 replay, peach 7 off replay, peach 7 replay) depending on the timing of the stop operation. Win one of the prizes. In the case of the first right stop, if the Seven 1 symbol or the Seven 2 symbol is a winning combination symbol on the reel that has been stopped, and this symbol is within the maximum pull-in range, this symbol is used. Preferentially stop the symbol.

Conditional device number 4 is a conditional device in which replays 1 to 7, 9, 14, and 15 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, the replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won by the left first stop and the middle first stop. Also, in the case of the first right stop, depending on the timing of the stop operation, the replays 1, 3 to 7, 9, 14, 15 (normal replay, blue 7 off replay, blue 7 replay, BAR off replay, peach 7 off replay, Win one of the 7 peach replays). In the case of the first right stop, the Seven 1 symbol, the Seven 2 symbol, and the BAR symbol are the constituent symbols of the winning combination on the reel that has been stopped, and this symbol is within the maximum pull-in range. If so, this symbol is preferentially stopped.

Conditional device number 5 is a conditional device in which small wins 1 and 2 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, one of the small winning combination 1 and 2 (weak cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Conditional device number 6 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 3 and 4 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, one of the small winning combination 3 and 4 (strong cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Conditional device number 7 is a conditional device in which the small winning combination 5 is independently elected internally. In this condition device, a small winning combination 5 (watermelon) is won.

Conditional device number 8 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 6 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, one of the small winning combinations 7 to 22 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the left first stop is performed, the bell symbol stops at the effective line on the reel on which the first stop operation is performed, and the Seven 1 symbol and Seven 2 are performed on the reel on which the second stop operation is performed. One of the symbols, blank 1 symbol, and blank 2 symbol stops at the effective line, and depending on the timing of the subsequent third stop operation, small winning combinations 23, 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37-40, 43, 44, 49 , 50, 53, 54 may be won. That is, if the stop operation is the left first stop, 8 or 1 is paid out, and if it is other than the left first stop, 1 or 0 is paid out.

Conditional device number 9 is a conditional device in which small combinations 6-22, 25, 26, 29 to 32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45 to 48, 51, and 52 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won when the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right, one of the small winning combinations 7 to 22 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the left first stop is performed, the bell symbol stops at the effective line on the reel on which the first stop operation is performed, and the Seven 1 symbol and Seven 2 are performed on the reel on which the second stop operation is performed. One of the symbols, blank 1 symbol, and blank 2 symbol stops at the effective line, and depending on the timing of the subsequent third stop operation, small winning combinations 25, 26, 29 to 32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45 to 48, 51 , 52 may be won. That is, if the stop operation is the left first stop, 8 or 1 is paid out, and if it is other than the left first stop, 1 or 0 is paid out.

Conditional device number 10 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle, left, and right. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, one of the small winning combinations 23 to 38 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the middle first stop is performed, the bell symbol stops at the effective line on the reel on which the first stop operation is performed, and the Seven 1 symbol and Seven 2 are performed on the reel on which the second stop operation is performed. One of the symbols, blank 1 symbol, and blank 2 symbol stops at the effective line, and depending on the timing of the subsequent third stop operation, small winning combinations 7, 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21, 22, 39, 40, 43 , 44, 49, 50, 53, 54 may be awarded. That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, 8 or 1 is paid out, and if it is other than the middle 1st stop, 1 or 0 is paid out.

Conditional device number 11 is a conditional device in which small combinations 6, 9, 10, 13 to 16, 19, 20, 23 to 38, 41, 42, 45 to 48, 51, and 52 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle, left, and right, one of the small winning combinations 23 to 38 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the middle first stop is performed, the bell symbol stops at the effective line on the reel on which the first stop operation is performed, and the Seven 1 symbol and Seven 2 are performed on the reel on which the second stop operation is performed. One of the symbols, blank 1 symbol, and blank 2 symbol stops at the effective line, and depending on the timing of the subsequent third stop operation, small winning combinations 9, 10, 13 to 16, 19, 20, 41, 42, 45 to 48, 51 , 52 may be won. That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, 8 or 1 is paid out, and if it is other than the middle 1st stop, 1 or 0 is paid out.

Conditional device number 12 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, and middle. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, one of the small winning combinations 39 to 54 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the right first stop is performed, the bell symbol stops at the effective line on the reel on which the first stop operation is performed, and the Seven 1 symbol and Seven 2 are performed on the reel on which the second stop operation is performed. One of the symbols, blank 1 symbol, and blank 2 symbol stops at the effective line, and depending on the timing of the subsequent third stop operation, small winning combinations 7, 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 24, 27, 28, 33 , 34, 37, 38 may be won. That is, if the stop operation is the first right stop, 8 or 1 is paid out, and if the stop operation is other than the first right stop, 1 or 0 is paid out.

Conditional device number 13 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 6, 9, 10, 13 to 16, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29 to 32, 35, 36, 39 to 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, and middle, one of the small winning combinations 39 to 54 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the right first stop is performed, the bell symbol stops at the effective line on the reel on which the first stop operation is performed, and the Seven 1 symbol and Seven 2 are performed on the reel on which the second stop operation is performed. One of the symbols, blank 1 symbol, and blank 2 symbol stops at the effective line, and depending on the timing of the subsequent third stop operation, small winning combinations 9, 10, 13 to 16, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29 to 32, 35 , 36 may be won. That is, if the stop operation is the first right stop, 8 or 1 is paid out, and if the stop operation is other than the first right stop, 1 or 0 is paid out.

Conditional device number 14 is a conditional device in which the small winning combination 6 is independently elected internally. In this condition device, a small role 6 (bell) is won.

Each of the above-mentioned condition device numbers 8 to 13 defines an operation condition (here, push order, hereinafter, correct push order) for winning a bell (small winning combination 6). In the following description, the condition device numbers 8 to 13 may be collectively referred to as a push order bell. In the case where these condition device numbers 8 to 13 are internally won, if the stop operation matches the pressing order of each correct answer, the bell (small winning combination 6) is won. On the other hand, if the stop operation does not match the pressing order of the correct answer, the one-card winning combination other than the bell (small winning combination 6) is preferentially stopped. In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the correct push order, it may be lost. However, if the stop operation does not match the correct push order, for example, the above-mentioned one-card combination always wins a prize. It may be configured to always win a prize in some role.

<Condition devices 15 and 16>
Next, the condition device numbers 15 and 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (a) is a diagram showing the types and names of the internal winning combinations, and FIG. 11 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the left reel pressing positions of the condition device numbers 15 and 16 and the stopping combination. is there.

Conditional device number 15 is a conditional device in which replays 1 to 4, 7, 8, 17, and 18 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, the winning combination is determined according to the rule shown in "conditional device number 15" in FIG. 11B.

Specifically, in the left first stop operation, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbols 0 to 4 of the left reel 110 pass through the middle stage of the left reel 110 (hereinafter, "stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 4"). In some cases, the player wins the replay role 17 (special replay 1).

Further, in the left first stop operation, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbols of the numbers 5 to 9 of the left reel 110 pass through the middle stage of the left reel 110 (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 5 to 9"). If you do), you will win the replay 18 (special replay 2).

Hereinafter, any of the stop operations of "stop operation of left reel pressing positions 0 to 4" and "stop operation of left reel pressing positions 5 to 9" are collectively referred to as "stop operation of left reel pressing positions 0 to 9". , "High-base game", or "high-base hit".

Further, the left first stop operation (hereinafter, may be referred to as "stop operation of left reel pressing positions 10 to 19") at the timing when the symbols of the left reel 110 numbers 10 to 19 pass through the middle stage of the left reel 110. If you do, you will win the replay 1 (normal replay).

Hereinafter, the "stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 10 to 19" may be generically referred to as "low base game" or "low base striking".

Although not shown, in the case of the first right stop, the replay combination 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 (normal replay, blue 7 off replay, replay, depending on the timing of the stop operation, as in the condition device 1). Win one of the BAR out-of-order replays).

Conditional device number 16 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 55 to 58 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, the winning combination is determined according to the rule shown in "conditional device number 16" in FIG. 11B.

Specifically, when the symbols 0 to 4 of the left reel 110 perform the stop operation of the stop button 137 (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 4) at the timing of passing through the middle stage of the left reel 110. Wins a small role 55 (special bell 1), and in this example, 12 medals are paid out.

Further, when the symbol of the numbers 5 to 9 of the left reel 110 passes the middle stage of the left reel 110 and the stop button 137 is stopped (the left reel pressing positions 5 to 9 are stopped), it is small. He won the role 56 (special bell 2), and in this example, 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, there is a case where the symbol of the numbers 10 to 14 of the left reel 110 is stopped by the stop button 137 at the timing of passing through the middle stage of the left reel 110 (hereinafter, "stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 10 to 14". ), A small role 57 (special bell 3) is won, and in this example, eight medals are paid out.

Further, there is a case where the stop operation of the stop button 137 (hereinafter, "stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 15 to 19") is performed at the timing when the symbols of the numbers 15 to 19 of the left reel 110 pass through the middle stage of the left reel 110. ), A small role 58 (special bell 4) is won, and in this example, eight medals are paid out.

Hereinafter, any of the stop operations of "stop operation of left reel pressing positions 10 to 14" or "stop operation of left reel pressing positions 15 to 19" are collectively referred to as "stop operation of left reel pressing positions 10 to 19". , "Low base game", or "low base hit".

As described above, in this example, when the condition device number 16 is internally won and the small winning combination 55 (special bell 1) or the small winning combination 56 (special bell 2) is won, 12 medals are paid out. Then, if the condition device number 16 is internally won and the small winning combination 57 (special bell 3) or the small winning combination 58 (special bell 4) is won, eight medals are paid out and the condition device number 16 is internally won. In this case, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the stop timing of the left reel 110 (stop operation timing of the stop button 137).

However, since the lottery type of the condition device number 16 (special bell) is set to A regardless of the stop timing of the left reel 110 (stop operation timing of the stop button 137), various lottery using the lottery type ( For example, in the AT lottery, pt lottery, pt high probability set number lottery, special zone right lottery, etc., which will be described later, the stop timing of the left reel 110 (stop operation timing of the stop button 137) may affect the lottery result. Absent.

In other words, in the game in which the condition device number 16 (special bell) is internally won, the profit obtained by the player is greater if the player wins the 12-card combination, but even if the 8-card combination is won. The player does not lose in various lottery (for example, AT lottery, pt lottery, pt high probability set number lottery, special zone right lottery, etc., which will be described later).

According to this example, there is a difference in the number of medals used before the first hit of the AT between the case of playing a high-base game and the case of playing a low-base game, but the number of games until the first hit of the AT is There is no difference. Therefore, even if the players are replaced in the middle of a certain game table, there is no difference in the probability of the first hit of the AT depending on the method of the previous player's game, and the new player can keep the AT forever. There is no disadvantage such as the first hit not coming. In addition, when the ceiling is set according to the number of games, etc., the amount of investment up to the ceiling can be predicted to some extent depending on the current number of games and the method of playing, and the player's satisfaction can be improved. Can be enhanced.

Note that the condition device number 16 according to this example shows an example in which the winning combination is determined by the stop timing of the left reel 110 (stop operation timing of the stop button 137) regardless of the pressing order. It is not limited, and for example, in the case of the right first stop or the middle first stop, a 12-card combination (or an 8-card combination) may be configured to win a prize. Further, a plurality of types of condition devices in which the winning combination is determined by the stop timing of the left reel 110 (stop operation timing of the stop button 137) may be provided. Further, in the case of the right first stop or the middle first stop, the winning of the 12-card combination and the winning of the 8-card combination may be switched depending on the pushing order (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14). ..

<Type of game state>
Next, the types of gaming states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100.

The gaming state of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a state A and a state B, and the state B is further classified into a normal state, a chance zone (hereinafter, may be referred to as “CZ”), an AT state, and a special state. A total of five different game states with different advantages, the conversion zone (hereinafter, may be referred to as "specialization") and the ED (hereinafter, may be referred to as "ending state"), can be switched. It is configured. In the slot machine 100, the advantage is changed by the transition of a total of six gaming states of these states A and B, and the interest of the game is improved.

FIG. 12 shows the six gaming states described above, and these transition conditions are described on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is satisfied, the gaming state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations when the set value 1 and the set value 6 are set. In this figure, the vertical axis shows the conditional device number of the internal winning combination (conditional device) (including the loss without the internal winning combination), and the horizontal axis shows the set value. The corresponding lottery value (the size of the range of lottery data) is shown. It should be noted that these lottery values are common to the six gaming states described above. If the condition device is not internally won in the game, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "winning the loss".

In the game state described below, the internal winning probability of the winning combination is a random number value acquired at the time of the internal lottery by selecting numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data in the range of (for example, 65536). For example, the lottery value of the common bell (small winning combination 6) of the condition device number 14 is 300 at the set value 1, the winning probability is 300/65536≈0.46%, and 350 at the set value 6, and the winning is performed. The probability is 350/65536≈0.53%, which varies depending on the set value. On the other hand, the lottery values of the other condition device numbers are the same regardless of the set values. For example, the lottery value of the special replay of the condition device number 15 and the special bell of the condition device number 16 is 3000 regardless of the set value. , The winning probability is 3000/65536≈4.56%.

Regarding the above difference in internal winning probability, the higher the set value, the higher the advantage tends to be. More specifically, the payout rate of settings 1 to 3 (expected value of the number of medals paid out per game / number of medals used per game x 100) is less than 100%, and settings 4 to 6 The payout rate of medals is over 100%. That is, the settings 4 to 6 are advantageous setting values for the player.

The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination or loss. It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination (internal winning combination) is determined. It should be noted that the staff of the game store can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values.

<Expected value of base>
FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the expected value of the base when the high base game or the low base game is played at the set value 1 or the set value 6. Here, the base is the average number of games that can be played with 50 medals.

As described with reference to FIG. 11, when the condition device number 16 is internally won, the number of medals paid out differs depending on the stop timing of the left reel 110 (stop operation timing of the stop button 137), and the high base game (left). There is a difference in the number of medals used before the AT first hits between the case of performing the reel pressing position 0 to 9 stop operation) and the case of performing the low base game (the left reel pressing position 10 to 19 stop operation). Occurs.

Specifically, in the case of a high base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 9), the expected value of the base is about 58.5 G at the set value 1 and about 59.1 G at the set value 6. On the other hand, when a low base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 10 to 19) is performed, the expected value of the base is about 49.3 G at the set value 1 and about 49.7 G at the set value 6. The expected value of the base shown in FIG. 13B shows a numerical value when only one of the high base game and the low base game is continuously executed in a certain period.

As described above, in the slot machine 100 according to this example, the low base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 10 to 19) is performed in the case of the high base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 9). It is designed so that the expected value of the base is higher than when.

In this example, the expected value of the base is different depending on the stop timing of the left reel 110 (stop operation timing of the stop button 137), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the middle reel 111 or The expected value of the base may be different depending on the stop timing of the right reel 112. Further, the expected value of the base may be different or the number of payouts may be different depending on the pushing order of the reels 110 to 112.

Further, in the present embodiment, a ceiling is provided (because the CZ is won within 999G in any mode at the time of transition to the advantageous section), depending on whether the high-base game or the low-base game is performed. , The number of medals invested up to the ceiling is different, but the number of games up to the ceiling does not depend on whether you play high-base games or low-base games, so it depends on the current number of games and the way you play. , You can play the game by predicting the number of investment to the ceiling to some extent.

<Modification examples of condition device numbers 15 and 16>
Next, a modified example of the condition device numbers 15 and 16 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a modified example of the stop combination of the condition device numbers 15 and 16 described with reference to FIG.

In the condition devices Nos. 15 and 16 described with reference to FIG. 11, an example in which the stop combination is changed depending on the stop timing of the left reel 110 (stop operation timing of the stop button 137) is shown, but in this example, in addition to this, In the case of the middle first stop or the right first stop, the stop combination is configured to be different depending on the pressing order of the subsequent second stop operation and the third stop stop operation.

As shown in FIG. 14A, in this example, the condition device of the condition device number 15 is divided into two types, a condition device of the condition device number 15-1 and a condition device of the condition device number 15-2, respectively. Condition device is configured to win with a probability of 1/2 (= 50%). The winning probability of each conditional device is not limited to this example, and the conditional device of the conditional device number 15 may be divided into three or more types.

Conditional devices Nos. 15-1 and 15-2 are conditional devices in which the replaying combinations 1 to 4, 7, 8, 17, and 18 are duplicated and internally won. In the condition device of the condition device number 15-1, the winning combination is determined according to the rule shown in "condition device number 15-1" in FIG. 14 (a), and in the condition device of the condition device number 15-2, FIG. 14 (a). ), The winning combination is determined according to the rule shown in "Condition device number 15-2". Since the stop control of the left reel 110 in the left first stop (LCR, LRC) is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 11B, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the condition device of the condition device number 15-1, in the case of the middle first stop, the normal replay is won at the time of the left second stop and the right third stop (CLR), and the right second stop and the left third stop. Win a special replay at (CRL). On the other hand, in the case of the right first stop, the normal replay is won at the left second stop and the middle third stop (RLC), and the special replay is made at the middle second stop and the left third stop (RCL). Win a prize.

In the condition device of the condition device number 15-2, in the case of the middle first stop, the special replay is won at the time of the left second stop and the right third stop (CLR), and the right second stop and the left third stop. Win a normal replay at (CRL). On the other hand, in the case of the right first stop, the special replay is won at the left second stop and the middle third stop (RLC), and the normal replay is performed at the middle second stop and the left third stop (RCL). Win a prize.

As described above, in this example, when the left reel 110 is first stopped, it is possible to select whether or not to win the special replay at the player's will, while the middle reel 111 or the right reel 112 When the first stop is made, there is a 1/2 (= 50%) chance of winning either a special replay or a normal replay. In order to have such a configuration, it is necessary to configure it so that the player cannot determine whether the condition device number 15-1 or the condition device number 15-2 has been internally won. When the control unit 300 transmits the result of the internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400, the player can detect the condition device from the production by transmitting in a format in which it is not known which condition device has won. Is configured so that

As shown in FIG. 14B, in this example, the condition device of the condition device number 16 is divided into two types, a condition device of the condition device number 16-1 and a condition device of the condition device number 16-2, respectively. Condition device is configured to win with a probability of 1/2 (= 50%). The winning probability of each conditional device is not limited to this example, and the conditional device of the conditional device number 16 may be divided into three or more types.

Conditional devices 16-1 and 16-2 are conditional devices in which small winning combinations 55 to 58 are duplicated and internally won. In the condition device of the condition device number 16-1, the winning combination is determined according to the rule shown in "condition device number 16-1" in FIG. 14 (b), and in the condition device of the condition device number 16-2, FIG. 14 (b). ), The winning combination is determined according to the rule shown in "Condition device number 16-2". Since the stop control of the left reel 110 in the left first stop (LCR, LRC) is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 11B, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the condition device of the condition device number 16-1, in the case of the middle first stop, 12 cards are won at the time of the left second stop and the right third stop (CLR), the right second stop, and the left third Win a prize for 8 cards when stopped (CRL). On the other hand, in the case of the right first stop, 12 cards are won at the left second stop and the middle third stop (RLC), and eight cards are won at the middle second stop and the left third stop (RCL). Win a role.

In the condition device of the condition device number 15-2, in the case of the middle first stop, eight cards are won at the time of the left second stop and the right third stop (CLR), and the right second stop and the left third stop. Win a 12-card role when stopped (CRL). On the other hand, in the case of the right first stop, 8 cards are won at the left second stop and the middle third stop (RLC), and 12 cards are won at the middle second stop and the left third stop (RCL). Win a role.

As described above, in this example, when the left reel 110 is first stopped, it is possible to select whether to win the 12-card combination or the 8-card combination depending on the player's intention. When the middle reel 111 or the right reel 112 is first stopped, there is a 1/2 (= 50%) probability of winning either a 12-card combination or an 8-card combination. Therefore, when the left reel 110 is first stopped, a high base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 9) or a low base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 10 to 19) is performed. When the middle reel 111 or the right reel 112 is stopped first, the 12-card combination and the 8-card combination are established at 50%, so the expected value of the base is a high base game. It is a number during low-base games.

In addition, if the condition device with condition device number 16-1 is internally won during AT, it is possible to ensure that 12 cards are taken by navigating either the CLR or RLC push order by lottery or the like. By making it possible to make the stop control of the reel the same as that of other push order bells, it is possible to make it look like a normal push order combination. Similarly, when the condition device of the condition device number 16-2 is internally won, either the CRL of the 12-card combination or the push order of the RCL may be navigated by lottery or the like.

In addition, since the four types of condition devices according to this example will be a walkthrough if the player detects an internal winning, when the result of the internal lottery is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. In addition, it is preferable to transmit in a format in which it is not known which condition device has been won so that the player cannot detect the condition device from the effect.

<Each game state>
Hereinafter, each game state will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Normal state>
The normal state is the most unfavorable gaming state for the player. Although the details will be described later, if the transition lottery for the state B is won in the normal state A, the state B is set and the normal state (state A) is changed to the normal state (state B) (arrow (K) in FIG. 12). ).

In the normal state, if the state B described later is set, the pt can be acquired as the game progresses, and the cumulative acquired pt increases (step S1247 in FIG. 20). In this embodiment, when the value of the number of high-probability remaining games to be described later is larger than 0, the cumulative acquired pt is likely to increase. In addition, the number of pt high probability sets is provided, and when this value is larger than 0, the number of pt high probability remaining games is added again even if the number of pt high probability remaining games becomes 0, and the cumulative acquired pt increases. We have adopted a configuration that keeps it easy to do. In the following description, a state in which the pt high probability flag is on (a state in which the cumulative acquired pt is likely to increase) may be referred to as a high probability mode, and a state in which the pt high probability flag is off may be referred to as a normal mode. When the cumulative acquired pt becomes 1000 pt or more, the chance zone transition lottery and the AT direct hit lottery are executed in exchange for 1000 pt (step S1211 in FIG. 19).

FIG. 12 shows that if the chance zone transition lottery is won in the normal state, the player shifts to the chance zone (arrow (A) in FIG. 12, Yes in step S1B05 in FIG. 30). Further, it is shown that if the AT direct hit lottery is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the AT state (arrow (E) in FIG. 12, Yes in step S1B01 in FIG. 30). Further, it is shown that when the number of chance zone transition games set in the normal state elapses, the game shifts to the chance zone (arrow (A) in FIG. 12, Yes in step S1B09 in FIG. 30). As the number of chance zone transition games, a value (step S1013 in FIG. 16) set at the time of winning the transition lottery in the state B described later in the normal state is used.

<Chance Zone (CZ)>
The chance zone, which is one of the states B, is a gaming state in which the player is more likely to make a profit than in the normal state and is more advantageous than the normal state. In this chance zone, when the push order bell (conditional device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won, the notification of the correct stop operation order corresponding to each (hereinafter, may be referred to as operation navigation) is displayed (Fig. 28 step S1505, FIG. 42 step S3005). Note that this operation navigation is not limited to the one that indicates the push order, and may be used to indicate the timing of the stop operation, for example, such as "Aim for ...!", Or the push order. And may indicate both timing. In the following description, the operation navigation for the push order bell may be referred to as a bell navigation. Further, in the present embodiment, the bell navigation in the CZ adopts a configuration showing the order of all the stop operations from the first to the third stop, and in the following description, the bell navigation showing the order of all the stop operations. Sometimes called full navigation. In addition, unlike the present embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the correct push order is displayed in 50% of the winners of the push order bell condition device during CZ. In this case, it is difficult to obtain profits (becomes disadvantageous) compared to the AT state, while it is possible to make the state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

When the AT lottery is won in the chance zone, the game state shifts to the AT state by internally winning the corresponding conditional device if the number of remaining CZ games is not 0 (Yes in step S1C01 in FIG. 35 or in step S1C03). Yes). In addition, when the number of remaining CZ games becomes 0 while winning the AT lottery, the game state shifts to the AT state regardless of the result of the internal winning (even if the corresponding condition device is not internally won). (Yes in step S1C09 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when the number of remaining CZ games becomes 0 without winning the AT lottery, the gaming state shifts to the normal state (No in step S1C09 in FIG. 35).

In FIG. 12, the state shifts to the AT state based on winning the AT lottery in the chance zone (arrow (C) in FIG. 12), and if not won, the state shifts to the normal state (arrow (B) in FIG. 12). It is shown that.

<AT state>
The AT state, which is one of the states B, is a state advantageous to the player along with the chance zone and the special zone. In this AT state, as in the chance zone, when the push order bell (conditional device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won, the operation navigation (full navigation) corresponding to each is displayed, which is advantageous for the player to easily make a profit. (Step S1505 in FIG. 28, step S3005 in FIG. 42). This AT state is managed by the number of AT remaining games, but the number of AT remaining games may be added by lottery (steps S1403 and S1405 in FIG. 24A). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining AT games may be added by clearing the conditional addition (set in step S1409 in FIG. 24 (a)) described later (step S1D03 in FIG. 30 (a)). ..

Further, if the number of special zone sets is greater than 0 due to winning the special zone right lottery (step S1411 in FIG. 24A) in the AT state, the number of remaining AT games becomes 0. When this happens, the game state shifts to the specialized zone (step S1D11 in FIG. 36A).

In FIG. 12, when the number of special zone sets is larger than 0 and the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 in the AT state, the game shifts to the special zone (arrow (F) in FIG. 12), and the AT end condition (AT end condition). For example, when both the number of remaining AT games and the number of specialized zone sets are 0), it is shown that the normal state is entered (arrow (D) in FIG. 12 and No in step S1D09 in FIG. 36 (a)). ing.

<Specialized zone>
The specialized zone, which is one of the states B, is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state, but is more disadvantageous than the chance zone, the AT state, and the ED state. In this specialized zone, as in the chance zone, AT state, and ED state, when the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, the operation navigation corresponding to each is displayed, but in this embodiment, the operation navigation corresponding to each is displayed. Bell Navi in the special zone adopts a configuration that shows only the order of the first stop operation from the first to third stops, making it harder for the player to make a profit than in the chance zone, AT state, and ED state. (Step S1515 in FIG. 28, step S3005 in FIG. 42). In the following description, a bell navigation system that indicates only the stop button that is the target of the first stop may be referred to as a half navigation system. The content of the half navigation is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a navigation that indicates a stop button that is the target of the first to third stops (full navigation) that is executed less frequently, or a symbol that is displayed as a stop. It may be a navigation that suggests a part.

In this special zone, a scenario is selected by lottery (step S1D23 in FIG. 36 (b)), and a privilege type is set for each game (maximum 30 games) according to this scenario (FIG. 27). .. Based on this privilege type, the number of remaining AT games may be added (step S1E07, step S1E11 in FIG. 37), and the life (maximum 3) may increase or decrease (step S1E25, step S1E43 in FIG. 37). .. This specialized zone shifts to the AT state when the scenario ends (30 games have elapsed) or the life becomes 0 (step S1E13 in FIG. 37, step S1E47). The number of AT remaining games is not subtracted.

In FIG. 12, when the special zone end condition (for example, the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is “L” or the life value is 0) is satisfied in the special zone, the state shifts to the AT state (for example, The arrow (G) in FIG. 12, step S1E13 in FIG. 37, and step S1E47) are shown.

<ED state (ending state)>
In this example, the ED state (ending state), which is one of the states B, shifts when the ED start condition is satisfied in the AT or the special zone (arrows (H) in FIG. 12 and FIG. 36 (a)). Step S1D19, step S1E49 of FIG. 37, ED state transition determination process shown in FIG. 38 (a)). The game state of the transition source is not limited to this example, and may be configured to transition to the ED state even when the ED start condition is satisfied in the normal (state B) or the chance zone, for example.

The ED start condition is not particularly limited, but for example, in the ED state transition determination process described later with reference to FIG. 38 (a), the sum of the number of games of each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games. When exceeds 700G (game), the ED start condition is satisfied. That is, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, it is based on the total of the rights digested by the game (the number of AT games in this example) and the rights that can be digested after the game (the number of remaining AT games in this example). The ED start condition is determined, and when the total value exceeds (or falls below) a certain value, the ED start condition is satisfied.

Further, in the state B end determination process described later using FIG. 38 (b), the ED start condition is satisfied when the remaining number of games in the state B is 10 G or less. That is, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, the establishment of the ED start condition is determined based on the end condition of the state B, and when the remaining number of games in the state B exceeds a certain value, or the net increase number is the minimum. When the predetermined net increase number exceeds a certain value from the time of, the ED start condition is satisfied.

Further, the ED start condition may be satisfied when the net increase number (MY counter) + AT remaining game number × design value average net increase number in the state B exceeds a certain value (for example, 2200). , The ED start condition may be satisfied when the number of rights of the special zone acquired during AT exceeds a certain value (for example, 3). That is, the establishment of the ED start condition is determined based only on the total of the rights that can be digested after the game, and when the total value exceeds a certain value, the ED start condition is satisfied. May be good.

If it is difficult to calculate the net increase number, it may be converted to the net increase number and the establishment of the ED start condition may be determined based on the converted numerical value. For example, in the case of the right of the special zone, 1 One right may be converted into a net increase of 300, and if the AT machine manages the number of games, it may be converted into a net increase by multiplying the number of remaining AT games by the average net increase of the design value.

Further, even if the establishment of the ED start condition is determined based only on the total of the rights digested up to the game, and the ED start condition is satisfied when the total value exceeds a certain value. Often, for example, based on a net increase (MY counter) of 2200, AT digestion games of 700G, special zone digestion 3 times, state B (advantageous section) remaining games of 100G (1400G digestion), etc. It may be determined that the ED start condition is satisfied.

Further, the determination timing of the ED start condition is not particularly limited, and may be after the end of the game or immediately after the operation of the start lever 135. Therefore, for example, when it is found by the lottery at the time of operating the start lever 135 that the number of remaining AT games satisfies the ED start condition, the game may shift to the ED state, or from the next game. It may shift to the ED state. If the ED start condition is determined immediately after the operation of the start lever 135, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the transition to the ED state.

<State A and State B>
In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to the six gaming states described above, the current state is managed separately in the state A and the state B. The state A is the state at the start of the normal state, and is also the state at the time of changing the setting or after clearing the RAM. If the transition lottery of the state B is won in this state A, the state B is set (arrow (K) in FIG. 12, step S1003 in FIG. 16). The condition for transitioning to the state B is that the transition is made when an internal winning role is won in the state A.

In the present embodiment, since an internal winning of some role is performed with a probability of about 80%, the state B is configured with a high probability. When this state B is set, initial settings such as setting the number of CZ transition games for shifting to the chance zone are executed (Yes in step S1005 of FIG. 16), and pt can be acquired (yes). No) in step S1001 of FIG. That is, while the state A is set in the normal state, it is not possible to shift to the gaming state other than the normal state, and when the state B is set, it is possible to shift to the gaming state other than the normal state. When the normal state is restored again, the state A is set (step S1C11 in FIG. 35, step S1D17 in FIG. 36 (a), and step S1F21 in FIG. 38 (b)). In the state B, the notification of the stop operation order (operation navigation) for the internally elected winning combination may be executed, and this operation navigation is not displayed in the state A.

As described above, when the state B is set, it is possible to shift to a state that is advantageous to the player, but if the state B continues for a long period of time, excessive profits can be obtained, or even for a short period of time, many There is a risk of inciting gambling by earning profits. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a situation, the following two are separately provided as the termination conditions of the state B.

The first is the case where the state B continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), which is managed by using the number of games that can be continued in the state B (FIG. 38 (b)). If No is determined in step S1F09 of the next game, it becomes Yes in step S1F03 of the next game and the state A is entered). The second is the case where a predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400) of medals is obtained from the time when the net increase number is the lowest, and this is managed by using the MY counter (FIG. 39 (a)). If Yes is determined in step S1G21 of the above, Yes is determined in step S1F03 immediately after that, and the state A is entered). When one of these state B end conditions (reaching the limiter) is satisfied, the state A is set (arrow (I) in FIG. 12). Further, in the state B, the state B end condition is satisfied and the state A is set even when the CZ ends, the AT is not won, the number of remaining AT games is small, and there is no special zone right. (Arrow (J) in FIG. 12).

In the present embodiment, the state B flag is used to distinguish between the state A and the state B. If the state B flag is off, the state A is indicated, and if the state B flag is on, the state B is indicated.

<Outline of processing>
Hereinafter, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 15 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S103, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and the winning line indicator lamp 120 is turned on according to the insertion of the medal. In addition, when a medal is inserted, preparations are made for transmission of an insertion command indicating this. If the replay is won in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is inserted, so that the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning line are determined, and the game is played. To start.

In step S105, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out, and an internal lottery (lottery for the combination) is performed using this and the random number value acquired from the random number value generation circuit 316 to determine the internal winning combination. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S109, the game start state processing is executed. Here, processing according to each game state and processing related to the display of the operation navigation are performed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S111, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer update process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set in the game interval timer. Further, at the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, preparations are made for transmitting a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed, the optical sensor provided on each reel is detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. It should be noted that the game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 s in the present embodiment) and suppresses gambling.

In step S113, the reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time the stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, the reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and the reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) to the first sub-control unit 400 for each stop operation, and the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) is made every time the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S115.

In step S115, the winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the bell (small role 23) has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S117, if any winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the number of medals given is displayed using the payout number indicator 127.

In step S119, the game state update process is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the start preparation and end processing of the state B and the update of the status related to the state B are performed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<State processing at the start of the game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the details of the game start state processing (step S109) in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the game start state processing (step S109) in FIG.

First, in step S1001 executed first, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is off. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1031.

In step S1003, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the state B based on the internally won combination.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S1003 has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1041.

In step S1007, the state B flag is set to on, and the number of games that can be continued in state B is set. Here, the number of games that can be continued in the state B is a value that defines the number of games that can be continued in the state B, and is configured so that the state B is not maintained beyond this value. In the present embodiment, 1500 is set as this value, but it may be another constant, and it may be determined by lottery from a plurality of values without being limited to the constant.

In step S1009, the value of the MY counter is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1011, the mode is set with reference to the table of FIG. 17 (a). In this embodiment, three types of CZ transition modes, mode A, mode B, and mode C, are provided, and the number of CZ transition games is set based on these modes. Here, for example, if the set value is 1, the probability that mode A is selected is 70%, the probability that mode B is set is 20%, and the probability that mode C is selected is 10%. .. The lottery probability of the mode may be different for each setting, such that the higher the setting, the higher the transition rate to the mode C is set. Further, the mode that is most likely to be set may be different for each setting.

In step S1013, the value of the number of CZ transition games is set with reference to the table of FIG. 17B. For example, when mode A is set as the CZ transition mode, the probability that the number of CZ transition games will be selected in the range of 201 to 300 is 10%. Further, for example, when the mode B is set, the probability that the number of CZ transition games is selected in the range of 101 to 200 is 20%. As for the number of CZ transition games, any value in these numerical ranges is selected by a further lottery, but the lottery probability at this time may be equal within the numerical range or within the numerical range. A bias may be provided so that a specific range or a specific value is easily (or difficult to be selected) selected. In the present embodiment, after the state B is set in the normal state, the game shifts to CZ when the number of CZ shift games set here elapses without shifting to CZ.

In step S1015, the value of the cumulative acquisition pt is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1017.

In step S1017, the value of the number of games elapsed in state B is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1019.

In step S1019, the value of the number of pt high-probability remaining games is set to 10, and the process proceeds to step S1041.

In step S1031, the game start state B-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1041. The details of this state B transition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1041, preparations are made for transmitting the internal winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the game start state processing is terminated. In addition, this internal winning command includes the condition device number of the internal winning, the game state, the number of remaining games in each state (the number of CZ remaining games, the number of AT remaining games and the number of additional games), the acquired pt and the cumulative acquired pt, pt. Number of high-probability remaining games, number of pt high-probability sets, presence / absence and result of execution of CZ lottery and AT lottery (step S1211 in FIG. 19), state B flag, pt high probability flag, number of state B elapsed games, number of CZ transition games , The state of the conditional addition flag, the condition for clearing the conditional addition, the presence / absence of various rights (BAR right, peach 7 right), instruction information, privilege type arrangement, arrangement of the number of games to be added, and the like.

<Processing related to state B at the start of the game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the details of the game start state B related process (step S1031) in the game start state process of FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game start state B related process (step S1031) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1103, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1103, normally related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1121. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is CZ. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1107, CZ-related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1121. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111. If not, the process proceeds to step S1112.

In step S1111, AT-related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1121. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 (a).

In step S1112, it is determined whether or not the game state is the special zone state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1113, and if not (in this example, the game state is neither normal (state B), CZ, AT, nor the specialized zone, that is, the game state is ED. In the case of), the process proceeds to step S1121.

In step S1113, the special zone-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1121. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 (b).

In step S1121, the instruction information setting process is executed, and the game start state B related process is terminated. This instruction information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

<Normal related processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the details of the normal related processing (step S1103) in the game start state B related processing of FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the normal related processing (step S1103) in FIG.

First, in the first step S1201, it is determined whether or not the 1000pt arrival flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1211, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, the pt high probability set number lottery is executed. In the pt high probability set number lottery, the lottery type (see the lottery type column of FIG. 10) associated with the internal winning combination and the table of FIG. 21 (c) are used. For example, in the conditional device corresponding to the lottery type B (for example, the conditional device number 5), the pt high probability set number lottery is won with a probability of 20%. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1205.

In step S1205, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S1203 has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1207, and if not, the process proceeds to step 1221.

In step S1207, the value of the pt high probability set number is added. In determining the value to be added here, the current set value and the table of FIG. 21D are used. For example, when the set value is 1, 1 is added with a probability of 75%, and 2 is added with a probability of 25%. Then, the process proceeds to step S1209.

In step S1209, the pt high probability flag is set to on, and the process proceeds to step S1221.

In step S1211, a lottery (CZ lottery, AT lottery) for setting the CZ and AT states is executed. In these lottery, the table of FIG. 22A is used. For example, when the set value is set to 1 to 4, the CZ lottery is won with a probability of 20%, and the AT lottery is won with a probability of 5%.

In step S1213, 1000 is subtracted from the value of the cumulative acquisition pt, and the process proceeds to step S1215.

In step S1215, the 1000pt arrival flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1217.

In step S1217, the value of the pt high probability set number is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1219.

In step s1219, the pt high probability flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1221.

In step S1221, the pt acquisition-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1231. The details of this pt acquisition-related process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1231, 1 is added to the value of the number of games elapsed in state B, and the process proceeds to step S1233.

In step S1233, it is determined whether or not the value of the pt high probability remaining game number is greater than 0. If this condition is satisfied, this normal related process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1235.

In step S1235, it is determined whether or not the value of the cumulative acquisition pt is 1000 pt or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1237, and if not, the normal related process is terminated.

In step S1237, the 1000pt arrival flag is set to on, ending this normal related process.

Next, the details of the pt acquisition-related process (step S1221) in the normal-related process of FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pt acquisition related process (step S1221) in FIG.

First, in the first step S1241, it is determined whether or not the pt high probability flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1243, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1245.

In step S1243, the pt lottery (high probability mode) is executed. In the pt lottery here, the lottery type (see the column of the lottery type in FIG. 10) associated with the internal winning combination and the table in FIG. 21B are used. For example, in the conditional device corresponding to the lottery type A (for example, the conditional device number 1), 10 pt is acquired with an 80% probability and 20 pt is acquired with a 20% probability. Note that these probabilities and values are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1247.

In step S1245, the pt lottery (normal mode) is executed. In the pt lottery here, the lottery type (see the lottery type column of FIG. 10) associated with the internal winning combination and the table of FIG. 21A are used. For example, in the conditional device corresponding to the lottery type A (for example, the conditional device number 1), 5pt is acquired with a probability of 15% and 10pt is acquired with a probability of 5%. Note that these probabilities and values are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1247.

In step S1247, the pt acquired in step S1243 or step S1245 is added to the cumulative acquired pt, and the process proceeds to step S1251.

In step S1251, it is determined whether or not the value of the pt high probability remaining game number is greater than 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1253, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1255.

In step S1253, the value of the number of remaining games with a high probability of pt is subtracted by 1, and the pt acquisition-related processing is completed.

In step S1255, it is determined whether or not the number of pt high probability sets is greater than 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1257, and if not, the pt acquisition-related process ends.

In step S1257, the value of the number of pt high probability sets is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1259.

In step S1259, the value of the number of remaining games with a high probability of pt is added by 10, and the process proceeds to step S1253.

<CZ related processing>
Next, the details of the CZ-related processing (step S1107) in the game start state B-related processing of FIG. 18 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the CZ-related process (step S1107) in FIG.

First, in step S1301 executed first, the value of the number of remaining CZ games is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the player has either the BAR right or the peach 7 right (the right acquired at the time of winning the AT). If this condition is satisfied, the CZ-related process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, a lottery (AT lottery) for whether or not to set the AT state is executed. In this lottery, the lottery type (see the lottery type column of FIG. 10) associated with the internal winning combination and the table of FIG. 22B are used. For example, in the conditional device corresponding to the lottery type B (for example, the conditional device number 5), the AT lottery is won with a probability of 20%. In addition, if the lottery is won here, a lottery (sorting lottery) for acquiring either the BAR right or the peach 7 right is subsequently executed. The table shown in FIG. 22 (c) is used for this lottery. For example, when the set value is set to 1 to 5, the BAR right is acquired with an 80% probability, and the peach 7 right is acquired with a 20% probability. If the AT lottery is won in the process here, either the BAR right or the peach 7 right is acquired. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery has one stage, but for example, if the lottery is won a plurality of times (for example, three times), the AT state may be entered. Further, in this configuration, when the peach 7 right is acquired, it may be confirmed that the state shifts to the AT state even if the player has not won a plurality of times. In addition, a BAR right acquisition lottery may be performed, and winning the re-game combination 10 in a state where the BAR right has been acquired may be counted as one of a plurality of winnings.

Next, the details of the AT-related processing (step S1111) in the game start state B-related processing of FIG. 18 will be described with reference to FIG. 24A. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the AT-related process (step S1111) in FIG.

First, in the first step S1401, the value of the number of remaining AT games is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, the AT level set in the AT level determination process described later is referred to with reference to FIG. 32 (b).

In step S1403, a lottery for adding the number of remaining AT games is executed. In this lottery, the lottery type (see the column of the lottery type in FIG. 10) associated with the internal winning combination and the lottery table for adding the number of remaining AT games in FIG. 25 (a) or FIG. 26 (a) are used. For example, when the AT level referred to (acquired) in step S1402 is the AT level high, the lottery table (AT level high) for adding the number of remaining AT games shown in FIG. 25 (a) is referred to, and the lottery type D is supported. When the condition device (for example, condition device number 7) is internally elected, the number of remaining AT games is added with a probability of 40%, and the breakdown is 10 with a probability of 90% and 20 with a probability of 10%. It has become.

When the AT level referred to (acquired) in step S1402 is low AT level, the lottery table for adding the number of remaining AT games (low AT level) shown in FIG. 26A is referred to, and the lottery type D is supported. When the condition device (for example, condition device number 7) is internally elected, the number of remaining AT games is added with a probability of 30%, and the breakdown is 10 with a probability of 90% and 20 with a probability of 10%. It has become.

In this example, the addition probability of the AT remaining game number addition lottery table (AT level high) shown in FIG. 25 (a) is the addition probability of the AT remaining game number addition lottery table (AT level low) shown in FIG. 26 (a). Higher or identical. Further, the number of additional games of the AT remaining game number additional lottery table (AT level high) shown in FIG. 25 (a) is the number of additional games of the AT remaining game number additional lottery table (AT level low) shown in FIG. 26 (a). Larger games are more likely to be selected or are identical.

Note that this probability and value are examples, and any value can be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery for adding the number of remaining AT games is executed for all the conditional devices, but this lottery may not be executed depending on the conditional devices. Further, in this example, the additional performance is configured to decrease at a high AT level, but the method of realizing this may reduce the additional probability, or increase the proportion of the smaller additional games in the breakdown of the additional games. You may do so. In addition, it is not necessary to lower the level for all values, and for those with a low frequency of addition (for example, a condition device such as a strong cherry with a relatively low appearance rate), the winning probability and the breakdown may not be changed. With this configuration, in the case of a rare condition device, it may be possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction by giving the player a solid benefit.

In this example, the AT level set in the AT level determination process is configured so as not to change until the end of AT. Therefore, for the player who performed the high-base game in the game before the AT transition (AT level). (When the AT level is set to low), the ball is loosely ejected as a whole in AT, and for the player who played the low base game in the game before the transition to AT (AT level is set to high AT level). In some cases), the ball will be rough on the whole at AT. The low AT level may be changed to the high AT level (or the high AT level may be changed to the low AT level) by lottery, etc., and the payout rate (payout rate) during the AT or the advantageous section in which the player is staying may be changed. If it is too high (or too low), it may be configured to lower (or raise) the AT level.

In step S1405, the number of remaining AT games is added based on the lottery result of step S1403, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the conditional addition flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1411, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1409.

In step S1409, a conditional addition lottery is executed. Here, an additional lottery for the number of remaining AT games obtained when the conditional addition (details will be described later) is cleared is executed. In this lottery, the table shown in FIG. 25 (b) is used when the AT level is high, and the table shown in FIG. 26 (b) is used when the AT level is low, and the number of additional games is 20%. 10 games are selected, 20 games are selected as the number of additional games with a probability of 5%, 30 games are selected as the number of additional games with a probability of 5%, and 100 games are selected as the number of additional games with a probability of 0.1%. Be selected.

In this example, the number of games of the conditional additional lottery (AT level high) shown in FIG. 25 (b) and the number of games of the conditional additional lottery (AT level low) shown in FIG. 26 (b) are made the same. However, this probability and value are examples, and any value can be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the conditional addition lottery is executed for all the conditional devices, but this lottery may not be executed depending on the conditional device. If the conditional addition lottery is won, the conditional addition flag is set to on, and the lottery for the condition for clearing the conditional addition is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1411, a lottery (special zone right lottery) is executed as to whether or not to acquire the right to move to the special zone (the number of special zone sets). In this lottery, the lottery type (see the lottery type column of FIG. 10) associated with the internal winning combination and the special zone right lottery table of FIG. 25 (c) or FIG. 26 (c) are used. For example, when the AT level is high AT level, the condition device corresponding to the lottery type D (for example, the condition device number 7) is referred to by referring to the special zone right lottery table (high AT level) shown in FIG. 25 (c). ), There is a 10% chance that you will win this lottery.

When the AT level is low, the special zone right lottery table (low AT level) shown in FIG. 26C is referred to, and the condition device corresponding to the lottery type D (for example, the condition device number 7). ), There is a 5% chance that you will win this lottery.

In this example, the winning probability of the special zone right lottery table (AT level high) shown in FIG. 25 (c) is higher than the winning probability of the special zone right lottery table (AT level low) shown in FIG. 26 (c). Higher or identical. Note that this probability and value are examples, and any value can be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the special zone right lottery is executed for all the conditional devices, but this lottery may not be executed depending on the conditional device. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1413.

In step S1413, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S1411 has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1415, and if not, the AT-related process ends.

In step S1415, 1 is added to the value of the number of specialized zone sets, and this AT-related processing ends.

<Specialization related processing>
Next, the details of the specialization-related processing (step S1113) in the game start state B-related processing of FIG. 18 will be described with reference to FIG. 24 (b). FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the specialization-related process (step S1113) in FIG.

First, in the first step S1421, it is determined whether or not the privilege type of the privilege type array [2] is other than "H". If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1423, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1425.

In step S1423, the value of the planned number of games to be added array [2] is set by lottery. In this lottery, the privilege types stored in the privilege type array [2] and the table of FIG. 27 (c) are used. For example, when the privilege type is "A", 5 is set with an 80% probability, 10 is set with a 10% probability, 15 is set with a 5% probability, and 20 is set with a 5% probability. Is set. Note that this probability and value are examples, and any value can be adopted. In addition, when the privilege type is "L", 200 is set with a 100% probability, but for the value set with a 100% probability in this way, the value is set without performing a lottery. May be. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1425.

In step S1425, the information stored in the privilege type array and the number of games to be added is shifted. Specifically, the information of the privilege type arrangements [1] to [6] is moved (shifted) to the privilege type arrangements [0] to [5], and the information of the number of games to be added [1] to [2] is transferred. Move (shift) to the array of the number of games to be added [0] to [1]. If there is a privilege type that follows with reference to the currently set scenario (FIG. 27 (a)), the privilege type following the privilege type array [6] is stored. After that, this specialization-related process is terminated.

In this specialization-related process, step S1425 may be executed before step S1421. In this case, the lottery result in step S1423 is set in the array of planned number of games to be added [1]. Further, in this configuration, the number of arrangements of the number of games scheduled to be added can be further reduced.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the details of the instruction information setting process (step S1121) in the game start state B related process of FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the instruction information setting process (step S1121) in FIG.

First, in step S1501 executed first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is either the CZ, AT state, or ED state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1503, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1511.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) has been internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1505, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1505, the correct push order (bell navigation, full navigation) of the push order bell is set as the instruction information, and the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special zone. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1513, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) has been internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1515, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1515, of the correct push order of the push order bell, only the first stop (bell navigation, half navigation) is set as the instruction information, and the instruction information setting process ends.

<Game status update process>
Next, the details of the game state update process (step S119) in the main process of the main control unit of FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the game state update process (step S119) in FIG.

First, in step S1A21 executed first, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A01, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A27 without performing the process related to the state B.

In step S1A01, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A03, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A05.

In step S1A03, the update process is normally executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A23. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A05, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is CZ. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A07, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A09.

In step S1A07, the update process during CZ is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A23. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S1A09, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A11, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A12.

In step S1A11, the update process during AT is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A23. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36 (a).

In step S1A12, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the special zone state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A13, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A23.

In step S1A13, the update process during specialization is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A23. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

In step S1A23, the state B end determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A25. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 (b).

In step S1A25, the instruction information is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1A27.

In step S1A27, preparation for transmission of the game state update command is performed. This command includes the condition device number that was internally won, the judgment result of the winning combination, the game state, the state B flag, the pt high probability flag, the 1000pt arrival flag, the number of additional games by clearing the conditional addition, the privilege type array, and the life value. , Etc. are included.

<Normal update process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the details of the normal intermediate update process (step S1A03) in the game state update process of FIG. 29 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the normal middle update process (step S1A03) in FIG. 29.

First, in step S1B01, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery for normal related processing (step S1211 in FIG. 19) has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B02, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1B05.

In step S1B02, the AT level determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1B03. The details of this AT level determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32 (a), but in this process, at what rate high-base games and low-base games are played during normal times (until the AT is won). The AT level is determined depending on the height. Here, the AT level is based on the player's medal acquisition condition (ball output rate), operation procedure (reel push, rare small win winning condition, push order), display role, etc. in normal times. It is an index for changing the level of the lottery value such as addition during AT.

In step S1B03, the game state is set to the AT state, and the initial value is set for the number of remaining AT games. In determining the initial value of the number of remaining AT games, the determination result (AT level) of the AT level determination process in step S1B02 is referred to, and when the AT level is high, the AT shown in FIG. 31A is shown. Initial value of the number of remaining AT games at the time of winning The initial value of the AT game is determined based on the lottery table (high AT level), and when the AT level is low, the remaining AT at the time of winning AT shown in FIG. 31 (b). Initial value of the number of games The initial value of the AT game is determined based on the lottery table (AT level is low).

Specifically, since the AT is won in the normal state (AT direct hit), when the AT level is high, the AT remaining game number initial value lottery table (AT) shown in FIG. 31 (a). Based on the high level), 70% chance is 30 games, 20% chance is 50 games, 7% chance is 100 games, 3% chance is 200 games, and then this is normal. End the update process. On the other hand, when the AT level is low, there is an 80% probability of 30 games and 15% based on the AT remaining AT remaining game number initial value lottery table (AT level low) shown in FIG. 31 (b). After 50 games with a probability of 50 games, 100 games with a probability of 4%, and 200 games with a probability of 1% are set as initial values, this normal update process is terminated.

In this example, the number of AT games (initial value high) in the AT remaining game number initial value lottery table (AT level high) at the time of AT winning shown in FIG. 31 (a) including the winning opportunity other than the AT winning (AT direct hit) in the normal state. As for the value), a game larger than the number of AT games (initial value) shown in FIG. 31 (b) (AT level is low) is easily selected. The number of AT games (initial value) differs depending on the AT level. For example, when the AT level is high, the number of initial sets of AT is set to be larger than when the AT level is low. For example, as the initial number of AT levels, a plurality of sets may be selected when the AT level is high, and one set may be selected when the AT level is low.

In step S1B05, it is determined whether or not the CZ lottery for normal related processing (step S1211 in FIG. 19) has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B07, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1B09.

In step S1B07, the game state is set to CZ, and the number of remaining CZ games is set to 20 as an initial value. After that, this normal update process is terminated.

In step S1B09, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of games elapsed in the state B is equal to or greater than the value of the number of CZ transition games. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B07, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1B11.

In step S1B11, it is determined whether or not both the number of pt high-probability remaining games and the number of pt high-probability sets are 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B13, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1B15.

In step S1B13, the pt high probability flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1B17.

In step S1B15, the pt high probability flag is set to on, and the process proceeds to step S1B17.

In step S1B17, the AT level adjustment process is executed, and the update process is normally completed. The details of this AT level adjustment process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32 (b). In this process, the AT level referred to in the AT level determination process in step S1B02 is adjusted. In this example, the AT level is adjusted only during normal times, and the player does not affect the AT level as to how the player hits during CZ or AT. doing.

<AT level adjustment processing>
Next, the details of the AT level adjustment process (step S1B17) in the normal middle update process of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the AT level adjustment process (step S1B17) in FIG.

In step S1B21, it is determined whether or not the condition device number 15 (condition device in which the replaying combinations 1 to 4, 7, 8, 17, and 18 are duplicated and internally won) is internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B23, and if not, the AT level adjustment process ends.

In step S1B23, 1 is added to the number of times the condition device 15 is won, and the process proceeds to step S1B25.

In step S1B25, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the special replay (replay combination 17 or 18) is displayed on the winning line (whether or not the special replay is won). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B27, and if not, the AT level adjustment process ends.

In step S1B27, 1 is added to the number of special rip display times, and this AT level adjustment process ends.

<AT level judgment processing>
Next, the details of the AT level determination process (step S1B02) in the normal middle update process of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the AT level determination process (step S1B02) in FIG.

In step S1B31, the number of times the special rip is displayed ÷ the number of times the condition device 15 is won (= special replay display rate) is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated value is smaller than 0.2. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B33, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1B35.

In step S1B33, the AT level is set to the high AT level, and the AT level determination process ends.

In step S1B35, the AT level is set to the low AT level, and the AT level determination process ends.

As described with reference to FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), in the slot machine 100 according to this example, the number of times the condition device 15 is won (the number of times the condition device of the special replay is won) and the number of times the special rip is displayed (the number of times the special replay is displayed). It is configured to set the high and low of the AT level based on the number of impressions). In this example, the values of the number of times the condition device 15 is won and the number of times the special rip is displayed are initialized to 0 each time the advantageous section is reset or the end of the AT, but information on the AT performance including these values is provided. It may be carried over across advantageous sections without initialization.

In this example, in the AT level adjustment process of the normal middle update process, the player plays a high base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing position 0 to 9) from the number of times the condition device 15 is won and the number of times the special lip is displayed. Calculate what was done, and perform high-base game (stop operation of left reel pressing position 0 to 9) at a certain ratio (20% in this example) or more in the AT level determination processing of the normal middle update processing. If this is the case, while setting the AT level to a low AT level, a high base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 9) is performed at a rate of less than a certain rate (20% in this example). In that case, it is determined that the low-base game is substantially performed, and the AT level is set to the high AT level.

The "certain ratio" that is the criterion for judging the AT level is just an example, and is appropriately set (changed) according to the net increase in the number of sheets, the base value in the low base game, the base value in the high base game, the ball ejection performance of the AT, etc. You may. Further, in this example, the AT level is set to two levels of high and low, but the AT level may be set to three or more levels. In this case, the higher the ratio of high-base games, the lower the AT addition performance. Just do it.

Further, the judgment criteria of the AT level is not limited, and for example, if the special replay is displayed at the time of internal winning of the condition device number 15, 1 is subtracted (-1), otherwise 1 is added (+1). The AT level may be set for each point, and these determination criteria may be used when determining by the pressing position or when determining by a condition device other than replay.

Further, since the symbol combination corresponding to the special replay of this example is not displayed in the condition device related to other replaying combinations, when the special replay is won, the player internally wins the condition device number 15. It is a specification that can be grasped. With such specifications, the AT level is more likely to be set to the AT level low due to the increase in the prizes of the special replay (the increase in the number of times the special rip is displayed), so it is not pleasing as a player, but the special replay It is also possible to use the winning prize as a material for determining the AT level, and there is an advantage that the enjoyment of predicting the AT after the transition increases in the normal game state.

As a modification to solve such a problem, the special replay can be displayed (winning) depending on the pressing position and pressing order even in the condition device of other replaying combination that is not related to the AT level adjustment processing. , It is also possible to make the player unaware of the relationship between the number of special replay prizes and the level of AT level.

Further, in this example, the player's game tendency (high-base game or low-base game) is determined from the number of times the special replay is displayed, but it may be determined using another condition device, for example, a condition. Using the device number 16, the player's game tendency (high-base game or low-base game) may be determined based on the number of winnings of the 8-card combination and the 12-card combination.

In addition, as in this example, if the winning combination of condition device number 16 that affects the base does not judge the level of AT level, it is possible to aim for a bell with a large number of payouts depending on the mood of the player. In addition, even if you win the bell, it does not affect the level of AT level, so you can give the player the option to play with a different game tendency than usual, and the range of games will expand. There is.

Further, in this example, the judgment is made by the condition device of the replaying player who does not pay out the medals, but with such a configuration, the judgment can be made about the level of AT level depending on the payout of medals. It gets harder. The same effect is exhibited in the winning combination where the number of medals paid out is the same no matter where the button is pressed.

Further, as another method, a method of recording at which position the player presses the stop button each time the player operates the stop button may be adopted. When this method is adopted, the pressing position of the left reel 110 of the player can be monitored for each game regardless of the condition device or the winning combination, so that the player is trying to play a high-base game or a low-base game. It becomes possible to more accurately grasp whether or not the game is being played. Even if the player makes a mistake in the stop operation, it may be affected immediately. Therefore, the pressing position may be recorded only when the specific condition device is won.

Further, in this example, the base is different depending on the pressing position of the same reel (left reel 110 in this example) as a whole. , Both the pressing order and the pressing position may be adopted to make them different. For example, it may be determined that a forward push is a low base game, a reverse push is a high base game (or a forward push is a high base game, and a reverse push is a low base game). .. Even when such a method is adopted, it may be determined whether or not a high-base game has been performed based on the outcome (combination of symbols displayed as stopped), the number of payouts, the combination of the condition device and the outcome, and the like.

Further, in this example, the high or low AT level is determined by the ratio (number of times) of the high-base game and the low-base game, but other methods may be used. For example, even if there is no winning combination in which the number of payouts is biased depending on the pressing position such as the condition device number 16, the high or low of the AT level may be determined by the payout rate and the base until the first hit. With such a configuration, even if the number of balls is greatly reduced during normal times, it can be expected that the AT level will increase, so it will be possible to maintain and promote the motivation to play. .. On the contrary, when a high-base game is performed, the AT level may be lowered in order to prevent unexpected ball ejection.

Further, in this example, the high or low of the AT level was judged by the ratio (number of times) of the high base game and the low base game in the normal time, but the ratio (number of times) of the high base game and the low base game in the game state other than the normal time. You may judge the level of AT level by. For example, in an A + ART machine or an A + AT machine, the performance of the ART or AT may be changed depending on the number of acquired cards in the bonus. That is, in the situation where there are a plurality of states, the transition probability from one state to another state is the same (for example, the lottery value is the same regardless of the operation of the player), and the medal acquisition status in a certain state before the transition. Any game machine that changes the medal acquisition performance in the state after the transition may be used.

Further, the AT performance (AT level high or low) may be determined based on the number of medals won in the CZ, or the AT performance (AT level high or low) may be determined based on the number of medals won in the pseudo-bonus. May be determined, or the number of RT games may be changed based on the number of correct push order answers in the bonus on the A + RT machine. Further, when many medals are obtained before the first hit of AT, the performance in the state after the first hit may be changed.

Also, based on the player's playing tendency in a certain state, in the state after the transition, the probability of addition is low, the hidden navigation rate of rare small roles is increased, and even if the flag of 7 match or BAR match is pulled, it is avoided. The probability that the navigation is displayed may increase, the navigation probability of the push order bell may change, the net increase in the number of sheets may change, and so on. In addition, if the medal cannot be obtained before the first hit, the player may start with the right of the special zone, or may start in a high probability state (probability change state).

<High-base game and low-base game>
Next, an example of a high-base game and a low-base game will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

<High-base game and low-base game / Example 1>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing changes in the net increase in the number of games added when the number of AT added games is different depending on the ratio (number of times) of the high-base game and the low-base game in the normal state.

In the slot machine 100 according to this example, for the AT lottery, either a high base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 9) or a low base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 10 to 19) is performed. Since the common lottery table shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b) is used regardless of whether the game is performed (regardless of whether the AT level is high or low), the AT first hit probability in the high-base game and the AT first hit probability in the low-base game The AT first hit probabilities are the same probabilities (1/500 in the example shown in FIG. 33A).

On the other hand, regarding the special replay display rate (= number of special rip display times ÷ number of times the condition device 15 is won) described with reference to FIG. 32 (b), the high base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 9) is the first AT. If it continues until it hits, the special replay is won every time the condition device number 15 is internally won, so the special replay display rate is 1 (= 100%), and the low base game (left reel pressing position 10 to 19) If the stop operation) is continued until the first hit of the AT, the special replay display rate becomes 0 (= 0%) because the special replay is not won even if the condition device number 15 is internally won.

Regarding the lottery for adding the number of remaining AT games, when a high-base game (stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 9) is performed during a normal game (when a low AT level is set), FIG. 26 ( While using the lottery table (AT level low) for adding the number of remaining AT games shown in a), when a low base game (stop operation of left reel pressing positions 10 to 19) is performed during a normal game (AT level high is set). In the case of), since the lottery table (AT level high) for adding the number of remaining AT games shown in FIG. 25 (a) is used, the average number of medals acquired from the start to the end of AT (AT average number of acquired games) is high. The game is 500 and the low base game is 580.

Regarding the average number of ATs acquired, the profit corresponding to the difference between the medals consumed in the high-base game and the medals consumed in the low-base game during the normal game is used as the AT-added game with a high AT level (low-base game). As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the expected value of the final net increase number is the same in the high-base game and the low-base game because it is configured to be given to the person.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), when a high-base game is performed during a normal game, the slope (decrease) of the net increase number until the first hit of the AT becomes gentle, but the addition performance of the AT is low. , AT will end in a short period of time. On the other hand, when a low-base game is performed during a normal game, the slope (decrease) of the net increase number until the first AT hit becomes steep, but the AT addition performance is high, so the AT period becomes long. ..

During AT, both the normal high base game (AT level low) and the normal low base game (AT level high) are designed to have the same net increase in number. In the graph shown in FIG. 33 (b), the AT initial hit is as designed, and both the normal high base game (AT level low) and the normal low base game (AT level high) are medals according to the average number of ATs acquired. It shows the image when you can get the medal, and if it is as designed, there is a big difference in the payout rate and the net increase in the number of balls between the normal high base game (AT level low) and the normal low base game (AT level high). Is configured so that

FIG. 33 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a slump graph obtained by repeating normal and AT. In this slump graph, the timing of the first hit of the AT at the normal time is not aligned, and the slope (the rate of increase of the net increase number) during AT (the period during which the net increase number increases) is the same.

As shown in the figure, in high-base games, the number of medals decreases slowly during normal times, but AT is difficult to continue, so the overall change in the net increase is small, but in low-base games, the change is small. , The number of medals decreases quickly in normal times, but AT tends to last for a long time, so it is easy to increase the number of balls. As a result, the top and bottom of the balls are large, and a large difference ball is likely to occur.

According to this example, since the wave of the ball output changes depending on the hitting method of the player, it is possible to let the player choose what kind of hitting method to use, so that the range of the game can be expanded.

Further, according to this example, information on the player's profit in the first game state (normal game state in this example) (the number of payouts of the game medium in this example), or the stop of the player in the first game state. Depending on the button operation result (timing when the player presses the left reel 110 in this example), it is easy to acquire the game medium in the second game state (AT state in this example) after the transition (AT game in this example). Since it is possible to change the ease of adding numbers), it is possible to appropriately control the payout of the game medium through the first game state and the second game state.

<High-base game and low-base game / Example 2>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the net increase in the number of sheets when the frequency of the bell navigation during AT is different depending on the ratio (number of times) of the high-base game and the low-base game in the normal state.

In this example, instead of changing the probability of adding the number of games during AT depending on the level of AT, there are cases where navigation is performed when the condition device of the push order bell is won and cases where navigation is not performed. The net increase in the number of sheets is changed.

Specifically, when the AT level is a low base game at normal time (AT level is high), the navigation rate of the push order bell during AT becomes 100% (increasing the frequency of navigation), and the normal time is high. In the case of a base game (AT level is low), the navigation rate of the push order bell during AT becomes 80% (decrease the frequency of navigation).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), the expected value of the net increase in the number of sheets during AT is 3 cards / G for the normal high base game (AT level low) and 2 for the normal high base game (AT level low) 2. The number of sheets / G is set, and the expected value of the net increase in the number of sheets per 1G is smaller in the normal high-based game (AT level is low).

Further, in this example, by adjusting the frequency of the bell navigation during AT according to the level of AT, when the game changes according to the design value, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the high-base game and the low-base game Regardless of which way you hit, the number of games until you get a specific number of games is the same.

According to this example, for a player who has performed a high-base game in the game before the AT transition (when the AT level is set to the AT level low), the ball is loosely ejected as a whole in the AT, and the AT shifts. For a player who has played a low-base game in the previous game (when the AT level is set to a high AT level), the overall result is a rough ball in the AT.

According to this example, the information regarding the player's profit in the first gaming state (normal gaming state in this example) (the number of payouts of the gaming medium in this example), or the stop button of the player in the first gaming state. Depending on the operation result (timing when the player presses the left reel 110 in this example), it is easy to acquire the game medium in the second game state (AT state in this example) after the transition (Bell Navi during AT in this example). Since the execution frequency of the game can be changed, it is possible to appropriately control the payout of the game medium through the first game state and the second game state.

<Update process during CZ>
Next, the details of the CZ middle update process (step S1A07) in the game state update process of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the update process during CZ (step S1A07) in FIG. 29.

First, in step S1C01, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the condition device number 2 has been internally elected while the BAR right has been acquired. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C04, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1C03.

In step S1C03, it is determined whether or not the condition device number 3 or the condition device number 4 is internally won while the peach 7 right is acquired. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C04, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1C07.

In step S1C04, the AT level determination process described with reference to FIG. 32B is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1C05.

In step S1C05, the game state is set to the AT state, and the initial value is set for the number of remaining AT games. The table of FIG. 22D is used to determine the initial value of the number of remaining AT games. Here, the AT is won in CZ. For example, if the BAR right is acquired, the initial value is 50 games with a 70% probability, 100 games with a 25% probability, and 200 games with a 5% probability. Set. The acquired BAR right or peach 7 right is deleted (used) in this process. After that, the update process during this CZ is terminated.

In step S1C07, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining CZ games is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C09, and if not, the CZ update process is terminated.

In step S1C09, it is determined whether or not the BAR right or the peach 7 right has been acquired. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C04, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1C11.

In step S1C11, the state B end flag is set to on, and the update process during CZ is ended.

<Update process during AT>
Next, the details of the in-AT update process (step S1A11) in the game state update process of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (a). FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the update process during AT (step S1A11) in FIG. 29.

First, in step S1D01, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the clearing condition set in the conditional addition lottery for AT-related processing (step S1409 in FIG. 24A) is satisfied. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D03, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1D05.

In step S1D03, the number of remaining AT games is added according to the privilege (addition of the number of remaining AT games) set in the conditional addition lottery of AT-related processing (step S1409 in FIG. 24A), and the process proceeds to step S1D05.

In step S1D05, the conditional addition flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1D07.

In step S1D07, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT games is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D09, and if not, the AT-time update process is terminated.

In step S1D09, it is determined whether or not the number of specialized zone sets is greater than 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D11, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1D17.

In step S1D11, the gaming state is set in the special zone, and the process proceeds to step S1D13.

In step S1D13, the number of specialized zone sets is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1D15.

In step S1D15, the special zone initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1D19. The details of the special zone initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36 (b).

In step S1D19, the ED state transition determination process is executed, and the update process during AT is terminated. The details of the ED state transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 (a), but in the ED state transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the ED start condition described with reference to FIG. 12 is satisfied. Do.

In step S1D17, the state B end flag is set to on, and the update process during AT is ended.

<Specialized zone initial setting process>
Next, the details of the special zone initial setting process (step S1D15) in the AT in-time update process of FIG. 36 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (b). FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the special zone initial setting process (step S1D15) in FIG. 36 (a).

First, in step S1D21, which is executed first, both the privilege type array and the scheduled number of games to be added array are initialized, and the process proceeds to step S1D23.

In step S1D23, the scenario used during the specialization zone is set by lottery. In this lottery, the table of FIG. 27 (a) is used. In the table of FIG. 27 (a), scenario 1 is set with a probability of 50%, and the average number of games added when this scenario is set is 50. Note that this probability and value are examples, and any value can be adopted. After this process, the process proceeds to step S1D25.

In step S1D25, the privilege types corresponding to the first 6 games of the set scenarios are read out and stored in order in the privilege type arrays [1] to [6]. After that, the process proceeds to step S1D27.

In step S1D27, the value of the planned number of games to be added array [1] is set by lottery. In this lottery, the privilege types stored in the privilege type array [1] and the table of FIG. 27 (c) are used. For example, when the privilege type is "A", 5 is set with an 80% probability, 10 is set with a 10% probability, 15 is set with a 5% probability, and 20 is set with a 5% probability. Is set. Note that this probability and value are examples, and any value can be adopted.

it can. In addition, when the privilege type is "L", 200 is set with a 100% probability, but for the value set with a 100% probability in this way, the value is set without performing a lottery. May be. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1D29.

In step S1D29, the life value is set to 3, and the special zone initial setting process ends.

<Update process during specialized zone>
Next, the details of the specializing update process (step S1A13) in the game state update process of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the specializing update process (step S1A13) in FIG. 29.

First, in step S1E01 executed first, it is determined whether or not the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "L". If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E11, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E03.

In step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the player has won the loss internally or has won the one-card combination (small combination 7 to 54). If any of the conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E49, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E05. It should be noted that the condition of whether or not one of the above judgment conditions has been won is being specialized when the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won and one of the winning combinations is won. It is provided to end the update process. In this embodiment, when a single winning combination is won, the push order bell is always internally won. Therefore, it is determined only that the single winning combination is won without determining whether or not the push order bell is internally won. doing. Therefore, if the one-card combination is configured to be able to win a prize other than the push order bell, whether or not the internally won condition device is the push order bell may be included in the determination condition.

In step S1E05, it is determined whether or not the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "H". If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E21, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E07.

In step S1E07, the value stored in the number of games to be added array [0] is added to the number of remaining AT games, and the process proceeds to step S1E09.

In step S1E09, it is determined whether or not any of the condition device numbers 5 to 7 has been internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E31, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E41.

In step S1E11 (progress when it is determined in step S1E01 that the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "L"), the value stored in the number of games to be added array [0] is It is added to the number of AT remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S1E13.

In step S1E13, the gaming state is set to the AT state, and the process proceeds to step S1E49.

In step S1E21 (progress when it is determined in step S1E05 that the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "H"), it is determined whether or not the life value is 3. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E23, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E25.

In step S1E23, the value of the number of remaining AT games is added by 10, and the process proceeds to step S1E49.

In step S1E25, the life value is added by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1E49.

In step S1E31 (progress when it is determined in step S1E09 that any of the condition device numbers 5 to 7 is internally won), the privilege type promotion process is executed. Specifically, when the privilege types are stored in the privilege type arrays [3] to [6], one of them is changed (promoted) to another privilege type by lottery. For example, when the privilege type is "A", it is changed to "B" or "C" by lottery. If the privilege type is "B", it will be changed to "C" by lottery. If the privilege type is "X", it is changed to "A" by lottery, if it is the privilege type "Y", it is changed to "B" by lottery, and if it is the privilege type "Z". It will be changed to "C" by lottery. After that, the process proceeds to step S1E49.

In step S1E41 (progress when it is determined in step S1E09 that any of the condition device numbers 5 to 7 has not been internally won), the privilege types stored in the privilege type array [0] are "X" and "Y". It is determined whether or not it is any of "Z". If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E43, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E49.

In step S1E43, the life value is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1E45.

In step S1E45, it is determined whether or not the life value is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E47, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E49.

In step S1E47, the gaming state is set to the AT state, and the process proceeds to step S1E49.

In step S1E49, the ED state transition determination process is executed, and the update process during specialization is terminated. The details of the ED state transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 (a), but in this ED state transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the ED start condition described with reference to FIG. 12 is satisfied. I do.

In this example, it is configured to perform each game and ED state transition determination process in the specialized zone state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the process of step S1E47 is executed (life). The ED state transition determination process may be performed only when the value becomes 0). With such a configuration, it is possible to completely digest the game in the specialized zone state and then shift to the ED state, and after enjoying the game in the specialized zone state to the end, the joy of shifting to the ED state. And expectation can be given to the player.

<ED state transition judgment processing>
Next, the details of the ED state transition determination process (steps S1D19, S1E49) in the AT update process of FIG. 36 (a) and the specialized update process of FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the ED state transition determination process in FIGS. 36A and 37.

First, in step S1E61, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the ED start condition is satisfied. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E63, and if not, the ED state transition determination process ends. As described with reference to FIG. 12, a plurality of ED start conditions can be mentioned, but here, the sum of the number of games played in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games exceeds 700 G (game). If so, it is determined that the ED start condition is satisfied.

In step S1E63, the game state is set to the ED state, and the ED state transition determination process ends.

In this example, an example in which the game state is set to the ED state is shown in step S1E63, but for example, while maintaining the game state in the AT or the specialized zone, a profit advantageous to the player is given (for example). , The number of games played in the AT or the specialized zone may be increased, etc.), or the player may shift to a state in which it is easy to obtain profits (for example, the game medium, the number of games left in the AT, etc.).

Further, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the ED state is also executed in the state B end determination process described later using FIG. 38 (b), but the information (command) indicating whether or not to shift to the ED state is given. 1 When transmitting to the sub-control unit 400, information indicating whether the ED state has been changed by any of the ED state transition determination process and the state B end determination process (in this ED state transition determination process, Information indicating the ED state transition by the ED state transition determination process) is added and transmitted. With such a configuration, the first sub-control unit 400 can change the start timing of the notification or the effect based on the received information.

In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, after shifting to the ED state by the determination of the state B end determination process described later, the AT update process of FIG. 36 (a) and the specialized update process of FIG. 37 are performed. Since neither is executed, this ED state transition determination process is not executed.

<State B end determination process>
Next, the details of the state B end determination process (step S1A23) in the game state update process of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the state B end determination process (step S1A23) in FIG. 29.

First, in the first step S1F01, the MY counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1F03. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39 (a). The MY counter update process may be executed at the end of the state B end determination process.

In step S1F03, it is determined whether or not the limiter flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F13, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1F05.

In step S1F05, it is determined whether or not the state B end flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F21, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1F07.

In step S1F07, the number of games that can be continued in state B is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1F15.

In step S1F15, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the ED state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F09, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1F17 (if not in the ED state).

In step S1F17, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the state B is 10 G or less. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F19, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F19, the gaming state is set to the ED state, and the process proceeds to step S1F09. As described above, when the information (command) indicating the presence / absence of the transition to the ED state is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, either the ED state transition determination process or the state B end determination process is performed. Information indicating whether the determination has shifted to the ED state (in this state B end determination process, information indicating the transition to the ED state by the state B end determination process) is added and transmitted. With such a configuration, the first sub-control unit 400 can change the start timing of the notification or the effect based on the received information.

According to this example, when the number of remaining games in the state B is 10 G or less, the state can be shifted to the ED state, so that the state B (AT, special zone) is suddenly terminated without shifting to the ED state. It is possible to avoid this, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or discomfort.

In step S1F09, it is determined whether or not the number of games that can be continued in the state B is greater than 0. If this condition is satisfied, the state B end determination process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F11, the limiter flag is set to on, and the state B end determination process is terminated.

In step S1F13, automatic settlement and stop processing are executed, and the process proceeds to step S1F21. The details of the automatic settlement and the stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39 (b).

In step S1F21, the flags and variables related to state B are initialized. By this process, the transition from the state B to the state A is performed. In this process, the game state is set to the normal state, and the state B flag, the state B end flag, the pt high probability flag, the 1000 pt arrival flag, and the limiter flag are set to off, respectively. In addition, the number of games that can be continued in state B, the number of games that have passed state B, the number of AT remaining games, the value of the MY counter, the cumulative acquisition pt, the number of CZ transition games, the number of pt high probability remaining games, the number of pt high probability sets, and the specialized zone The number of sets is initialized to 0 respectively.

<MY counter update process>
Next, the details of the MY counter update process (step S1F01) in the state B end determination process of FIG. 38 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a). FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the MY counter update process (step S1F01) in FIG. 38 (b).

First, in step S1G11, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the immediately preceding winning combination is a replaying combination. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1G21, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1G13.

In step S1G13, the number of payouts in the immediately preceding game is added from the value of the MY counter and updated as the value of the MY counter. After that, the process proceeds to step S1G15.

In step S1G15, the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted in the immediately preceding game from the value of the MY counter is updated as the value of the MY counter. After that, the process proceeds to step S1G17.

In step S1G17, it is determined whether or not the value of the MY counter is negative. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1G19, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1G21.

In step S1G19, the value of the MY counter is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1G21. In addition, the value of the MY counter is cleared to 0 every time the minimum value is updated by step S1G17 and step S1G19, and the value of the MY counter becomes a value indicating an increase from the minimum value.

In step S1G21, it is determined whether or not the value of the MY counter is greater than 2400. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1G23, and if not, the MY counter update process is terminated.

In step S1G23, the limiter flag is set to on, and the MY counter update process ends.

<Automatic settlement, stop processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 39 (b), the details of the automatic settlement and stop processing (step S1F13) in the state B end determination process of FIG. 38 (b) will be described. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the automatic settlement and stop processing (step S1F13) in FIG. 38 (b).

First, in step S1G31, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the automatic settlement function is enabled (automatic settlement function is on). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1G33, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1G41.

In step S1G33, automatic settlement is started, and the process proceeds to step S1G35.

In step S1G35, it is determined whether or not all the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 have been ejected from the medal payout outlet 155 (settlement completed). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1G41, and if not, this step S1G35 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1G41, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid (stop function is on). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1G43, and if not, the automatic settlement and stop processing are terminated.

In step S1G43, the stop function is activated, and the process proceeds to step S1G45.

In step S1G45, it is determined whether or not the stop function has been released. If this condition is satisfied, the automatic settlement and stop processing are terminated, and if not, this step S1G45 is repeatedly executed.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur when the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so that a processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. The state of the optical sensor is confirmed by this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, the timer update process is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in each time unit, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211 the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission in the main process of the main control unit 300, the timer interrupt process, and the like are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in this embodiment, and the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set) and bits 11. ~ 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a bet command, a start lever reception command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, and acceptance of operations of stop buttons 137 to 139. 1st to 3rd press commands associated with, 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with stopping reels 110 to 112, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands associated with medal payout processing, game status update command), bit 0 10 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S213, the external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334. For example, when the state B is set, a signal indicating this (state B signal) is output.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 336, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is received (when the power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when the low voltage signal is not received (when the power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. The checksum value for a predetermined area including at least is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and the power supply flag indicating that the power failure processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. Note that FIG. 41A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 41B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 41 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing the RT update information, which is the information representing the gaming state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed. The details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 (d).

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing the effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S313, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S315, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, if there is a shutter control command in the effect data read in step S309, the shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed in which a control command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, a setting is made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S320 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 41A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S333, device data is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S315, and the effect random number value is updated.

Next, the details of the command process (step S307) in the first sub-control unit main process of FIG. 41 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (d). The figure is a flowchart of the command process (step S307) in FIG. 41 (a).

First, in step S341, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S343, and if not, this command processing ends.

In step S343, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed. Of these processes, the process when the internal winning command is received will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. Further, the process when the game state update command is received will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the internal winning command processing (step S343) when the internal winning command is received in the command processing of FIG. 41 (d) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the internal winning command processing (step S343) when the internal winning command is received in FIG. 41 (d).

First, in step S3001 to be executed first, the game information included in the internal winning command is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S3003. The information acquired here includes the internal winning condition device number, the game state, the number of remaining games in each state (the number of CZ remaining games, the number of AT remaining games and the number of additional games), the acquired pt and the cumulative acquired pt, and the pt height. Number of remaining probability games, number of pt high probability sets, presence / absence and result of execution of CZ lottery and AT lottery (step S1211 in FIG. 19), state B flag, pt high probability flag, number of state B elapsed games, number of CZ transition games, There is information such as the state of the conditional addition flag, the condition for clearing the conditional addition, the presence / absence of various rights (BAR right, peach 7 right), instruction information, privilege type arrangement, number of games to be added, and the like.

In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the instruction information has been acquired in step S3001. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3005, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3005, the effect data for executing the operation navigation is set based on the condition device number and the instruction information acquired in step S3001.

In step S3007, a process for setting an effect according to the state of the game (effect setting process for each state) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3009. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

In step S3009, in addition to the process described above, a process at the time of receiving the internal winning command is executed, and this process ends.

<Production setting process for each state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the effect setting process (step S3007) for each state in the internal winning command process of FIG. 42 will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart of the effect setting process (step S3007) for each state in FIG. 42.

First, in step S3101, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is CZ. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3103, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3103, the effect setting process during CZ is executed, and the effect setting process for each state is completed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3107, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3109.

In step S3107, the effect setting process during AT is executed, and the effect setting process for each state is completed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 (a).

In step S3109, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special zone. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3111, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3113.

In step S3111, the specializing effect setting process is executed, and the effect setting process for each state is terminated. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 (b).

In step S3113, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3115, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3117.

In step S3115, the normal effect setting process is executed, and the effect setting process for each state is terminated. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

In step S3117, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the ED state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3119, and if not, the effect setting process for each state is terminated.

In step S3119, the ED effect setting process is executed, and the effect setting process for each state is completed. Details of this ED effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49.

<Normal production setting process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the normal intermediate effect setting process (step S3115) in the effect setting process for each state of FIG. 43 will be described. FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the normal middle effect setting process (step S3115) in FIG. 43.

First, in step S3201 executed first, it is determined whether or not the pt high probability flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3203, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3203, the value of the number of remaining games with a high probability of pt is set to be displayed (updated), and the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, it is determined whether or not pt (acquired by the lottery in step S1243 or step S1245 of FIG. 20) has been acquired. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3207, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3209.

In step S3207, an effect indicating that the cumulative acquired pt is added by the acquired pt is set, and the process proceeds to step S3209. The value of the cumulative acquisition pt displayed here may be an actual value or a false value.

In step S3209, it is determined whether or not the CZ lottery and the AT lottery (step S1211 in FIG. 19) have been executed. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3211, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3213.

In step S3211, a lottery effect (an effect that is expected to shift to the CZ or AT state) is set, and the process proceeds to step S3213.

In step S3213, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of games that have passed the state B is equal to or greater than the value of the number of CZ transition games. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3215, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3217.

In step S3215, a CZ rush effect (an effect indicating the transition to the chance zone) is set, and the process proceeds to step S3217. In setting this effect, the already set effect is overwritten (discarded).

In step S3217, effects other than those described above (for example, setting of a background image according to a high probability mode or a normal mode) are appropriately set, and the normal middle effect setting process ends.

<CZ medium production setting process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the CZ middle effect setting process (step S3103) in the effect setting process for each state of FIG. 43 will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart of the CZ middle effect setting process (step S3103) in FIG. 43.

First, in step S3301, which is executed first, an effect of displaying the current number of remaining CZ games is set. If there is the number of CZ remaining games displayed earlier, the subtraction from that value to the current number of CZ remaining games is displayed.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery (step S1305 in FIG. 23) has been won (the BAR right or the peach 7 right has been acquired). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3305, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3313.

In step S3305, it is determined whether or not the condition device corresponding to the right acquired by the AT lottery has been internally won. Specifically, when the BAR right is acquired, it is determined whether or not the condition device number 2 is internally won, and when the peach 7 right is acquired, whether or not the condition device numbers 3 and 4 are internally won. It is judged. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3307, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3307, an aiming effect (an effect that encourages a specific role to be aimed at) is set. Specifically, when the BAR right is acquired, the operation order of the right first stop is set, and the effect of urging to aim at the BAR symbol is set, and when the peach 7 right is acquired, the right first stop is set. An effect of appropriately aiming at the BAR symbol and the Seven 2 symbol is set in the operation order of one stop. After this process, the process proceeds to step S3309. It should be noted that this aiming effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60.

In step S3309, an AT winning effect (an effect indicating that the AT lottery has been won) is set. The AT winning effect set here is executed at a timing after all reels have stopped.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining CZ games is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3309, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3317.

In step S3313, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining CZ games is 0. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3315, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3317.

In step S3315, a CZ end effect (an effect indicating that the CZ has ended) is set. The CZ end effect set here is executed at a timing after all reels have stopped.

In step S3317, effects other than those described above are appropriately set, and the effect setting process during CZ is terminated. In this process, when the condition device number 1 is internally elected, an effect of prompting to aim at the BAR symbol may be set in the operation order of the right first stop.

<Production setting process during AT>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46 (a), the details of the effect setting process during AT (step S3107) in the effect setting process for each state of FIG. 43 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the effect setting process during AT (step S3107) in FIG. 43.

First, in step S3401, which is executed first, an effect of displaying the current number of remaining AT games is set. If there is the number of AT remaining games displayed earlier, the subtraction from that value to the current number of AT remaining games is displayed.

In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the AT addition lottery (step S1403 in FIG. 24A) has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3405, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3407.

In step S3405, an additional effect is set according to the number of games acquired by the AT additional lottery, and the process proceeds to step S3407. The additional effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

In step S3407, effects other than those described above are appropriately set, and the effect setting process during AT is terminated. For example, when the value of the number of remaining AT games is 0, an effect suggesting that the AT state ends may be set. In addition, in the game immediately after the conditional addition flag is turned on, the conditional addition effect may be set. When displaying the value of the number of remaining AT games, the first sub-control unit 400 separately manages the value for display, and uses this value to display a value smaller than the actual value of the number of remaining AT games. The actual value may be displayed from.

<Specialized production setting process>
Next, the details of the specializing effect setting process (step S3111) in the effect setting process for each state of FIG. 43 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the specializing effect setting process (step S3111) in FIG. 43.

First, in step S3411, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the effect mode of the special zone is the effect mode A. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3413, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3417.

In step S3413, the image corresponding to the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is displayed, and if there is a value stored in the number of games to be added array [0], this value is displayed. .. In this process, when the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "L", the end effect of the special zone is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S3415. If the privilege type is "A", "B", "C", the image of "treasure box" is displayed, and if the privilege type is "X", "Y", "Z", the image of "bomb" is displayed. When the privilege type is "H", the image of "princess" is used, and when the privilege type is "L", the image of "Senryo box" is used as the image corresponding to the privilege type.

In step S3415, the image corresponding to the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [1] is displayed, and if there is a value stored in the number of games to be added array [1], this value is displayed. The process proceeds to step S3421. If the privilege type is not stored, the image is not displayed in the corresponding area, but the image corresponding to the fact that the privilege type is not stored may be displayed. If the privilege type is "A", "B", "C", the image of "treasure box" is displayed, and if the privilege type is "X", "Y", "Z", the image of "bomb" is displayed. When the privilege type is "H", the image of "princess" is used, and when the privilege type is "L", the image of "Senryo box" is used as the image corresponding to the privilege type.

In step S3417, the image corresponding to the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is displayed. In this process, when the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "L", the end effect of the special zone is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S3419. When the privilege type is "A", the image of the main character "Yoshimune" is used, and when the privilege type is "B", the image of "old man" is used, and the privilege type is "C". In that case, the image of "princess", if the privilege type is "X", "Y", "Z", the image of "bomb", if the privilege type is "H", the image of "Chibihime" When the privilege type is "L", the image of "Senryo Box" is used as the image corresponding to the privilege type.

In step S3419, the images corresponding to the privilege types stored in the privilege type arrays [1] to [5] are displayed, and the process proceeds to step S3421. If the privilege type is not stored, the image is not displayed in the corresponding area, but the image corresponding to the fact that the privilege type is not stored may be displayed. When the privilege type is "A", the image of the main character "Yoshimune" is used, and when the privilege type is "B", the image of "old man" is used, and the privilege type is "C". In that case, the image of "princess", if the privilege type is "X", "Y", "Z", the image of "bomb", if the privilege type is "H", the image of "Chibihime" When the privilege type is "L", the image of "Senryo Box" is used as the image corresponding to the privilege type.

In step S3421, effects other than those described above are appropriately set, and the specializing effect setting process ends.

<Additional production setting>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the additional effect setting (step S3405) in the effect setting process during AT of FIG. 46 (a) will be described. The figure is a diagram showing an example of an additional effect set referred to in the additional effect setting.

The additional effect set is data for effect stored in ROM 406 or the like, and in this example, it is composed of data of a set No., an effect configuration, and an effect G number. The "composition of the effect" is data indicating the contents of one or more effects constituting the additional effect, and is, for example, the set No. 001 indicates that the additional effect is composed of only the 1G notification effect, and the set No. 003 indicates that the additional effect is composed of a 2G precursor effect and a 1G announcement effect, and the set No. 007 indicates that the additional effect is composed of a continuous effect of 4G and a notification effect of 1G.

The "G number of effects" is data indicating the number of games in which the additional effects are executed. For example, the set No. In 001, the additional effect is executed only for 1G, and the set No. In 003, the additional effect is executed over 3G, and the set No. 007 indicates that the additional effect is executed over 5G.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to this additional effect set in the additional effect setting (step S3405) of the AT-in-time effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 46 (a), and has a plurality of types (8 types in this example). One set is selected from the additional effect set, and the additional effect is executed based on the composition of the effect of the selected additional effect set and the number of G's.

The method of selecting the additional effect set is not particularly limited, but in this example, the additional effect set (the effect with a longer effect time) having a larger number of effect G is selected as the number of AT remaining games added increases. Has been done. For example, when the additional effect set is 10G, the set No. When the additional production set of 1 (composition of production = notification 1G, number of production G = 1G) is selected and the additional production set is 50G, the set No. When the additional production set of 4 (composition of production = precursor 3G + notification 1G, number of production G = 4G) is selected and the additional production set is 100G, the set No. An additional production set of 8 (production configuration = continuous production 5G + notification 1G, number of production G = 6G) is selected.

When the number of remaining AT games is small (for example, in the case of 2G), the set No. If you select the additional production set of 4 (production configuration = precursor 3G + notification 1G, number of production G = 4G), all the additional production cannot be executed within the range of the remaining number of AT games (within 2G) (necessary for the additional production). Because the number of games is insufficient), instead of the effect set once selected, an additional effect set that can be executed with less than the number of remaining AT games (for example, set No. 1 additional effect set (effect configuration = announcement 1G) , The number of production G = 1G), etc.) is preferably selected.

<ED production setting process 1>
Next, an example of the ED effect setting process (step S3119) in the effect setting process for each state of FIG. 43 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The figure is a flowchart showing the ED effect setting process according to the first embodiment.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the ED effect is being set. If this condition is satisfied, the ED effect setting process 1 is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3503.

In step S3503, it is determined whether or not the ED state has been entered in the state B end determination process described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). If this condition is satisfied (in this example, when the ED start condition is satisfied in the state B end determination process), the process proceeds to step S3521, and if not (in this example, the update process during AT (or the update process during specialization)). ) When the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process), the process proceeds to step S3505. In step S3521, an interrupt effect (1G ED notification effect) is set, and in the next step S3523, after setting to start the ED effect from the next game, the process proceeds to step S3525.

Specifically, the determination process in step S3503 proceeds to Yes because the ED start condition is not satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the AT update process (or special update process), and the state B end determination process is performed. In this case, it is determined that the number of remaining games in the state B is 10 G or less. For example, the ceiling at normal times is set deep (for example, the number of games that can be continued in state B is 1500 G and the ceiling is 1000 G), and the sum of the number of games played in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games This corresponds to the case where the number of remaining games in the state B is 10 G or less while the number of games has not reached 700 G.

In this case, the process proceeds to steps S3521 and S3523, and here, the set effect state (for example, CZ, AT, special zone), the set effect (for example, the continuous effect of the additional effect), and the like are set. Regardless, the interrupt effect (1G ED notification effect) is set, and the ED effect is started from the next game. For example, when the remaining number of games in state B is 10G and you want to execute 10G continuous production and 1G ED notification production, if you delay 1G ED notification production, before executing all 10G continuous production. There is a possibility that the AT state will end, but according to this example, since the ED notification effect is immediately executed, such a situation can be avoided.

In step S3505, it is determined whether or not the effect state (game state) before shifting to the ED state was AT. If this condition is satisfied (if it is AT, that is, if the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during AT), the process proceeds to step S3507, and if not (it was a specialized zone). In that case, that is, when the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during specialization), the process proceeds to step S3517. In step S3517, a specialized intermediate effect (4G precursor effect + 1G ED notification effect) is set, and in the next step S3519, after setting to start the ED effect from the next game, the process proceeds to step S3525.

Specifically, in the determination process of step S3505, the process of proceeding to No is the sum of the number of games of each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during specialization. Is when it exceeds 700G (game).

In this case, the process proceeds to steps S3517 and S3519, where the 4G precursor effect (specialized effect) is performed and then the 1G ED notification effect is performed. As mentioned above, the Bell Navi in the special zone uses half navigation, and in the special zone, it is more difficult for the player to make a profit than in the chance zone, AT state, and ED state, and the net increase in medals is reduced. However, since the gaming state of the main control unit 300 is the ED state, full navigation is executed in the bell navigation. For this reason, by executing full navigation in the precursory production (specialized production) of 4G, the player may be able to detect the transition to the ED state in advance, and the player will not be half-navigated. There is no disadvantage.

In step S3507, it is determined whether or not continuous continuous firing is being set by the additional effect. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3509, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3513. In step S3513, an AT intermediate effect (1G ED notification effect) is set, and in the next step S3515, after setting to start the ED effect from the next game, the process proceeds to step S3525.

Specifically, the determination process in step S3507 proceeds to No when the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during AT and continuous continuous firing is not set in the additional effect. is there.

In this case, the process proceeds to steps S3513 and S3515, where the 1G ED notification effect is set and the ED effect is started from the next game. According to this example, when continuous continuous firing is not set in the additional production, the 1G ED notification production is performed so that the notification can be made as soon as possible, so that the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, the transition to the ED state can be easily linked to the result of the lottery, which can give the player a sense of conviction.

In step S3509, the notification effect of the additional effect being set is overwritten with the effect for ED notification, and in the next step S3511, after setting to start the ED effect from the next game of the ED notification, the process proceeds to step S3525. .. In step S3525, after making other effect settings, the ED effect setting process 1 is terminated.

Specifically, the determination process in step S3507 proceeds to Yes when the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during AT and continuous continuous firing is set in the additional effect. is there.

In this case, the process proceeds to steps S3509 and S3511, where the ED notification effect is performed instead of the notification of the additional effect by overwriting the ED notification effect with the ED notification effect being set. If the effect is suddenly interrupted during the execution of the additional effect (continuous effect), the player may feel uncomfortable or surprised. However, according to this example, the additional effect is added after the ongoing effect is continued. Since the ED notification is performed instead of the production notification, the notification can be performed in a natural flow without impairing the flow of the ongoing production, and the player does not feel uncomfortable or surprised.

In this example, in step 3503, it is determined whether or not the state B end determination process has shifted to the ED state, and in the subsequent step S3505, whether or not the effect state before shifting to the ED state was AT. Although the determination is made, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the determination processes may be applied.

<ED production setting process 2>
Next, another example of the ED effect setting process (step S3119) in the effect setting process for each state of FIG. 43 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The figure is a flowchart showing the ED effect setting process according to the second embodiment.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the ED effect is being set. If this condition is satisfied, the ED effect setting process 2 is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3603.

In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the state B is 50 G or less. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3605, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3605, the 1G ED notification effect is set, and in the next step S3607, the ED effect (effect in which the number of games is indefinite) is set to start from the next game of the ED notification, and then the process proceeds to step S3617.

Specifically, in the determination process of step S3603, the process proceeds to Yes when the number of remaining games in the state B is 50 G or less.

In this case, the process proceeds to steps S3605 and S3607, and here, after setting the 1G ED notification effect, the ED effect (the effect in which the number of games is indefinite) is set to start from the next game of the ED notification. According to this example, when the number of remaining games in the state B is 50 G or less, the player is given a 1 G ED notification effect so that the AT can be notified as soon as possible before the AT ends due to the arrival of the limiter. It can give a sense of security.

It should be noted that the ED effect in which the number of games is indefinite may be executed regardless of the size of the remaining number of games in the state B. Further, if the remaining number of games in the state B is 50 G or more but the remaining number of games is 50 G or less without winning the lottery for the rare role or the additional effect, 50 G in step S3605. You may set the ED effect of. With such a configuration, the ED effect can be terminated as soon as the limiter is reached, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable in the effect.

In step S3609, it is determined whether or not a rare role (for example, cherry) has been internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3611, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3617. In step S3611, the additional lottery for the number of remaining AT games is executed by the same method as the AT-related processing in the game start state B-related processing in FIG. 18, and it is determined whether or not the AT additional lottery has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3613, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3617.

In step S3613, the 1G addition notification is set as the ED notification to perform the notification, and in the next step S3615, the ED effect (50G effect) is set to start from the next game of the ED notification, and then in step S3617. move on. In step S3617, after making other effect settings, the ED effect setting process 2 is terminated.

Specifically, in the determination process of step S3611, the process proceeds to Yes when the number of remaining games in the state B is more than 50G, the rare role is internally won, and the lottery for adding the remaining AT games is won. Is.

In this case, the process proceeds to steps S3613 and S3615, and here, by overwriting the 1G notification effect of the additional effect with the ED notification effect, the ED notification is performed instead of the 1G notification of the additional effect. , ED production (50G production) will start from the next game of ED announcement.

If the player shifts to the ED state with a large number of remaining games in the state B, the AT may proceed with little change in the production, so that the player's willingness to play may decrease. According to this, since it is possible to perform the ED notification production while continuing the AT and specialized production, it is possible to perform various productions and maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, while continuing the ongoing production, the ED notification is performed instead of the additional production notification, so the notification can be performed in a natural flow without impairing the flow of the ongoing production, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. And does not give a surprise. In addition, the ED effect for a predetermined time (number of games) can be executed to the end, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the effect.

The threshold value of the remaining number of games in the state B is not limited to 50G, and may be less than 50G or larger than 50G. Therefore, for example, when there is an effect to be executed before reaching the limiter, the threshold value of the remaining number of games in the state B may be determined according to the length of the time (number of games) of the effect.

Further, the determination criterion in step S3603 is not limited to the magnitude of the remaining number of games in the state B, and for example, the magnitude of the net increase number (MY counter) from the minimum value may be used as the determination criterion. When the size of the net increase from the minimum value (MY counter) is adopted as the criterion, for example, when the net increase from the minimum value (MY counter) exceeds 2000, it is suggested that 2400 can be reached. It may be configured to perform an ED effect to be performed or a display suggesting a net increase in the number of sheets (for example, a character display such as "2000/2400").

<Game status update command processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the game state update command process (step S343) when the game state update command is received in the command process of FIG. 41 (d) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the game state update command process (step S343) when the game state update command is received in FIG. 41 (d).

First, in step S3A01, which is executed first, the game information included in the game state update command is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S3A03. The information acquired here includes the condition device number of the internal winning, the judgment result of the winning combination, the game state, the state B flag, the pt high probability flag, the 1000pt arrival flag, the number of additional games by clearing the conditional addition, the privilege type array, and so on. There is information such as life value.

In step S3A03, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the special zone by referring to the information acquired in step S3A01. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A05, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3A31.

In step S3A05, the information acquired in step S3A01 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the privilege type array [0] is in the initial state (the privilege type is not stored). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A07, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3A21.

In step S3A07, the effect mode A is set as the effect mode of the special zone, and the process proceeds to step S3A09.

In step S3A09, the effect mode selection effect is set, and the process proceeds to step S3A11.

In step S3A11, it is determined whether or not an operation other than the effect button 150 has been performed. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A41, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3A13.

In step S3A13, it is determined whether or not 3 seconds have elapsed since the effect mode was set. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A15, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3A17.

In step S3A15, when the effect mode A is set as the effect mode of the special zone, this effect mode is changed to the effect mode B. On the other hand, when the effect mode B is set as the effect mode of the special zone, this effect mode is changed to the effect mode A. After that, the process proceeds to step S3A17.

In step S3A17, it is determined whether or not the effect button 150 has been operated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A19 and thereafter, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3A11.

In step S3A19, the special zone start effect is set, and the process proceeds to step S3A41.

In step S3A21, the special effect update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3A41. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

In step S3A31, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the AT state by referring to the information acquired in step S3A01. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A33, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3A41.

In step S3A33, the information acquired in step S3A01 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the conditional addition flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A35, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3A41.

In step S3A35, a process of updating the conditional addition effect is executed. Here, when the set condition is satisfied, the display of the portion corresponding to the condition is updated. After that, the process proceeds to step S3A41.

In step S3A41, in addition to the processes described above, a process at the time of receiving the game state update command (for example, a process of setting an effect according to each game state) is executed, and the game state update command process is terminated. ..

<Specialized production update process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the specialized effect update process (step S3A21) in the game state update command process of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the specialized effect update process (step S3A21) in FIG. 50.

First, in step S3B01, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the life has increased (recovered) by referring to the information acquired in step S3A01 of FIG. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3B03, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3B05.

In step S3B03, the life recovery effect is set, and the process proceeds to step S3B21.

In step S3B05, the information acquired in step S3A01 of FIG. 50 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT games has been added (addition acquisition). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3B07, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3B21.

In step S3B07, an additional effect is set, and the process proceeds to step S3B09.

In step S3B09, it is determined whether or not the life is reduced by referring to the information acquired in step S3A01 of FIG. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3B11, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3B13.

In step S3B11, the life reduction effect is set, and the process proceeds to step S3B21.

In step S3B13, the information acquired in step S3A01 of FIG. 50 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the privilege type has been promoted (see step S1E31 of FIG. 37). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3B15, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3B21.

In step S3B15, the privilege type promotion effect is set. Specifically, the image corresponding to the privilege type targeted for promotion is updated to the image corresponding to the privilege type after promotion. After that, the process proceeds to step S3B21.

In step S3B21, effects other than those described above are appropriately set, and the specialized effect update process ends.

In this example, when the number of remaining AT games is added, the additional effect is immediately set in the game, and when the life is reduced, the life reduction effect is immediately set in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Therefore, for example, by applying the additional effect set described with reference to FIG. 47 to the additional effect and life reduction effect of this example, the additional effect and life reduction effect of this example are configured by continuous continuous firing and notification effect. In this case, in the ED effect setting process 1 described with reference to FIG. 48 and the ED effect setting process 2 described with reference to FIG. 49, the ED notification is performed instead of the additional effect and the life reduction effect. It may be configured to perform the effect.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. Note that FIG. 52A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 52B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 52 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 52 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 52A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read out in step S409, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. This image control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52 (d). When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 52A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S419, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S411 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 518 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S425. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S425, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image superposition and transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S431. If not, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for to be entered.

In step S431, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.
≪Operation explanation≫

Hereinafter, the features of the slot machine 100 described above will be described with reference to an operation example. In the following figures, in the item of "number of games", the period from the start operation of the game (operation of the start lever 135) to the start operation of the next game is shown as the period of one game.
[Conditional addition]

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the conditional addition lottery is executed in the AT state. If this lottery is won, three conditions (hereinafter, first clear condition to third clear condition) are set along with the additional amount of AT remaining games (hereinafter, first clear condition to third clear condition) (step S1409 in FIG. 24A). When the condition of (clear) is satisfied (cleared), the set number of remaining AT games is added (step S1D03 in FIG. 36 (a)). Further, an effect related to this is executed in the first sub-control unit 400 (step S3407 in FIG. 46 (a), step S3A35 in FIG. 50). Hereinafter, the operation when the conditional addition is won will be described with reference to the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where the conditional addition lottery is won. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG. 53.

In the example of FIG. 53, it is assumed that the first game ends with the conditional addition flag turned off in the AT state, the conditional device number 10 is internally won in the subsequent second game, and the conditional addition lottery is further won. (Step S1409 in FIG. 24 (a)). FIG. 53 shows that the conditional device number 10 was internally won in the second game, and that the conditional addition flag is set to on by winning the conditional addition lottery. .. Here, as a result of the conditional additional lottery, 10 games are set as the number of additional games, the internal winning of the condition device number 8 as the first clear condition, the internal winning of the condition device number 9 as the second clear condition, and the third clear condition. It is assumed that the internal winning of the condition device number 10 is set as.

At this time, since the first sub-control unit 400 internally won the condition device number 10 which is the push order bell in the AT state, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the effect image display device 157 of the condition device number 10 The operation navigation showing the correct operation order (first stop on the right) is displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image showing that the conditional addition lottery has been won because the conditional addition flag is turned on (step S3407 in FIG. 46A). As an example of this image, FIG. 51 (a) shows three circle TCs displayed in the upper left of the display area of the effect image display device 157. Of these three circles TC, the lower left circle corresponds to the first clear condition, the middle upper circle corresponds to the second clear condition, and the lower right circle corresponds to the third clear condition. The initial state of these circles is set to white, and the part where the corresponding clear condition is satisfied is judged at the end of the game and changed to the color corresponding to the additional amount won in the conditional additional lottery (Fig.) Step S3A35 of 50). Specifically, when the additional amount is 10 games and 20 games, it changes to green, and when it is 30 games and 100 games, it changes to gold. That is, when all three round TCs turn green or all turn gold, all the first clearing conditions to the third clearing conditions are cleared, and the number of remaining AT games is added. At the start of the second game, all the circles are white because it has not been determined that each clearing condition is satisfied. The timing of determining the establishment of the clearing condition is not particularly limited, and may be determined before the reel is stopped, for example.

In this second game, it is assumed that eight medals are obtained (net increase of 5) by operating according to the operation navigation. Here, in the first sub-control unit 400, when the third clear condition is satisfied, the lower right circle of the three circle TCs changes to green as shown in FIG. 54 (b) (in this figure, the circle is changed to green. Green is indicated by diagonal cross-hatching).

In the third game, it is assumed that the condition device number 9 is internally won. FIG. 53 shows that the condition device number 9 was internally won in the third game. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 internally won the condition device number 9 which is the push order bell in the AT state, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), the correct answer of the condition device number 9 in the effect image display device 157. The operation navigation showing the operation order (middle first stop) of is displayed. In the game of the third game, it is assumed that eight medals are obtained (net increase of five) by operating according to the operation navigation. Here, in the first sub-control unit 400, when the second clear condition is satisfied, the upper middle circle of the three circle TCs changes as shown in FIG. 54 (d) (in this figure, the green color is an oblique line). (Shown by cross-hatching).

In the fourth game, it is assumed that the condition device number 8 is internally won. FIG. 53 shows that the condition device number 8 was internally elected in the fourth game. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 internally won the condition device number 8 which is the push order bell in the AT state, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), the correct answer of the condition device number 8 in the effect image display device 157. The operation navigation showing the operation order (first stop on the left) of is displayed. In the fourth game, it is assumed that eight medals are obtained (net increase of 5) by operating according to the operation navigation. Here, in the first sub-control unit 400, when the first clear condition is satisfied, the lower left circle of the three circle TCs changes as shown in FIG. 54 (f) (in this figure, the green color is oblique). (Indicated by line cross-hatching).

Further, when all three circle TCs turn green (clear all the first clear condition to the third clear condition), the three circle TCs blink as shown in FIG. 54 (g), and further, FIG. 54 (h). ), An effect prompting the user to press a predetermined button (for example, one of the stop buttons) is executed. Further, when the predetermined button is pressed, the three round TCs disappear as shown in FIG. 54 (i), the additional amount won by the conditional additional winning is displayed, and the number of remaining AT games is added. When this addition is made, the conditional addition flag is set to off (step S1D05 in FIG. 36A).

In the following fifth game, it is assumed that the conditional device number 10 is internally won and the conditional additional lottery is newly won (step S1409 in FIG. 24A). FIG. 53 shows that the conditional device number 10 was internally won in the fifth game, and that the conditional addition flag was set to on again by winning the conditional addition lottery. There is. Here, as a result of the conditional additional lottery, 30 games are set as the number of additional games.

It is assumed that the internal winning of the conditional device number 8 is set as the first clearing condition, the internal winning of the conditional device number 9 is set as the second clearing condition, and the internal winning of the conditional device number 10 is set as the third clearing condition.

At this time, since the first sub-control unit 400 internally won the condition device number 10 which is the push order bell in the AT state, as shown in FIG. 54 (j), the effect image display device 157 of the condition device number 10 The operation navigation showing the correct operation order (first stop on the right) is displayed. Further, in the first sub-control unit 400, since the conditional addition flag is turned on, three circle TCs are displayed in the upper left of the display area of the effect image display device 157 as in FIG. 54 (a). At the start of the fifth game, all the circles are white because it has not been determined that each clearing condition is satisfied.

In this fifth game, it is assumed that eight medals are obtained (net increase of five) by operating according to the operation navigation. Here, in the first sub-control unit 400, when the third clear condition is satisfied, the lower right circle of the three circle TCs changes to gold as shown in FIG. 54 (k) (in this figure, the circle is changed to gold). The gold color is shown by the hatching that goes down to the left).

Although FIG. 53 shows the sixth to ninth games, it is shown that the first clear condition and the second clear condition are not satisfied during this period. In the 9th game, the condition device number 10, which is the third clear condition, was internally elected again, but at this point, the third clear condition has already been cleared, and at least the 6th to 9th games. During that time, the colors of the three round TCs do not change.

[Other configurations for conditional addition]
In the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54 described above, the number of remaining AT games is added when the first clear condition to the third clear condition (in the example of FIG. 53, the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are internally elected) are cleared. The configuration is adopted. Further, a privilege image (in the example of FIG. 54, all three green or gold circle TCs) corresponding to the given additional amount is prepared, and the above-mentioned first clearing conditions to the third are obtained for this privilege image. The part corresponding to the clear condition is set, and when any of the first clear condition to the third clear condition is cleared, the part corresponding to the cleared condition is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by expecting an addition each time the first clear condition to the third clear condition are cleared. Further, as the clearing of the first clearing condition to the third clearing condition progresses, the privilege image is gradually displayed, so that the additional amount obtained can be estimated and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, a configuration is described in which three clear conditions of the first clear condition to the third clear condition are provided and these are associated with the three parts of the privilege image. Here, the configuration in which the privilege image is gradually displayed at different timings when the clear condition is satisfied is not limited to the above configuration, and the clear condition is associated with each of a plurality of parts of the privilege image. Just do it. Further, the timing of association is not limited to the timing at which the clear condition is set, and for example, it may be configured to determine which part is to be displayed at the timing when any of the clear conditions is satisfied. Further, the criteria for determining the determination are not particularly limited, and for example, a configuration in which the corresponding portion is randomly determined may be used.

In the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, as a clearing condition corresponding to one part of the privilege image, a condition that is satisfied according to the winning internal winning combination is adopted, but the content of this clearing condition is described in the above example. Various conditions can be adopted without being limited to. For example, in FIGS. 53 and 54, a configuration in which the internal winning of the push order bell is a clear condition has been described, but a condition device different from the push order bell may be a clear condition for a part or all of the push order bells.

.. In addition, it is not an internal winning combination but a condition that is satisfied by a winning combination or a reel stop mode, a condition that is established by the result of some lottery executed by the main control unit 300, a game such as the number of games and the winning history of the combination. It may be a condition that is satisfied by the history of the game and a condition that is satisfied by the elapsed time in the game. Further, the conditions may be satisfied according to the operation conditions (operation contents) such as the operated operation means, the operation order and the operation timing, and the lottery result for each game (for a plurality of games) regardless of such an operation. It may be a condition that is satisfied by the combination of the lottery result for each game and the operation of the player. The operating means is not limited to the various operating means provided in the present embodiment, and for example, an operating means for directing may be used. By associating the clear condition with the operation condition, it is possible to give fun to the operation. Further, for example, after winning the conditional addition, the first clear condition is satisfied by the first internal winning of the conditional device number 8, and the second clear condition is satisfied by the second internal winning of the conditional device number 8. Each of the configurations is such that the third clear condition is satisfied by the internal winning of the condition device number 8 for the first time, or the first clear condition and the second clear condition are satisfied by the internal winning of the same condition device number. There may be common requirements among the clearing conditions corresponding to the parts.

For example, when all the clearing conditions are satisfied in one game regardless of the difference between multiple clearing conditions, or when the clearing conditions corresponding to each part are different but are satisfied at the same timing, or There may be cases where multiple clearing conditions are the same due to the lottery, but if at least there are cases where the clearing conditions are met at different times, show the player the action of gradually displaying the privilege image. Can be done.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, the state in which the clear condition has been cleared is maintained as it is, but the cleared state is reset later, for example, by setting a valid period in the cleared state. Alternatively, another clear condition may be reset. Further, the clearing condition may be changed in the middle, such as setting a valid period for the clearing condition.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of remaining AT games is added when the conditional addition is cleared, but the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of remaining AT games is added when the condition is cleared, which is an advantageous privilege for the player ( It may be a configuration that can obtain a transition to an advantageous state, a longer period of an already set advantageous state, and the like). Further, the present invention is not limited to these benefits, and may be configured to notify or suggest information about the game console, such as a setting value of the game console or an internal gaming state. Furthermore, for example, when an environment for each user is provided on the game console, it may be image data or music data for customization, or an image that can be downloaded on a mobile terminal owned by the player. Information that is not related to the game, such as information such as music and music, may be notified. Further, these combinations may be used.

Further, the privilege is not limited to the configuration that can be always acquired when the condition is cleared, and there may be a case where the privilege cannot be acquired when the condition is cleared, such as a configuration in which the privilege can be acquired according to the set acquisition probability. Further, even if the conditional additional lottery is not won, the same effect as in the case of winning the lottery may be executed.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the amount of addition is determined in advance in the conditional addition lottery, but the privilege may be determined when the clearing condition is first satisfied. In addition, the privilege may be changed in the middle of the process. In this case, the privilege image may be used according to the privilege before the change, or the privilege image may be changed according to the privilege after the change.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the determination process of the clear condition is interrupted when the zone shifts to the special zone after winning the conditional addition (restarts when the AT state is restored), but the configuration is not limited to this configuration. The determination of the clearing condition may be continued as it is when the game state is entered. Alternatively, it may be configured to give a privilege according to the clearing condition established when the game state shifts. Further, another conditional addition may be started again when the original gaming state is restored. Further, in the present embodiment, the conditional addition is completed once, but when it is completed, for example, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to continue, and the privilege is continuously given according to the clearing condition. May be good. Further, the conditional additional lottery may be configured to be executed at the start of AT, or may be configured to execute a new conditional additional lottery immediately after the privilege of the conditional additional lottery is obtained.

In the present embodiment, when the AT state ends (shifts to the normal state) without satisfying all the clearing conditions, the privilege obtained if all the clearing conditions are satisfied cannot be obtained. However, when the AT state ends, a privilege corresponding to the clearing condition that has been established halfway may be given. For example, if two of the three round TCs in FIG. 54 are gold, 10 games may be added (in this case, the number of remaining AT games is 10). And the three circle TCs disappear). When adopting this configuration, it is better that the benefits obtained when the clearing conditions are met halfway are less (disadvantageous to the player) than the benefits obtained when all the clearing conditions are met. preferable.

In the example of FIG. 54, an example in which the colors shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b) are associated with the number of additional games that can be acquired has been described. Specifically, when the three round TCs have the same color, 10 or 20 games if it is green and 30 or 100 games if it is gold are added to the number of AT remaining games. In the example of FIG. 54, only the modes shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b) were used, but for example, if the colors are not all the same and different colors are included, the result is not added. (Addition failure) may occur. In the example of FIG. 55 (c), the lower left and lower right of the three circle TCs are green, and the upper middle is gold. When this privilege image is displayed, 20% There is a probability that the number of remaining AT games will be added by 10 games (80% probability of failure). In addition, a configuration may be configured in which a large reward is given when the three round TCs are in a specific color combination, and information such as setting suggestion may be included in addition to the addition. In the example of FIG. 55 (d), an example in which each of the three circle TCs has a different color is shown, and when this privilege image is displayed, the number of remaining AT games is added by 100 games, and the set value. Is suggested to be one of 456.

Further, the configuration may be such that the clearing conditions corresponding to each portion of the three round TCs are suggested. In the example of FIG. 55 (e), the part where the katakana "chi" is displayed suggests that the internal winning of the cherry is a clear condition, and the part where the katakana "su" is displayed is. , It is suggested that the internal winning of watermelon is a clear condition, and the part where the katakana "B" is displayed is the clear condition of the internal winning of the push order bell (or common bell). It suggests. In this example, the part where the katakana "Vega" is displayed is in the lower left, which also suggests that the internal winning of the left 1st bell is a clearing condition. In this way, when suggesting the clearing condition, not only the notation but also the position may be suggested. Further, the portion where the katakana is not displayed may be used as a suggestion of some internal winning (for example, push order bell). In addition, the configuration may be such that a clear condition different from the actual clear condition is added to suggest. Furthermore, it is not limited to suggesting all clearing conditions, and may suggest some clearing conditions. In the example of FIG. 55 (e), the relationship between the clear condition and the corresponding portion is clarified, but the configuration may be such that only the clear condition is suggested and the corresponding portion is not displayed. In the configuration suggesting the clearing condition in this way, the player can be made to recognize the clearing condition, and for example, if the clearing condition can be satisfied, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of challenging the clearing condition. Also, by clarifying the part corresponding to the clearing condition, it is possible to give fun such as aiming at the part to be displayed.

Further, the information regarding the content of the privilege may be suggested separately from the privilege image. In FIG. 55 (f), an example is shown in which displaying "reward 10G" under the three circles TC suggests that an additional 10 games are set as a privilege. Further, in FIG. 55 (g), an example is shown in which displaying "50%" under the three circles TC suggests that the probability of obtaining the privilege is 50%. In addition, the timing at which such a suggestion is made may be delayed and the timing may be indicated. FIG. 55 (h) shows an example suggesting that the indication regarding the content of the privilege is displayed after 5 games by displaying "remaining 5G" under the three circles TC. Further, the configuration may be such that information on the content of the privilege is suggested at the timing when a predetermined number of clear conditions are satisfied or when a specific condition among the clear conditions is satisfied. FIG. 55 (i) shows an example in which the same “reward 10G” as in FIG. 55 (f) is displayed at the timing when one of the clearing conditions is satisfied (one of the three round TCs changes). ..

Further, the privilege image is not limited to the three circle TCs shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 (a) to 55 (d), and various images can be used. For example, FIGS. 55 (j) to 55 (p) show an example in which a character is used as a privilege image.

First, in the examples of FIGS. 55 (j) to 55 (l), FIG. 55 (j) is a privilege image corresponding to a privilege that can acquire an additional 10 games with a probability of 50%, and FIG. 55 (k) is 100%. It is a privilege image corresponding to a privilege that can acquire an additional 10 games with a probability, and FIG. 55 (l) is a privilege image corresponding to a privilege that can acquire an additional 30 games with a 100% probability. These privilege images have a basic form (an image in which only the main character is displayed) in FIG. 55 (j). The main character indicates an addition of 10 games or more. The star marks on the upper left of FIG. 55 (k) or the upper left and upper right of FIG. 55 (l) are confirmed to be added if there is one star mark, and at least 30 games are added if there are two. It is composed. That is, the content of the privilege that differs depending on the number of star marks is displayed. If the part without the star mark is displayed first, it can be expected to be a more advantageous privilege. In this way, when the configuration has a common part in a plurality of privilege images, when this common part is displayed, the player is given a sense of expectation while guessing the content of the privilege to some extent. Can be entertained. In addition, this configuration is an example, and if there is a star mark on the left part, the probability will increase, and if there is a star mark on the right part, the number of additional games will increase, and the higher the display position of the star mark, the more The content of the privilege may change depending on the location of the star mark, such as obtaining an advantageous privilege. In addition, the privilege may be configured to differ depending on the color of the star mark.

In the example of FIGS. 55 (m) and 55 (n), FIG. 55 (m) is a privilege image corresponding to a privilege that can acquire an additional 100 games with a 100% probability, and FIG. 55 (n) is an additional image with a 100% probability. It is a privilege image corresponding to the privilege which acquired 100 games and further suggests that the set value is one of 456. These privilege images are examples in which a princess character showing a privilege more advantageous than the basic form (an image in which only the main character is displayed) shown in FIG. 55 (j) is used. This princess character indicates that the addition of 100 games or more has been confirmed. Further, the Haniwa character displayed at the lower left of the privilege image of FIG. 55 (n) suggests that the set value is 456, and even if it is used in combination with the main character and others of FIG. 55 (j). Good.

In addition, in FIGS. 55 (j) to (l) and FIGS. 55 (m) to (n), the middle part is common, but the privilege image having the common part with other privilege images is described. May be configured so that the common part can be seen from the beginning. Further, the case where the common part is shown from the beginning and the case where the common part is not shown may be determined by lottery.

In addition, the image of the treasure box in FIG. 55 (o) suggests that the special zone right lottery (step S1411 in FIG. 24 (a)) has been won. In this case, information about the game can be obtained from the privilege image. Further, the character image of the robot in FIG. 55 (p) is a privilege image from which data for customization can be acquired.

When a plurality of privilege images are used as shown in FIGS. 55 (j) to (p), they are arranged in a preset area such as the frame shown by the cross hatching in FIG. 55 (q). It may be. Further, for such an area, a plurality of positions that can be arranged may be provided, and these positions may be appropriately selected and used, but the positions and the benefits to be obtained are not predicted so that the benefits to be obtained are not predicted. It is preferable that they are not related to. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 55 (j) to 55 (p), the background of the character exists, but the background may be configured so that nothing is displayed.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the conditional addition lottery when the privilege images of FIGS. 55 (j) to 55 (p) are used.

FIG. 56A shows an example of the operation corresponding to the second to fourth games of FIG. 53. In this example, the first clear condition corresponds to the left part, the second clear condition corresponds to the middle part, and the third clear condition corresponds to the right part. In the example of FIG. 53, the third clear condition, the second clear condition, and the first clear condition are satisfied in this order. Therefore, in this case, each part of the privilege image is left, right, middle, and left as shown in FIG. 56 (a). It is displayed in order.

FIG. 56B shows an example in which the already satisfied clearing condition is satisfied again. In this example, the internal winning of the condition device number 9 (middle 1st bell) is the clear condition corresponding to the middle part of the privilege image. When the middle part of the privilege image is not displayed, the middle part is displayed by the internal winning of the middle 1st bell. Furthermore, although the middle 1st bell was internally elected, the middle part has already been displayed, so there is no new part to be displayed. Further, in this figure, it is shown that the left part that was not displayed is displayed by the internal winning of the condition device number 8 (left 1st bell) which is the clear condition corresponding to the left part.

FIG. 56 (c) shows an example in which the same condition device (here, cherry) is associated with each portion. In this example, by winning the cherry three times internally, the privilege images are displayed in order from the left. The part corresponding to the internal winning (clearing condition) of the 1st to 3rd cherries may be decided when setting the clearing condition, or is determined randomly or by lottery each time the clearing condition is satisfied. May be. In any configuration, it is sufficient that the clearing condition and the privilege image part are associated with each other.

FIG. 56 (d) is an example in the case of adopting a configuration in which the privilege changes in the middle. In this example, after the middle 1st bell internal winning set as the clear condition corresponding to the middle part is established and the middle part is displayed, the strong cherry is internally won and the number of additional games increases (privileges change). , It is shown that the privilege image used by this has changed. In addition, when changing the privilege image, the mode is not limited to the mode in which the character is replaced as in this example, and the mode in which an image such as the star mark described in FIGS. 55 (k) and 55 (l) is added may be added.

FIG. 56 (e) is an example in the case where the clear condition corresponding to the operation order is used. In this example, when the common bell is internally won, the right part of the privilege image is displayed by pressing forward, and when the common bell is internally won, the left part of the privilege image is displayed by pressing backward. In this configuration, the part to be displayed can be determined by the operation. Therefore, by using a privilege image in which the information obtained differs depending on the displayed portion, the player can select and display the information desired to be acquired. In the privilege image of FIG. 56 (e), the "G addition" on the right side recognizes that the number of additional games can be obtained, and the "50" on the left side recognizes the number related to the privilege. In this example, the information about the acquisition of the number of additional games is obtained first, but the number regarding the privilege can be displayed first. In addition to "G addition" which indicates information that can acquire the number of additional games as such a privilege image, "set addition" as a privilege when the number of AT sets is adopted, and the period of the AT state is the number of games. "Add navigation" as a privilege when managing by the number of times of navigation, "Acquire sheets" as a privilege when managing the AT state period by the number of available cards instead of the number of games, some points are used By using a display such as "pt acquisition" as a privilege in the case, the content of the privilege that can be acquired can be inferred. In addition, for example, only the numbers (only the left part in FIG. 56E) may be displayed, and the right part may be displayed so that the content of the privilege can be grasped. Further, the displayed portion of these privilege images may not be selected according to the operation of the player. For example, in the case of a configuration in which the AT state is managed using two parameters of the number of navigations and the number of sheets that can be acquired, either of the above-mentioned "addition of navigation" or "acquisition of sheets" can be used. That is, the management configuration of the AT state is not limited, and an appropriate display can be adopted according to the management configuration of the AT state.

The privilege image has been described above with an example. In addition, if a part of the different privilege images has a common configuration, it is not possible to determine which privilege image will be displayed when this part is only displayed. May increase expectations for. Further, in the example of FIG. 54, although the three circle TCs are grouped together, each portion of the privilege image may be arranged apart in the display area of the effect image display device 157. In addition, a part of the privilege image may be displayed from the beginning. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, the state in which none of the clearing conditions is satisfied can be grasped by the fact that the three circles TC are white. May be configured so that nothing is displayed (the background image is displayed as it is).

[About aiming production during CZ]
In the present embodiment, if the AT lottery is won during CZ, either the BAR right or the peach 7 right is acquired (step S1305 in FIG. 23). Regarding these rights, there is a condition device that shifts to the AT state regardless of the stop mode when the internal win is made, but when the internal win is made to these condition devices, the stop operation for winning a specific role is urged. The aiming effect is executed (step S3307 in FIG. 45). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

First, the case where the BAR right is acquired will be described. In this case, the condition device number 2 is a condition device for shifting to the AT state (Yes in step S1C01 in FIG. 35). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 57, the operation when the condition device number 2 is internally won in the state where the BAR right is acquired will be described.

FIG. 57A shows that the effect image display device 157 executes a target effect suggesting that the stop operation is performed aiming at the BAR symbol in the order of right, middle, and left. Here, the condition device number 2 is internally won, and if the stop operation is appropriate, the BAR symbol can be stopped on the winning line and the re-game combination 10 can be won. The aiming effect here is an effect that encourages this stop operation.

According to this aiming effect, the right reel 112 is first aimed at the BAR symbol and the stop operation is performed. In order to stop the BAR symbol on the winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 symbols (within the pull-in range) from the position where the BAR symbol is on the winning line. More specifically, it is necessary to stop the right reel 112 at the timing when the range from the number 1 (replay symbol) to the number 5 (BAR symbol) of the right reel 112 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line. In FIG. 57B, the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the right reel 112 is shown by 4 BAR symbols. Further, FIG. 57 (c) shows a state in which the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the first right stop.

Subsequently, when the middle reel 111 and the left reel 110 are stopped by aiming at the BAR symbol, the BAR symbol is within the range of 4 symbols (within the pull-in range) based on the position on the winning line. It is necessary to perform a stop operation at a certain timing. More specifically, a stop operation is required at the timing when the range from the number 1 (watermelon symbol) to the number 5 (BAR symbol) of the middle reel 111 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line. Further, it is necessary to stop the left reel 110 at the timing when the range from No. 19 (blank 1 symbol) and No. 0 (bell symbol) to No. 3 (BAR symbol) of the left reel 110 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line. FIG. 57 (d) shows the pull-in range of the first to fourth symbols on the middle reel 111 with four BAR symbols, and FIG. 57 (e) shows the BAR symbols on the winning line due to the middle second stop. The stopped state is shown in. Further, in FIG. 57 (f), the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the left reel 110 is shown by four BAR symbols, and in FIG. 57 (g), the BAR symbol is a winning line due to the left third stop. The stopped state is shown above.

As described above, by performing the stop operation according to the aiming effect, the player is in a state of winning the replay role 10 (BAR replay). At this time, as shown in FIG. 57 (h), the effect image display device 157 is notified that the state shifts to the AT state. By this series of operations, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment that the AT state can be shifted by the stop operation.

In the above example, the case where the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left has been described, but when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, if the operation timing is explained for each reel, the replay combination 10 is set. You can win a prize. In the case of the left first stop or the middle first stop, the re-game combination 2 is won, and the re-game combination 10 is not won.

Even if the right first stop is made, if the operation operation at the above timing fails, the replaying combination 10 will not be won, and other winning combination (here, replaying combination 1, 3 to 9) The symbols that make up the above will be stopped. At this time, the Seven 1 symbol, the Seven 2 symbol, and the BAR symbol are preferentially stopped. In the present embodiment, it is also possible to intentionally stop aiming at the Seven 1 symbol and have the re-game combination 6 win a prize.

Next, the case where the peach 7 right is acquired will be described. In this case, the condition device numbers 3 and 4 are the condition devices for shifting to the AT state (Yes in step S1C03 in FIG. 35). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 58, the operation when the condition device number 3 is internally won in the state where the peach 7 right is acquired will be described.

FIG. 58A shows that the effect image display device 157 executes a target effect suggesting that the stop operation is performed aiming at the BAR symbol in the order of right, middle, and left. Here, since the condition device number 3 is internally won, the BAR symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line regardless of the stop operation. However, since the player does not know that the BAR symbol cannot be stopped, the player performs a stop operation aiming at the BAR symbol on the right reel 112 as in the example of FIG. 57.

In order to stop the BAR symbol on the winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 symbols (within the pull-in range) from the position where the BAR symbol is on the winning line. More specifically, it is necessary to stop the right reel 112 at the timing when the range from the number 1 (replay symbol) to the number 5 (BAR symbol) of the right reel 112 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line. Of these, the stop operation at the timing when the range from No. 1 (replay symbol) to No. 4 (Seven 2 symbol) of the right reel 112 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line is to stop the Seven 2 symbol at the winning line. It is also the timing of (all symbols are within the pull-in range). In FIG. 58 (b), the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the right reel 112 is shown by 4 BAR symbols. However, here, the BAR symbol does not stop on the winning line, and the Seven 1 symbol and the Seven 2 symbol are preferentially stopped. As described above, among the timings for stopping the BAR symbol, the timing when the BAR symbol is in the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the right reel 112 is also the timing for stopping the Seven 2 symbol, so aim for the BAR symbol. As a result, the Seven 2 symbol may stop. FIG. 58 (c) shows a state in which the Seven 2 symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the first right stop.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), in the effect image display device 157, the content of the effect effect is changed so as to aim at the Seven 2 symbol instead of the BAR symbol. If the aiming effect before the change is executed as it is, the player may feel uncomfortable that the Seven 2 symbol has stopped even though he aimed at the BAR symbol, but this change knows the symbol that should be aimed originally. As a result, it is possible to be convinced that the Seven 2 symbol has stopped and to increase the motivation for the subsequent stop operation.

Subsequently, the middle reel 111 and the left reel 110 are stopped by aiming at the Seven 2 symbol. In this case, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at a timing within the range (within the pull-in range) of the four symbols from the position where the Seven 2 symbol is on the winning line. More specifically, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 111 shown in FIG. 5 at the timing when the range from the number 0 (cherry symbol) to the number 4 (seven 2 symbol) is on the winning line. Further, a stop operation is required at the timing when the range from the number 0 (bell symbol) to the number 4 (seven 2 symbol) of the left reel 110 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line. In FIG. 58 (e), the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols in the middle reel 111 is shown by 4 Seven 2 symbols, and in FIG. 58 (f), the 7 2 symbols are won by the middle second stop. The stopped state is shown on the line. Further, in FIG. 58 (g), the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the left reel 110 is shown by four Seven 2 symbols, and in FIG. 58 (h), the Seven 2 symbols are shown by the left third stop. The state of being stopped is shown on the winning line.

As described above, by performing the stop operation according to the aiming effect, the player wins the replay role 16 (peach 7 replay). As a result, the aiming effect in this case is an effect that encourages a stop operation for winning the replaying combination 16. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (i), the effect image display device 157 is notified that the state shifts to the AT state. By this series of operations, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment that the AT state can be shifted by the stop operation.

In the above example, the case where the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left has been described, but when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, if the operation timing is explained for each reel, the replay combination 16 is set. You can win a prize. In the case of the left first stop or the middle first stop, the re-game combination 2 is won, and the re-game combination 16 is not won.

Even if the right first stop is made, if the operation operation at the above timing fails, the replaying combination 16 will not be won, and other winning combinations (here, replaying combinations 1, 3 to 6, The symbols constituting 11 to 13) will be stopped. At this time, the Seven 1 symbol, the Seven 2 symbol, and the BAR symbol are preferentially stopped. In the present embodiment, it is also possible to intentionally stop aiming at the Seven 1 symbol and have the re-game combination 6 win a prize.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 59, the operation when the condition device number 4 is internally won in the state where the peach 7 right is acquired will be described.

FIG. 59 (a) shows that the effect image display device 157 executes the aim effect suggesting that the stop operation is performed aiming at the BAR symbol in the order of right, middle, and left. Here, since the condition device number 4 is internally won, the BAR symbol can be stopped on the winning line at the first right stop.

It is assumed that the right reel 112 is stopped by aiming at the BAR symbol according to this aiming effect. In order to stop the BAR symbol on the winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 symbols (within the pull-in range) from the position where the BAR symbol is on the winning line. More specifically, it is necessary to stop the right reel 112 at the timing when the range from the number 1 (replay symbol) to the number 5 (BAR symbol) of the right reel 112 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line. In FIG. 59 (b), the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the right reel 112 is shown by 4 BAR symbols. Further, FIG. 59 (c) shows a state in which the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the first right stop.

Regarding the subsequent middle second stop, the stop operation will be performed aiming at the BAR symbol, but since the condition device number 4 is internally won here, the middle reel 111 has the BAR symbol regardless of the stop operation. Cannot be stopped on the winning line. However, since the player does not know that the BAR symbol cannot be stopped, the player performs the stop operation aiming at the BAR symbol on the middle reel 111 as in the example of FIG. 57.

In order to stop the BAR symbol on the winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 symbols (within the pull-in range) from the position where the BAR symbol is on the winning line. More specifically, a stop operation is required at the timing when the range from the number 1 (watermelon symbol) to the number 5 (BAR symbol) of the middle reel 111 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line. Of these, the timing when the range from the number 1 (watermelon symbol) to the number 4 (seven 2 symbol) of the middle reel 111 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line is also the timing for stopping the seven 2 symbol at the winning line. (All symbols are within the pull-in range). In FIG. 59 (d), the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the middle reel 111 is shown by 4 BAR symbols. However, here, the BAR symbol does not stop on the winning line, and the Seven 1 symbol and the Seven 2 symbol are preferentially stopped. As described above, among the timings for stopping the BAR symbols, the timing when the BAR symbols are in the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the middle reel 111 is also the timing for stopping the Seven 2 symbols, so aim for the BAR symbols. As a result, the Seven 2 symbol may stop. FIG. 59 (e) shows a state in which the Seven 2 symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the middle second stop.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 59 (f), in the effect image display device 157, the content of the effect effect is changed so as to aim at the Seven 2 symbol instead of the BAR symbol. If the aiming effect before the change is executed as it is, the player may feel uncomfortable that the Seven 2 symbol has stopped even though he aimed at the BAR symbol. In particular, unlike the example of FIG. 58, since the stop mode of the right first stop is the same as that of the example of FIG. 1, there is a possibility that the feeling of discomfort will be greater. As a result, it is possible to be convinced that the Seven 2 symbol has stopped and to increase the motivation for the subsequent stop operation.

Subsequently, the left reel 110 will be stopped by aiming at the Seven 2 symbol. In this case, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at a timing within the range (within the pull-in range) of the four symbols from the position where the Seven 2 symbol is on the winning line. More specifically, a stop operation is required at the timing when the range from the number 0 (bell symbol) to the number 4 (seven 2 symbol) of the left reel 110 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line. Of these, the timing at which the range from number 0 (bell symbol) to number 3 (BAR symbol) of the left reel 110 shown in FIG. 5 is on the winning line is also the timing for stopping the BAR symbol at the winning line (in any case). The design of is also within the pull-in range). In FIG. 59 (g), the pull-in range of the first to fourth symbols on the left reel 110 is shown by four seven 2 symbols. However, here, the Seven 2 symbol does not stop on the winning line (Neither of the replaying roles 14 and 15 remaining as candidates for the winning combination stops on the left reel 110), and the Seven 1 symbol does not stop. And BAR symbols will be stopped preferentially. As described above, among the timings for stopping the Seven 2 symbols, the timing when the Seven 2 symbols are in the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the left reel 110 is also the timing for stopping the BAR symbols. As a result, the BAR symbol may stop when aiming at. FIG. 59 (h) shows a state in which the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the left third stop. In this case, the Seven 2 symbols are aligned downward to the right.

As described above, by performing the stop operation according to the aiming effect, the player is in a state of winning the replay role 15 (peach 7 replay). As a result, the aiming effect in this case is an effect that encourages a stop operation for winning the replaying combination 15. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (i), the effect image display device 157 is notified that the AT state is entered. By this series of operations, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment that the AT state can be shifted by the stop operation.

In the above example, the case where the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left has been described, but when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, if the operation timing is explained for each reel, the replay combination 15 is set. You can win a prize. However, if the second stop operation is for the left reel 110, when the BAR symbol stops on the winning line, both the replay combinations 10 and 15 are in a tempered state (at this point, the condition device number 2, condition device number 2, It is possible to narrow down to any of 4). In this case, the BAR symbol may be aimed at the middle reel 111 without changing the targeting effect symbol to stop the Seven 2 symbol, or the target symbol may be changed to the Seven 2 symbol. In the case of the left first stop or the middle first stop, the re-game combination 2 is won, and the re-game combination 15 is not won.

Even if the right first stop is made, if the operation at the above timing fails, the re-game combination 15 will not be won, and other roles that can be won (here, the re-game combination 1, 3 to 7) will not be won. , 9, 14) will be stopped. At this time, the Seven 1 symbol, the Seven 2 symbol, and the BAR symbol are preferentially stopped. In the present embodiment, it is also possible to intentionally stop aiming at the Seven 1 symbol and have the re-game combination 6 win a prize.

In the explanations of FIGS. 57 to 59, the aiming effect when the AT lottery is won (when the BAR right and the peach 7 right are acquired) has been described, but the aiming effect can be achieved even when the AT lottery is not won. It may be executed (step S3317 in FIG. 45). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 60, an example of the operation when the condition device number 1 is internally won without winning the AT lottery will be described.

FIG. 60A shows that the effect image display device 157 executes a target effect suggesting that a stop operation is performed aiming at the BAR symbol in the order of right, middle, and left. Here, the condition device number 1 is internally won, and the BAR symbol can be stopped on the winning line for the right first stop and the middle second stop.

It is assumed that the right reel 112 is stopped by aiming at the BAR symbol according to this aiming effect. In order to stop the BAR symbol on the winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 symbols (within the pull-in range) from the position where the BAR symbol is on the winning line. In FIG. 60B, the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the right reel 112 is shown by 4 BAR symbols. Further, FIG. 60 (c) shows a state in which the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the first right stop.

Subsequently, even when the stop operation is performed aiming at the BAR symbol on the middle reel 111, the BAR symbol is stopped at the timing within the range of 4 symbols (within the pull-in range) based on the position on the winning line. You need to do something. FIG. 60 (d) shows the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the middle reel 111 with four BAR symbols, and FIG. 60 (e) shows the BAR symbols on the winning line due to the middle second stop. The stopped state is shown in.

Subsequently, the left reel 110 will be stopped by aiming at the BAR symbol. In this case, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 symbols (within the pull-in range) from the position where the BAR symbol is on the winning line. In FIG. 60 (f), the pull-in range of the first to fourth symbols on the left reel 110 is shown by four seven 2 symbols. However, here, only the replay combination 8 remains as a candidate for the winning combination, and only the replay symbol is stopped on the left reel 110. FIG. 60 (g) shows a state in which the replay symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the left third stop.

If the operation is performed at a timing other than the above, the symbols constituting the other winning combinations will be stopped. At this time, the Seven 1 symbol, the Seven 2 symbol, and the BAR symbol are preferentially stopped, but the re-game combination 6, 10, 15, and 16 are not won in the condition device number 1. Therefore, even if the Seven 1 symbol is aimed at, the re-game combination 6 cannot be won.

If the condition device number 1 is internally won, even if the stop operation is performed according to the aiming effect, none of the replaying combinations 10, 15 and 16 that are won at the time of AT winning will be won. At this time, as shown in FIG. 60 (h), the effect image display device 157 displays a "sorry" message notifying that the AT state is not entered.

[Other configurations for aiming production in CZ]
As described in the examples of FIGS. 57 to 60, in the present embodiment, it is possible to lead to a prize for a specific role while changing the target symbol on the way, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In the present embodiment, it is more advantageous to win the re-game combination 16 and the re-game combination 15 in FIGS. 58 and 59 than the case where the re-game combination 10 is won in FIG. 57 (AT state). The number of games remaining in the initial AT is large, FIG. 22 (d)). Although it is not necessary to adopt a configuration having a difference in the degree of advantage in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by adopting a configuration that is more advantageous when the target symbol is changed. It should be noted that the configuration may be more disadvantageous when the target design is changed.

In the examples of FIGS. 58 and 59, the BAR symbol is aimed at and the effect is changed at the timing when the Seven 2 symbol that is really desired to be stopped stops, but when the Seven 2 symbol does not stop here, May continue as it is without changing the target effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, regardless of the stop mode, the seven 2 symbol does not stop because the configuration shifts from the next game to the AT state when the condition device corresponding to the acquired right is internally elected. You may execute the effect suggesting the transition to the AT state after continuing the effect as it is without changing the effect aimed at. Further, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a failure effect indicating that the target symbol has not stopped may be performed. In the examples of FIGS. 58 and 59, the target symbol is changed, but there may be a case where the effect of aiming at the Seven 2 symbol is executed from the beginning and the target symbol is not changed.

Regarding the timing of change in the target effect, a symbol different from the symbol shown by the target effect (Seven 2 symbol in FIGS. 58 and 59) is set to the target position (middle in FIG. 55 and 59) by the stop operation. It may be the moment when it is confirmed that it will be stopped, or it may be after the corresponding reel has stopped. In particular, depending on the reel symbol arrangement and the timing of pressing, a configuration that makes it easier to grasp the stop symbol may be adopted, and for such a configuration, it is preferable to change the target effect after the reel is stopped. In addition, depending on the player, it is possible that the player operates the game by inertia and does not notice that the target symbol has been changed, so it freezes along with the change of the target symbol so that it is easy to notice that the target symbol has changed. May be configured to execute.

Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 60, the condition device number 2 can win the re-game combination 10 when the internal winning is achieved, while the condition device number 1 wins the re-game combination 10 when the internal winning is achieved. Although there is nothing to do, the winning combination (replaying combination 8 in FIG. 60), which is expected to win the replaying combination 10 halfway, is configured to win the prize. On the other hand, in the condition device numbers 3 and 4 described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, it is possible to win the replay games 15 and 16, respectively, but for these roles, a condition device for expecting a prize is provided. Not done. That is, it can be grasped that the AT winning (acquisition of 7 peach rights) is confirmed when the target symbol is changed in the aiming production. Not limited to this configuration, the replaying combinations 15 and 16 may also be configured to be provided with a condition device for expecting a prize for these combinations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the BAR symbol and the Seven 2 symbol are adjacent to each other, but even if they are not adjacent to each other, the Seven 2 symbol can be stopped among the stop timings aimed at the BAR symbol. Should be included. For example, in the configuration in which the Seven 2 symbol is arranged above the BAR symbol in FIG. 5, the Seven 2 symbol is less likely to stop when aiming at the BAR symbol as the distance increases, but when the Seven 2 symbol stops, Can surprise the player because the amount of pulling in the reel is large. Further, in the present embodiment, the BAR symbol and the Seven 2 symbol are adjacent to each other on the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111, and there is a stop timing capable of stopping both of them. However, regarding the operation of FIG. 58, these reels are used. In, the BAR symbol and the Seven 2 symbol may not be adjacent to each other. Even with this configuration, the operation described with reference to FIG. 58 is established. In this way, at least one reel capable of stopping both the BAR symbol and the Seven 2 symbol (for example, the right reel 112 in FIG. 58) may be provided, and the stop operation is performed on this reel. The configuration may be such that the aiming effect is changed at the timing. Further, as for the operation of FIG. 59, the BAR symbol and the Seven 2 symbol may not be adjacent to each other on the right reel 112.

In the examples of FIGS. 57 to 60, the configuration using the BAR symbol and the Seven 2 symbol has been described, but the symbols used are not limited to this. Further, the winning combination is not limited to the replaying combination, and various combinations can be used. Further, in this example, the operation of the target effect is configured to be performed when notifying the transition to the AT state, but the application scene of this operation is not limited to this example. For example, in the present embodiment, if the condition device numbers 2 to 4 are internally won in the special zone, the number of remaining AT games is added, but the effect aimed at when the condition device is internally won is executed. It may be configured.

Here, an example in which the configuration of the target effect is combined with the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 61. In this example, a configuration is adopted in which a big bonus is won with "7-7-7" and a regular bonus is won with "7-7-BAR". In this configuration, when the bonus is determined, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), a display in which both a big bonus and a regular bonus are possible is executed until all reels are stopped. Here, if 7 symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel, the big bonus is confirmed (1st probability). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the display of the BAR symbol displayed on the screen is erased at the stage when the first probability is reached, and the big bonus confirmation is announced. Also, for example, when the big bonus is established, by performing the stop operation when the 7 symbols are located in the upper left row, the 7 symbols are stopped in the upper left row and the big bonus is confirmed, while outside the display frame. If there are 7 symbols, the 7 symbols will be drawn to the middle left, and the big bonus will not be confirmed. By performing a specific operation (pressing bitter, etc.) on any of the reels, the internal winning combination will be established. In the case of a specification capable of determining the above, the instruction of the target symbol may be changed as in the present embodiment by performing the operation.

[About the operation when shifting to the specialized zone (up to the production mode setting)]
In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of specialized zone sets may be added by lottery in the AT state (step S1415 in FIG. 24), and the number of specialized zone sets becomes 0 when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0. If is greater than 0, the zone shifts to the specialized zone (Yes in step S1D09 of FIG. 9 (F)). In addition, the effect related to the special zone is executed in the first sub-control unit 400 (Yes in step S3A03 of FIG. 46 (b)). Hereinafter, an example of the operation when the zone is shifted to the specialized zone will be described with reference to the examples of FIGS. 62 to 69. FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing an example of the transition to the specialized zone. 63 to 69 are diagrams showing an example of operation when the timing chart shown in FIG. 62 is followed.

In the example of FIG. 62, the first game is completed when the number of remaining AT games in the AT state is 1 and the number of specialized zone sets is larger than 0. In the following second game, the effect of ending the AT state is executed (step S3407 in FIG. 46), and when all the reels are stopped and the game is completed without adding the number of remaining AT games, the game state is special. It is set in the conversion zone and the special zone initial setting process is executed (step S1D15 in FIG. 36, FIG. 36 (b)). In FIG. 62, it is shown that the transition from the AT state to the specialized zone was performed in the second game.

In this example, it is assumed that scenario 1 is set in this special zone initial setting process (step S1D23 in FIG. 36 (b)). When the scenario is set, the first six privilege types defined in this scenario are stored in the privilege type arrays [1] to [6] (step S1D25 in FIG. 36B). FIG. 63A shows an array of privilege types in which privilege types are stored by this process. Further, the value of the planned number of games to be added array [1] is set based on the privilege type (“A” in this case) stored in the privilege type array [1] (step S1D27 in FIG. 36 (b)). FIG. 63 (b) shows that 5 is set in the array of planned number of games to be added [1] by this process. In addition, the life value is initialized to 3. FIG. 62 shows that the life value is set to 3 at the end of the second game. Further, the information regarding these special zones is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as a game state update command (step S1A27 in FIG. 29). Upon receiving this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the effect mode selection effect (step S3A09 in FIG. 50). FIG. 64 (a1) shows the state of the arrangement shown in FIG. 63 (b), and FIGS. 64 (a2) and 64 (a3) show an example of the effect mode selection effect executed at this time.

During the execution of the effect mode selection effect, the effect mode A and the effect mode B are switched every 3 seconds (step S3A15 in FIG. 50), and the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection effect is switched accordingly (FIG. 64 (a2). ) (A3)). At this time, when the effect button 150 is operated, the special zone start effect (FIGS. 64 (b2) and (b3)) is executed, and the effect mode set at that time is confirmed (step S3A15 in FIG. 50 is not executed). .. The effect mode is determined even when some operation other than the effect button 150 is performed, but in this case, the special zone start effect is not executed (Yes in step S3A11 of FIG. 50). When the effect mode is determined here, the effect in the special zone is executed accordingly. In the special zone, the number of additional AT remaining games acquired and the value of life are displayed.

[Operation example in specialized zone (1)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the effect mode A is selected will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 69. First, FIG. 64 (b2) shows an example of the special zone start effect when the effect mode A is set. Here, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "A" stored in the privilege type array [1] and the character "5G" corresponding to 5 stored in the number of games to be added array [1] are displayed. It is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen surrounded by a frame, and the start character is displayed in the center. Although the state of the array at this time is shown in FIG. 64 (b1), the state of the array here is the same as the state shown in FIG. 64 (a1).

In the following third game, it is assumed that the condition device number 11 is internally won at the start of the game. FIG. 62 shows that the condition device number 11 was internally won in the third game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, specialization-related processing (step S1113 in FIG. 18, FIG. 24 (b)) is executed at the start of the game. Then, at this point, the value of the planned number of games to be added [2] is set by lottery based on the privilege type (here, “A”, see FIG. 64 (b1)) stored in the privilege type array [2]. (Step S1423 of FIG. 24B). Here, it is assumed that 10 is set as the value of the number of games to be added array [2]. From the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), FIG. 63 (c) shows that 10 is set in the array of scheduled additional games [2] by this process. Further, the privilege type arrangement and the number of games to be added are shifted (step S1425 in FIG. 24B). FIG. 63 (d) shows that the contents of the array shown in FIG. 63 (c) are shifted to the left. In the privilege type array [6], the privilege type (here, “C”) that follows the shift with reference to the scenario is stored.

Further, at the start of the game, the instruction information setting process (steps S1121 and 28 in FIG. 18) is executed. Here, since the game state is the special zone and the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won, half navigation is set as instruction information. Specifically, out of the correct pressing order of the internally elected condition device 11, information indicating only the stop button (here, the middle stop button 138) that is the target of the first stop is set as instruction information.

The sequence information and instruction information described above are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as an internal winning command (step S1041 in FIG. 16). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, an operation navigation indicating only the middle first stop is set (step S3005 in FIG. 42), and the display based on the privilege type array and the number of games scheduled to be added is executed (step S3005 in FIG. 42). Yes) in step S3411 of FIG. 46 (b). FIG. 64 (c1) shows the state of the array shown in FIG. 63 (d). Further, in FIG. 64 (c2), it is shown that the characters "? 1?" Are displayed in a state surrounded by a frame as an operation navigation indicating only the middle first stop in the lower part of the screen. In addition, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "A" stored in the privilege type array [0] and the "5G" corresponding to 5 stored in the planned number of games array [0] to be added on it. It is shown that the characters are displayed on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "A" stored in the privilege type array [1] and the character "10G" corresponding to 10 stored in the number of games to be added array [1] are framed. It is shown that it is displayed in the upper right of the screen in a state surrounded by. Of the displays shown in FIG. 64 (c2), the contents displayed on the left side of the screen (privilege type array [0], number of games to be added [0]) indicate the types of benefits and the number of games to be added in the game. The contents displayed in the upper right frame of the screen (privilege type arrangement [1], number of games to be added [1]) indicate the type of privilege and the number of games to be added in the next game.

In this third game, it is assumed that the players can be operated in the order of pressing the correct answers, and the small winning combination 6 is won and 8 cards are paid out. FIG. 62 shows that eight cards were paid out in the third game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, the special update process (steps S1A13 and 37 in FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game. Here, since the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "A" and the small winning combination 6 is won, the value stored in the number of games to be added array [0] is the number of remaining AT games. It is added (step S1E07 in FIG. 37). FIG. 62 shows that the number of remaining AT games is added to 5 in the third game.

Information on the payout and the number of remaining AT games described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a game state update command (step S1A27 in FIG. 29). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, an additional effect is set in the specialized effect update process (step S3B07 in FIG. 51). In FIG. 65 (d2), the characters "GET 8 cars" indicating that 8 cards have been paid out by the additional effect and the characters "+ 5G" indicating that the number of remaining AT games is 5 are framed. It is shown that it is displayed on the left side of the screen in a state surrounded by. Further, in FIG. 65 (e2), the frame on the left side of the screen displayed in FIG. 65 (d2) is erased (for example, suddenly disappears, fades out of the screen, the same applies to the following example). It is shown that the characters "acquisition 5G" indicating the value of the number of remaining AT games in the above are displayed on the right side of the screen. Note that FIGS. 65 (d1) and 65 (e1) show the state of the array when FIGS. 65 (d2) and (e2) are displayed, and the state of the array here is shown in FIG. 64 (c1). It is the same as the state shown in.

In the following fourth game, it is assumed that the condition device number 10 is internally won at the start of the game. FIG. 62 shows that the condition device number 10 was internally won in the fourth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, specialization-related processing (step S1113 in FIG. 18, FIG. 24 (b)) is executed at the start of the game. Then, at this point, the value of the planned number of games to be added [2] is set by lottery based on the privilege type (here, “X”, see FIG. 65 (e1)) stored in the privilege type array [2]. (Step S1423 of FIG. 24B). Here, it is assumed that 5 is set as the value of the number of games to be added array [2]. Further, the privilege type arrangement and the number of games to be added are shifted (step S1425 in FIG. 24B). In the privilege type array [6], the privilege type (here, “X”) that follows the shift with reference to the scenario is stored. FIG. 65 (f1) shows the state of the array after the above processing is performed.

Further, at the start of the game, the instruction information setting process (steps S1121 and 28 in FIG. 18) is executed. Here, since the game state is the special zone and the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won, half navigation is set as instruction information. Specifically, out of the correct pressing order of the internally elected condition device 10, information indicating only the stop button (here, the middle stop button 138) that is the target of the first stop is set as instruction information.

The sequence information and instruction information described above are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as an internal winning command (step S1041 in FIG. 16). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, an operation navigation indicating only the middle first stop is set (step S3005 in FIG. 42), and the display based on the privilege type array and the number of games scheduled to be added is executed (step S3005 in FIG. 42). Yes) in step S3411 of FIG. 46 (b). In FIG. 65 (f2), it is shown that the characters "? 1?" Are displayed in a state surrounded by a frame as an operation navigation indicating only the middle first stop in the lower part of the screen. In addition, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "A" stored in the privilege type array [0] and the "10G" corresponding to 10 stored in the planned number of games array [0] to be added on it. It is shown that the characters are displayed on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the image of the "bomb" corresponding to the privilege type "X" stored in the privilege type array [1] and the character "5G" corresponding to 5 stored in the number of games to be added array [1] are framed. It is shown that it is displayed in the upper right of the screen in a state surrounded by. Of the displays shown in FIG. 65 (f2), the contents displayed on the left side of the screen (privilege type array [0], number of games to be added [0]) indicate the types of benefits and the number of games to be added in the game. The contents displayed in the upper right frame of the screen (privilege type arrangement [1], number of games to be added [1]) indicate the type of privilege and the number of games to be added in the next game.

In this fourth game, it is assumed that although the player follows the half-navigation, he cannot operate in the correct push order and wins a prize. FIG. 62 shows that one payout was made in the fourth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, the update process during specialization (steps S1A13 and 37 in FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game, but here, the privilege types stored in the privilege type array [0] are executed. Is "A" and one card is won, so that the value stored in the number of games to be added [0] is not added to the number of remaining AT games (Yes in step S1E03 in FIG. 37). ). FIG. 62 shows that the number of AT remaining games in the fourth game is the same as that in the third game (no addition).

Information on the payout and the number of remaining AT games described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a game state update command (step S1A27 in FIG. 29). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, the effect is set by the specialized effect update process, and as shown in FIG. 66 (g2), the main character who looks disappointed because there is no addition is displayed ( Step S3B21 in FIG. 51). Note that FIG. 66 (g1) shows the state of the array when FIG. 66 (g2) is displayed, but the state of the array here is the same as the state shown in FIG. 65 (f1). is there.

In the following fifth game, it is assumed that the condition device number 8 is internally won at the start of the game. FIG. 62 shows that the condition device number 8 was internally won in the fifth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, specialization-related processing (step S1113 in FIG. 18, FIG. 24 (b)) is executed at the start of the game. Then, at this point, the value of the planned number of games to be added [2] is set by lottery based on the privilege type (here, “A”, see FIG. 66 (g1)) stored in the privilege type array [2]. (Step S1423 of FIG. 24B). Here, it is assumed that 10 is set as the value of the number of games to be added array [2]. Further, the privilege type arrangement and the number of games to be added are shifted (step S1425 in FIG. 24B). In the privilege type array [6], the privilege type (here, “H”) that follows the shift with reference to the scenario is stored. FIG. 66 (h1) shows the state of the array after the above processing is performed.

Further, at the start of the game, the instruction information setting process (steps S1121 and 28 in FIG. 18) is executed. Here, since the game state is the special zone and the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won, half navigation is set as instruction information. Specifically, out of the correct pressing order of the internally elected condition device 8, information indicating only the stop button (here, the left stop button 137) that is the target of the first stop is set as instruction information.

The sequence information and instruction information described above are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as an internal winning command (step S1041 in FIG. 16). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, an operation navigation indicating only the left first stop is set (step S3005 in FIG. 42), and a display based on the privilege type array and the number of games to be added is executed (step S3005 in FIG. 42). Yes) in step S3411 of FIG. 46 (b). In FIG. 66 (h2), it is shown that the characters "1 ??" are displayed in a state surrounded by a frame as an operation navigation indicating only the left first stop in the lower part of the screen. In addition, the image of the "bomb" corresponding to the privilege type "X" stored in the privilege type array [0] and the "5G" corresponding to 5 stored in the planned number of games array [0] to be added on it. It is shown that the characters are displayed on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "A" stored in the privilege type array [1] and the character "10G" corresponding to 10 stored in the number of games to be added array [1] are framed. It is shown that it is displayed in the upper right of the screen in a state surrounded by. Of the displays shown in FIG. 66 (h2), the contents displayed on the left side of the screen (privilege type array [0], number of games to be added [0]) indicate the types of benefits and the number of games to be added in the game. The contents displayed in the upper right frame of the screen (privilege type arrangement [1], number of games to be added [1]) indicate the type of privilege and the number of games to be added in the next game.

In this fifth game, it is assumed that the player can operate in the order of pressing the correct answer, wins the small role 6, and pays out eight cards. FIG. 62 shows that eight cards were paid out in the fifth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, the special update process (steps S1A13 and 37 in FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game. Here, since the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "X" and the small winning combination 6 is won, the value stored in the number of games to be added array [0] is the number of remaining AT games. Although they are added, the life value is subtracted by 1 (step S1E07, step S1E43 in FIG. 37). FIG. 62 shows that the number of remaining AT games is added to 10 in the fifth game, and the life value is subtracted by 1 to become 2.

Information on the payout and the number of remaining AT games described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a game state update command (step S1A27 in FIG. 29). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, an additional effect and a life reduction effect are set in the specialized effect update process (steps S3B07 and S3B11 in FIG. 51). In FIG. 66 (i2), the characters "GET 8 cars" indicating that 8 cards have been paid out by the additional effect and the characters "+ 5G" indicating that the number of remaining AT games is 5 are framed. It is shown that it is displayed on the left side of the screen in a state surrounded by. In addition, the life reduction effect shows the characters "Life-1" indicating that the life has been subtracted by 1, and an image indicating that the "bomb" has exploded is displayed on the left side of the screen, reducing the life. The hero character who looks tired is displayed. Further, in FIG. 67 (j2), the frame and the image on the left side of the screen displayed in FIG. 66 (i2) are erased, and the characters “acquired 10G” indicating the value of the number of remaining AT games at the present time and the life It is shown that the character indicating the value of is displayed on the right side of the screen. Note that FIGS. 66 (i1) and 67 (j1) show the state of the arrangement when FIGS. 66 (i2) and 67 (j2) are displayed, respectively. The state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 66 (h1).

In the following sixth game, it is assumed that the condition device number 9 is internally won at the start of the game. FIG. 62 shows that the condition device number 9 was internally won in the sixth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, specialization-related processing (step S1113 in FIG. 18, FIG. 24 (b)) is executed at the start of the game. Then, at this point, the value of the planned number of games to be added [2] is set by lottery based on the privilege type (here, “B”, see FIG. 67 (j1)) stored in the privilege type array [2]. (Step S1423 of FIG. 24B). Here, it is assumed that 15 is set as the value of the number of games to be added array [2]. Further, the privilege type arrangement and the number of games to be added are shifted (step S1425 in FIG. 24B). In the privilege type array [6], the privilege type (here, “A”) that follows the shift with reference to the scenario is stored. FIG. 67 (k1) shows the state of the array after the above processing is performed.

Further, at the start of the game, the instruction information setting process (steps S1121 and 28 in FIG. 18) is executed. Here, since the game state is the special zone and the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won, half navigation is set as instruction information. Specifically, out of the correct pressing order of the internally elected condition device 9, information indicating only the stop button (here, the left stop button 137) that is the target of the first stop is set as instruction information.

The sequence information and instruction information described above are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as an internal winning command (step S1041 in FIG. 16). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, an operation navigation indicating only the left first stop is set (step S3005 in FIG. 42), and a display based on the privilege type array and the number of games to be added is executed (step S3005 in FIG. 42). Yes) in step S3411 of FIG. 46 (b). In FIG. 67 (k2), it is shown that the characters "1 ??" are displayed in a state surrounded by a frame as an operation navigation indicating only the left first stop in the lower part of the screen. In addition, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "A" stored in the privilege type array [0] and the "10G" corresponding to 10 stored in the planned number of games array [0] to be added on it. It is shown that the characters are displayed on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "B" stored in the privilege type array [1] and the character "15G" corresponding to 15 stored in the number of games to be added array [1] are framed. It is shown that it is displayed in the upper right of the screen in a state surrounded by. Of the displays shown in FIG. 67 (k2), the contents displayed on the left side of the screen (privilege type array [0], number of games to be added [0]) indicate the types of benefits and the number of games to be added in the game. The contents displayed in the upper right frame of the screen (privilege type arrangement [1], number of games to be added [1]) indicate the type of privilege and the number of games to be added in the next game.

In the game of the sixth game, as a result of operating without following the half navigation, it is assumed that the winning combination is not won (no payout). FIG. 62 shows that there is no payout (0 cards) in the sixth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, the special update process (steps S1A13 and 37 in FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game. Here, since the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "A" and none of the winning roles were won in the push order bell internally, the number of games to be added [0] The value stored in is added to the number of remaining AT games (step S1E07 in FIG. 37). FIG. 62 shows that the number of remaining AT games is added to 20 in the sixth game.

Information on the payout and the number of remaining AT games described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a game state update command (step S1A27 in FIG. 29). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, an additional effect is set in the specialized effect update process (step S3B07 in FIG. 51). In FIG. 67 (l2), it is shown that the character "+ 10G" indicating that the number of remaining AT games is added by 10 is displayed on the left side of the screen in a state surrounded by a frame by the addition effect. There is. Further, in FIG. 68 (m2), the frame on the left side of the screen displayed in FIG. 67 (l2) is erased, and the characters “acquisition 20G” indicating the value of the number of remaining AT games at the present time are displayed on the right side of the screen. It is shown that it is displayed. Note that FIGS. 67 (l1) and 68 (m1) show the state of the arrangement when FIGS. 67 (l2) and 68 (m2) are displayed, respectively. The state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 67 (k1).

In the following 7th game, it is assumed that no internal winning is made to any of the condition devices at the start of the game (the internal winning is lost). FIG. 62 shows that in the seventh game, none of the condition devices was internally elected. Further, since the game state is the special zone, specialization-related processing (step S1113 in FIG. 18, FIG. 24 (b)) is executed at the start of the game. Then, at this point, the value of the planned number of games to be added [2] is set by lottery based on the privilege type (here, “X”, see FIG. 68 (m1)) stored in the privilege type array [2]. (Step S1423 of FIG. 24B). Here, it is assumed that 10 is set as the value of the number of games to be added array [2]. Further, the privilege type arrangement and the number of games to be added are shifted (step S1425 in FIG. 24B). In the privilege type array [6], the privilege type (here, “Y”) that follows the shift with reference to the scenario is stored. FIG. 68 (n1) shows the state of the array after the above processing is performed.

Further, at the start of the game, the instruction information setting process (steps S1121 and 28 in FIG. 18) is executed, but since the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is not internally won here, the instruction information is input. Not set (No in step S1513 of FIG. 28).

The sequence information described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as an internal winning command (step S1041 in FIG. 16). Upon receiving this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the display based on the privilege type array and the number of games to be added (Yes in step S3411 of FIG. 46 (b)). In FIG. 68 (n2), the image of the “treasure box” corresponding to the privilege type “B” stored in the privilege type array [0] and the 15 stored in the planned number of games array [0] to be added on the image correspond to It is shown that the character "15G" is displayed on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the image of the "bomb" corresponding to the privilege type "X" stored in the privilege type array [1] and the character "10G" corresponding to 10 stored in the number of games to be added array [1] are framed. It is shown that it is displayed in the upper right of the screen in a state surrounded by. Of the displays shown in FIG. 68 (n2), the contents displayed on the left side of the screen (privilege type array [0], number of games to be added [0]) indicate the types of benefits and the number of games to be added in the game. The contents displayed in the upper right frame of the screen (privilege type arrangement [1], number of games to be added [1]) indicate the type of privilege and the number of games to be added in the next game.

In this seventh game, no prize is won in any of the roles. FIG. 62 shows that there is no payout (0 cards) in the 7th game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, the special update process (steps S1A13 and 37 in FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game, but here, the privilege types stored in the privilege type array [0] are executed. Is "B" and is internally won by loss (not internally won by the conditional device), so the value stored in the planned addition number array [0] may be added to the number of remaining AT games. No (Yes in step S1E03 of FIG. 37). FIG. 62 shows that the number of AT remaining games in the 7th game is the same as that in the 6th game (no addition).

Information on the payout and the number of remaining AT games described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a game state update command (step S1A27 in FIG. 29). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, the effect is set by the specialized effect update process, and as shown in FIG. 68 (o2), the main character who looks disappointed because there is no addition is displayed ( Step S3B21 in FIG. 51). Note that FIG. 68 (o1) shows the state of the array when FIG. 68 (o2) is displayed, but the state of the array here is the same as the state shown in FIG. 68 (n1). is there.

In the following eighth game, it is assumed that the condition device number 9 is internally won at the start of the game. FIG. 62 shows that the condition device number 9 was internally elected in the eighth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, specialization-related processing (step S1113 in FIG. 18, FIG. 24 (b)) is executed at the start of the game. Then, at this point, the value of the planned number of games to be added [2] is set by lottery based on the privilege type (here, “C”, see FIG. 68 (o1)) stored in the privilege type array [2]. (Step S1423 of FIG. 24B). Here, it is assumed that 15 is set as the value of the number of games to be added array [2]. Further, the privilege type arrangement and the number of games to be added are shifted (step S1425 in FIG. 24B). In the privilege type array [6], the privilege type (here, “A”) that follows the shift with reference to the scenario is stored. FIG. 69 (p1) shows the state of the array after the above processing is performed.

Further, at the start of the game, the instruction information setting process (steps S1121 and 28 in FIG. 18) is executed. Here, since the game state is the special zone and the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won, half navigation is set as instruction information. Specifically, out of the correct pressing order of the internally elected condition device 9, information indicating only the stop button (here, the left stop button 137) that is the target of the first stop is set as instruction information.

The sequence information and instruction information described above are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as an internal winning command (step S1041 in FIG. 16). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, an operation navigation indicating only the left first stop is set (step S3005 in FIG. 42), and a display based on the privilege type array and the number of games to be added is executed (step S3005 in FIG. 42). Yes) in step S3411 of FIG. 46 (b). In FIG. 69 (p2), it is shown that the characters "1 ??" are displayed in a state surrounded by a frame as an operation navigation indicating only the left first stop in the lower part of the screen. In addition, the image of the "bomb" corresponding to the privilege type "X" stored in the privilege type array [0] and the "10G" corresponding to 10 stored in the number of games to be added array [0] on it. It is shown that the characters are displayed on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "C" stored in the privilege type array [1] and the character "15G" corresponding to 15 stored in the number of games to be added array [1] are framed. It is shown that it is displayed in the upper right of the screen in a state surrounded by. Of the displays shown in FIG. 69 (p2), the contents displayed on the left side of the screen (privilege type array [0], number of games to be added [0]) indicate the types of benefits and the number of games to be added in the game. The contents displayed in the upper right frame of the screen (privilege type arrangement [1], number of games to be added [1]) indicate the type of privilege and the number of games to be added in the next game.

In the 8th game, it is assumed that one player cannot be operated in the correct push order and wins a prize (either when the half navigation is followed or when the half navigation is not followed). FIG. 62 shows that one payout was made in the eighth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, the special update process (steps S1A13 and 37 in FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game. Here, since the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "X" and one card is won, the value stored in the number of games to be added array [0] is the number of remaining AT games. It is not added and the life value is maintained without being subtracted (Yes, step S1E07 and step S1E43 are not executed in step S1E03 of FIG. 37). FIG. 62 shows that the number of AT remaining games and the life value of the eighth game are the same as those of the seventh game.

Information on the payout and the number of remaining AT games described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a game state update command (step S1A27 in FIG. 29). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, the effect is set by the specialized effect update process, and as shown in FIGS. 69 (q2) and 69 (r2), the pattern of the "bomb" rolls off the screen. Is displayed (step S3B21 in FIG. 51). Note that FIG. 69 (q1) (r1) shows the state of the array when FIGS. 69 (q2) and (r2) are displayed, but the state of the array here is shown in FIG. 69 (p1). It is the same as the state shown in.

[Operation example in specialized zone (2)]
Hereinafter, an example of the operation when the effect mode A is selected will be described with reference to the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing an example in the special zone. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of operation according to the timing chart shown in FIG. 70. Here, the explanation will be given from the start of the fourth game.

In the fourth game, it is assumed that the condition device number 10 is internally won at the start of the game. FIG. 70 shows that the condition device number 10 was internally elected in the fifth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, specialization-related processing (step S1113 in FIG. 18, FIG. 24 (b)) is executed at the start of the game. FIG. 71 (s1) shows the state of the array after the specialization-related processing has been performed.

Further, at the start of the game, the instruction information setting process (steps S1121 and 28 in FIG. 18) is executed. Here, since the game state is the special zone and the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won, half navigation is set as instruction information. Specifically, out of the correct pressing order of the internally elected condition device 10, information indicating only the stop button (here, the middle stop button 138) that is the target of the first stop is set as instruction information.

The sequence information and instruction information described above are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as an internal winning command (step S1041 in FIG. 16). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, an operation navigation indicating only the middle first stop is set (step S3005 in FIG. 42), and the display based on the privilege type array and the number of games scheduled to be added is executed (step S3005 in FIG. 42). Yes) in step S3411 of FIG. 46 (b). However, since the value is not stored in the array of the number of games to be added [0] (it is not set in the case of the privilege type "H", there is no addition), this game is based on the array of the number of games to be added [0]. No display is made. In FIG. 71 (s2), it is shown that the characters "? 1?" Are displayed in a state surrounded by a frame as an operation navigation indicating only the left first stop in the lower part of the screen. Further, it is shown that the image of the "princess" corresponding to the privilege type "H" stored in the privilege type array [0] is displayed on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "A" stored in the privilege type array [1] and the character "5G" corresponding to 5 stored in the number of games to be added array [1] are framed. It is shown that it is displayed in the upper right of the screen in a state surrounded by. Of the displays shown in FIG. 71 (s2), the content (privilege type array [0]) displayed on the left side of the screen indicates the type of privilege and the number of games to be added in the game, and is in the upper right frame of the screen. The contents displayed in (the privilege type array [1], the number of games to be added [1]) indicate the types of benefits and the number of games to be added in the next game.

In this fourth game, it is assumed that the game can be operated in the order of pressing the correct answers, and the small winning combination 6 is won and 8 cards are paid out. FIG. 70 shows that eight cards were paid out in the fourth game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, the special update process (steps S1A13 and 37 in FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game. Here, since the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is "H" and the small winning combination 6 is won, the life value is added by 1 (step S1E25 in FIG. 37). FIG. 70 shows that the life value is added by 1 to become 2 in the fourth game.

Information on the payout and the number of remaining AT games described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a game state update command (step S1A27 in FIG. 29). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, a life recovery effect is set in the specialized effect update process (step S3B03 in FIG. 51). In FIG. 71 (t2), it is shown that the smiling “princess” character is displayed on the left side of the screen due to the life recovery effect. Further, in FIG. 71 (u2), the image on the left side of the screen displayed in FIG. 71 (t2) is erased, and the characters “acquisition 175G” indicating the value of the number of remaining AT games at the present time and the characters after addition are added. It is shown that the characters indicating the life value are displayed on the right side of the screen. Note that FIGS. 71 (t1) and 71 (u1) show the state of the array when FIGS. 71 (t2) and (u2) are displayed, respectively, and the state of the array here is shown in FIG. 71 (s1). ) Is the same as the state shown.

In the example of FIG. 70, it is shown that the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] in the ninth game is "L". This privilege type is the privilege type set in the last game of the scenario, and 200 AT remaining games are added regardless of the result of the game, and the special zone ends (Yes in step S1E01 in FIG. 37). .. FIG. 70 shows that the number of remaining AT games is 200 in the ninth game, and the special zone shifts to the AT state.

[Operation example in specialized zone (3)]
Hereinafter, an example of the operation when the effect mode A is selected will be described with reference to the examples of FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing an example in the specialized zone. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of operation according to the timing chart shown in FIG. 72. Here, the explanation will be given from the start of the second game.

In the second game, it is assumed that the condition device number 5 is internally won at the start of the game. FIG. 72 shows that the condition device number 5 was internally won in the second game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, specialization-related processing (step S1113 in FIG. 18, FIG. 24 (b)) is executed at the start of the game. FIG. 73 (v1) shows the state of the array after the specialization-related processing has been performed.

Further, at the start of the game, the instruction information setting process (steps S1121 and 28 in FIG. 18) is executed, but since the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is not internally won here, the instruction information is input. Not set (No in step S1513 of FIG. 28).

The sequence information described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as an internal winning command (step S1041 in FIG. 16). Upon receiving this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the display based on the privilege type array and the number of games to be added (Yes in step S3411 of FIG. 46 (b)). In FIG. 73 (v2), the image of the “bomb” corresponding to the privilege type “X” stored in the privilege type array [0] and the 10 stored in the planned number of games array [0] to be added on the image are supported. It is shown that the character "10G" is displayed on the left side of the screen. Furthermore, the image of the "treasure box" corresponding to the privilege type "A" stored in the privilege type array [1] and the character "5G" corresponding to 5 stored in the number of games to be added array [1] are framed. It is shown that it is displayed in the upper right of the screen in a state surrounded by. Of the displays shown in FIG. 73 (v2), the contents displayed on the left side of the screen (privilege type array [0], number of games to be added [0]) indicate the types of benefits and the number of games to be added in the game. The contents displayed in the upper right frame of the screen (privilege type arrangement [1], number of games to be added [1]) indicate the type of privilege and the number of games to be added in the next game.

In this second game, it is assumed that neither the small winning combination 1 nor the small winning combination 2 is won. FIG. 72 shows that there is no payout (0 cards) in the second game. Further, since the game state is the special zone, the special update process (steps S1A13 and 37 in FIG. 29) is executed at the end of the game. Here, the value stored in the number of games to be added array [0] is added to the number of remaining AT games (step S1E07 in FIG. 37). FIG. 72 shows that the number of remaining AT games in the second game is added to be 70. Further, since the hair strip device number 5 is internally won, the privilege type promotion lottery is executed (step S1E31 in FIG. 37). Here, it is assumed that the privilege type "A" stored in the privilege type array [4] is changed to the privilege type "B" by this lottery. FIG. 73 (w1) shows the state of the array after this change. In addition, in FIG. 72, it is shown that the privilege type stored in the privilege type arrangement [0] of the sixth game is "B" based on the result of the privilege type promotion lottery.

Information on the payout and the number of remaining AT games described above is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a game state update command (step S1A27 in FIG. 29). In the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this information, the additional effect is set by the specialized effect update process (step S3B07, step S3B15 in FIG. 51). In FIG. 73 (w2), the image on the left side of the screen is erased by the additional effect, and the “acquisition” indicating the value of the number of remaining AT games at the present time is shown.

It is shown that the characters "70G" and the characters indicating the life value are displayed on the right side of the screen. In the special effect update process, the privilege type promotion effect may be set based on the result of the privilege type promotion lottery (step S3B15 in FIG. 51). However, in this effect mode A, since the image corresponding to the privilege type array [4] is not displayed, the privilege type promotion effect is not set here. FIG. 73 (x2) shows a state after the effects at the end of the second game have been executed. In addition, unlike the present embodiment, when the configuration in which the privilege type of the privilege type array [1] is changed is adopted, the image displayed in the upper right frame of the screen is changed according to the changed content. May occur. Note that FIG. 73 (x1) shows the state of the array when FIG. 73 (x2) is displayed, but the state of the array here is the same as the state shown in FIG. 73 (w1). is there.

In the example of FIG. 72, it is shown that the life value becomes 0 in the ninth game. When the life value becomes 0, the special zone ends even in the middle of the scenario (Yes in step S1E45 in FIG. 37). FIG. 72 shows the transition from the specialized zone to the AT state in the ninth game. For the specialized zone, the minimum guaranteed number of AT remaining games may be set. For example, if 50 is set as the minimum guaranteed number, the life value will not be 0 (not subtracted from 1) until the number of AT remaining games exceeds this minimum guaranteed number, and it will be specialized as it is. The zone may be continuous.

[Operation example in specialized zone (4)]
In [Operation example in the special zone (1)] to [Operation example in the special zone (3)], the operation when the effect mode A is selected has been described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. Hereinafter, the operation when the effect mode B is selected will be described again using these drawings. Since the operation of the main control unit 300 is the same in both the effect mode A and the effect mode B, the difference in the effect to be executed will be described below.

When the effect mode A is selected, the type of privilege and the number of games to be added (the privilege type array [0], the number of games to be added [0]) in the game are displayed on the left side of the screen at the start of the game. .. On the other hand, when the effect mode B is selected, the type of privilege in the game is displayed on the left side of the screen at the start of the game, but the number of games to be added is not displayed (step S3417 in FIG. 46). ..

When the production mode A is selected, the type of privilege in the next game and the number of games to be added (the privilege type array [1], the number of games to be added [1]) are displayed in the upper right frame of the screen at the start of the game. It is displayed in. On the other hand, when the production mode B is selected, the number of games to be added is not displayed, but not only the next game but also the types of benefits up to 5 games ahead are displayed in the upper right frame of the screen at the start of the game. Is displayed in (step S3419 in FIG. 46).

64 (c3), 65 (f3), 66 (h3), 67 (k3), 68 (n3), 69 (p3), 71 (s3), 73 (v3). Same as FIG. 64 (c2), FIG. 65 (f2), FIG. 66 (h2), FIG. 67 (k2), FIG. 68 (n2), FIG. 69 (p2), FIG. 71 (s2), and FIG. 73 (v2), respectively. An example is shown when the production mode B is selected in the situation, and the number of additional games scheduled to be added when the production mode A is selected is when the production mode B is selected. It is shown that it is not displayed. Further, the number of images corresponding to the privilege types in the next game and thereafter is only one when the effect mode A is selected, whereas it is increased to five when the effect mode B is selected. It has become.

Further, the images used at this time are four types (step S3413 and step S3415 in FIG. 46) when the effect mode A is selected, whereas six types (step S3413 and step S3415 in FIG. 46) are used when the effect mode B is selected. It is step S3417 and step S3419) in FIG.

In addition, when the privilege type stored in the privilege type arrangements [2] to [6] is changed by the privilege type promotion lottery in the special zone (step S1E31 in FIG. 37), when the effect mode A is selected. Does not execute the privilege type promotion effect (since the corresponding image is not displayed, FIG. 73 (x2)), but when the effect mode B is selected, the privilege type promotion effect is executed. In FIG. 73 (x3), when the effect mode B is selected, the image corresponding to the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [4] is changed from "Yoshimune" to "Grandfather" by the privilege type promotion effect. It is shown that it has been updated to.

[Regarding the configuration of specialized zones (1)]
In the special zone, one of a plurality of types of privilege types is set based on the scenario (the privilege type stored in the privilege type array [0] is used in the game), and various results are obtained according to this privilege type. Is configured to obtain (see FIG. 27 (b)). It should be noted that these privilege types can be grasped to some extent by the corresponding images (FIGS. 62 to 73). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

First, in the games in which the privilege types "A", "B", and "C" are set, the number of remaining AT games is added (third and sixth games in FIG. 62). However, the number of remaining AT games will not be added if the player wins the game internally or if the player wins the push order bell (conditional device numbers 8 to 13) internally and wins one card (the fourth game in FIG. 62, 7th game).

In the game in which the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Z" are set, the number of remaining AT games is added and the life is deducted by 1 (fifth game in FIG. 62). However, if the player wins the game internally or if the player wins the push order bell (conditional device numbers 8 to 13) and wins one card, the number of remaining AT games is not added and the life is not subtracted (Fig.). 62, 8th game). Further, when the condition device numbers 5 to 7 are internally won, the number of remaining AT games is added and the life is not subtracted (second game in FIG. 72).

In a game in which the privilege type "H" is set, 1 is added for a life value of less than 3, and 10 AT remaining games are added if the life value is 3 (4th game in FIG. 70). .. However, these additions are not executed when the player wins the game internally or when the player wins the push order bell (conditional device numbers 8 to 13) and wins one card (the fourth game in FIG. 72).

In the game in which the privilege type "L" is set (the last game in the scenario), 200 AT remaining games are added regardless of the result of the internal winning or the winning combination (9th game in FIG. 70).

Life values are set in the special zone (initial value 3, maximum value 3), and when this life value reaches 0, the special zone ends even if the scenario is in the middle (9 games in FIG. 72). Eye). If the special zone ends in the middle of the scenario, you will not be able to receive benefits such as the number of remaining AT games that can be obtained in the remaining scenarios and the number of remaining AT games that can be obtained in games for which the privilege type "L" is set. become. That is, even if there is an opportunity to add the number of remaining AT games in the game, it is possible to secure an opportunity to acquire the remaining number of AT games by avoiding the decrease in life without acquiring this. It may be advantageous for the player (a state in which profits can be easily obtained), and even if the payout in the game is reduced, it may be desired to be in a state in which profits can be easily obtained.

In the present embodiment, when the internal winning is performed in addition to the push order bell, the same result is obtained regardless of the stop operation for the addition of the number of remaining AT games and the increase / decrease of the life. On the other hand, if the push order bell is internally won, there are cases where one card is won or not, depending on whether or not the player wins this one card, and the number of remaining AT games is added or the life is increased or decreased. Will give different results. First, if the privilege types are "A", "B", and "C", the number of remaining AT games will be added if you do not win a single role (6 small wins or loss), but if you win a single role, The number of AT remaining games is not added. Therefore, in this case, it can be said that the former (non-winning for one piece) is in a state where it is easier to acquire the game medium, and is advantageous to the player except for the payout. On the other hand, when the privilege types are "X", "Y", and "Z", if one player does not win a prize (6 small wins or loses), the number of remaining AT games is added, but the life is subtracted by 1. It is possible to avoid that the life is subtracted although the number of remaining AT games is not added when the winning combination is won. Therefore, in this case, it can be said that the latter (winning one piece) is in a state where it is easier to acquire the game medium, and is advantageous to the player except for the payout.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ease of acquiring the game medium based on the two types of stopping modes (one-card winning combination and one-card winning non-winning) is the first state (privilege types are "A", "B", and "C". ”) And the second state (when the privilege type is“ X ”,“ Y ”,“ Z ”), the condition device is provided. Then, in addition to this configuration, an effect that can determine whether it is the first state or the second state (display of an image corresponding to the privilege type) and a condition device from which the above two types of stop modes are derived are derived. We have adopted a configuration in which an effect (half navigation) indicating that the image is present is executed. In this configuration, depending on the operation of the player, even if the game result (stop mode) is the same, it is in the first state (privilege type "A" "B" "C") or in the second state (privilege type). Since the ease of acquiring the game medium changes depending on whether it is "X", "Y", or "Z"), it is possible to expand the range of the game, such as improving the interest of the game at the time of the stop operation. it can. In determining the stop mode, the stopped symbol may be determined, or the stop mode may be determined in the push order.

In the present embodiment, a push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is used as a condition device in which the ease of acquiring the game medium based on the two types of stop modes is reversed, but the push order combination is limited to these. Instead, the lottery result may be such that two or more types of stop modes can be derived based on operation conditions such as the timing of the stop operation and the push order. As a result of such a lottery, for example, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to win a specific role (bell, replay) by pushing order, or a role (bell, replay, cherry, watermelon, etc.) by so-called pushing. ) May be awarded, and further, the winning combination may not be won (loss), and at least two types of stopping modes may be derived depending on the operating conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ease of acquiring the game medium based on the two types of stop modes (one-card combination winning and non-winning) is the state in which the privilege types "A", "B", and "C" are set and the privilege. The configuration that differs (reverses) from the state in which the types "X", "Y", and "Z" are set has been described, but it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the ease of acquiring the game medium based on the stop mode is reversed depending on the state. For example, there is no limitation on whether or not there is a payout for these suspension modes. If there is a payout in at least one of the two types of stop modes, it is possible to obtain not only enjoyment depending on the presence or absence of payout and the amount of payout, but also enjoyment due to the difference in the ease of acquiring the game medium based on the stop mode. it can. In addition, if there is no payout in either of the two types of stop modes (for example, when a replay or loss is internally won), it is predicted how the ease of acquiring the game medium will change based on the stop mode. You can get fun such as. Further, in the present embodiment, even if the privilege type "X", "Y", "Z" is set and the internal winning is lost, it is possible to avoid the decrease in life, and the privilege types "X", "Y" Compared to the case where the life is reduced without winning a single winning combination in the state where "Z" is set, it becomes easier to acquire the game medium. It is not necessary to adopt this configuration, but if it is adopted as in the present embodiment, it may be possible to avoid a more disadvantageous state for the player even if the player wins the game internally. It is possible to make it difficult to diminish the interest of. If the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Z" are set and the player wins the game internally to avoid a decrease in life, the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Z" are set. It may be configured to execute the same effect (see FIG. 69) as in the case of winning a single winning combination in the state.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the half-navigation is executed when the push order is internally won, but the lottery result is not limited to the production like this half-navigation, and two or more types of stop modes can be derived. Any configuration may be used as long as some effect (for example, display of the corresponding image, output of the corresponding sound) is executed when the result is derived. When this configuration is adopted, it is possible to grasp that the above-mentioned lottery result has been derived by the effect, and it can be expected that the stop mode will be more advantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, when the condition device (condition device numbers 8 to 13) in which the ease of acquiring the game medium based on the two types of stop modes is reversed between the first state and the second state is internally won. Only in this case, we have adopted a configuration that executes an effect (half navigation) indicating that these condition devices have been internally elected. However, this configuration is an example, and when a predetermined group including a condition device in which the ease of acquiring the game medium is reversed is internally elected to the condition device belonging to this predetermined group, the predetermined group is assigned. Any configuration may be used as long as the effect indicating that the conditional device to which the device belongs has been internally elected (hereinafter, group effect) is executed before the stop operation becomes effective. In this configuration, by executing the group effect, it can be expected that the condition device in which the ease of acquiring the game medium is reversed is internally won, and that the stop mode is more advantageous. In this embodiment, the predetermined group is composed only of a condition device in which the ease of acquiring the game medium is reversed, and the half navigation corresponds to an example of the group production. However, not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, a predetermined group may include a conditional device in which the ease of acquiring the game medium is not reversed. Here, as for the condition device in which the ease of acquiring the game medium is not reversed, any result may be obtained regardless of the stop mode and the operation condition, and even if the condition device does not win a prize (loss). Good. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

For example, in the present embodiment, all push order bells (condition device numbers 8 to 13) are used as condition devices in which the ease of acquiring the game medium is reversed, but one of the push order bells (for example, condition). Only the device number 8) may be used as a conditional device in which the ease of acquiring the game medium is reversed. In this configuration, all push order bells (condition device numbers 8 to 13) correspond to an example of a predetermined group, and half navigation corresponds to an example of a group effect, which is common to the present embodiment, but is divided into a predetermined group. The difference is that a condition device (for example, condition device numbers 9 to 13) that does not reverse the ease of acquiring the game medium is included. In this configuration, the phenomenon that the ease of acquiring the game medium is reversed occurs only in a part of the game in which the half-navigation is executed (internal winning in the condition device number 8), but the acquisition of the game medium by executing the half-navigation Since it is possible to know the possibility of a phenomenon in which the ease is reversed, the player can be expected to have a better stopping mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, all the conditional devices belonging to a predetermined group can win a prize of the same type of combination (conditional device numbers 8 to 13 can win a bell and a single combination). The condition devices belonging to the group of the above may include condition devices capable of winning different types of combinations. For example, a predetermined group is composed of condition device numbers 5 to 8, and a group effect is executed to display a “?” Indicates that the condition device belonging to the predetermined group has been internally elected, and the condition device number 8 is displayed. The ease of acquiring the game medium may be reversed based on the success or failure of the winning of the one-card combination when the player is internally elected.

If only one of the condition devices belonging to the predetermined group has the ease of acquiring the game medium reversed, it is assumed that the condition device is internally elected when the group effect is executed. There is a possibility that the stop operation will be performed on the assumption. In this case, although there is a risk that the payout will decrease if the condition device that does not reverse the ease of acquiring the game medium is internally won, it may be easy to make the game medium easy to acquire. , There is a risk that the interest of the game will decline. For this reason, two or more condition devices for which the ease of acquiring the game medium is reversed are provided, and the operating conditions for facilitating the acquisition of the game medium for one condition device and the game medium for the other condition device are acquired. It is preferable that the operating conditions are not the same (at least a part of them does not overlap).

Further, in the present embodiment, the ease of acquiring the game medium based on the two types of stopping modes (one-card winning combination and one-card winning non-winning) is the first state (privilege types are "A", "B", and "" It is configured to reverse between the second state (when the privilege type is "X", "Y", and "Z") (when it is "C"), but it is not the stop mode as in this example, but two. The ease of acquiring the game medium based on the derivation of the lottery results of the types may be reversed between the first state and the second state.

[Regarding the configuration of specialized zones (2)]
In the present embodiment, when the zone shifts to the special zone, the effect mode selection effect is executed, and either the effect mode A or the effect mode B can be selected. In the effect mode A, the image corresponding to the privilege type in the game and the next game and the number of games to be added are displayed. On the other hand, in the effect mode B, the number of games scheduled to be added is not displayed, but the images corresponding to the privilege types are displayed not only for the game and the next game but also for up to 5 games ahead. In this way, since the amount of information that can be seen and the range thereof are different for each production mode, there is a wide range of ways to enjoy the game. In this embodiment, the information of 2 games is displayed in the effect mode A, and the information of 6 games is displayed in the effect mode B. For example, the information of 1 game (only the game concerned) is displayed in the effect mode A. If the number of games is different, the configuration is not limited to the above configuration. Further, the amount of information to be displayed is not limited to the present embodiment, and the amount of information per game may be large when the number of displayed games is small. In executing these effects, the privilege type array and the number of games to be added are used. The configuration of these arrays is an example, and its size can be appropriately changed depending on whether or not it is used for the production. In addition, the timing of shifting the privilege type arrangement and the arrangement of the number of games to be added, and the timing of the lottery for the number of games to be added can be appropriately adjusted. In this embodiment, the information to be displayed is different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, but by holding the minimum necessary information and performing the display based on the information, the main capacity is ensured while ensuring the ease of understanding of the game. Can be reduced.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which information about the addition of the number of remaining AT games is displayed using two production modes, but a configuration in which information is displayed using the two production modes is adopted. Can be applied to configurations that display information about benefits for the player. Such information may be information about benefits such as transition to an advantageous state or a longer period of the advantageous state that has already been set, or information such as a game table setting value or an internal gaming state. It may be information about the game console. Furthermore, for example, when an environment for each user is provided on the game console, image data or music data for customization thereof, or images that can be downloaded on a mobile terminal owned by the player, etc. It may be information about benefits that are not related to the game, such as information about music. Further, these combinations may be used.

[Regarding the configuration of specialized zones (3)]
In this embodiment, in the CZ or AT state, full navigation is set when the push order bell is internally won. Then, by following this full navigation, the player can surely win the small winning combination 6, and the maximum number of sheets that can be obtained can be obtained. On the other hand, in the specialized zone, the frequency of internally winning the push order bell does not change compared to the CZ and AT states, but the difference is that half navigation is set instead of full navigation. In this half navigation, only the first stop is displayed in the correct push order, so the probability that the player operates in the correct push order and wins the small winning combination 6 is 50%. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

When the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won and the half navigation is followed, one of the two stop buttons except the stop button for which the first stop operation is performed matches the correct operation order. That is, with a 50% probability, the first to third stop operations match the correct operation order and win a small winning combination 6 (8 cards are paid out), and with a 50% probability, only the first stop operation is the correct operation order. Match with and win one piece.

If the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) is internally won and the half navigation is not followed, either two of the internally won one-card combinations will be tempai until the first stop operation and the second stop operation. To do. Then, if the timing of the third stop operation is the timing at which the symbol (any two of Seven 1, Seven 2, Blank 1, and Blank 2) corresponding to the tempered single-card combination can be pulled in, the single-card combination is won. However, if the timing is other than that, it will be lost. In this case, there is a 50% chance of winning a single card and a 50% chance of losing.

That is, in the specialized zone, although the profit per game is smaller than that in the CZ or AT state, the player can obtain more profit than in the state where the operation condition is not notified (acquired more than the game medium used). There are many game media).

Here, unlike the present embodiment, it is assumed that a configuration is adopted in which the ball ejection is suppressed by providing a section between the AT state and the AT state in which the stop operation is not notified. However, in this configuration, there arises a problem that the interest of the game is diminished because the stop operation is not notified. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a special zone may be provided between the AT state and the AT state, but in this special zone, more profits can be obtained than in the state without notification of the operating condition. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from diminishing while suppressing the ball output.

In addition, if the period in which the payout is suppressed becomes long, the player may get bored, but in the specialized zone of this embodiment, the number of remaining AT games is added, and the number of remaining AT games is added at the end of the scenario. By adopting a configuration in which 200 is added, the number of AT remaining games increases as the specialized zone becomes longer, and the average value of the AT remaining games added in one game may become larger. In addition, comparing the frequency of addition of the number of remaining AT games in the game that was internally won in the push order bell, it can be said that the special zone is higher than the AT state (additional value of 0.5% in the AT state (additional value of 0.5% in the AT state). In FIG. 25 (a)), in the special zone, the privilege types "A" to "C" and "X" to "Z" are added without winning a single role (FIG. 27). It should be noted that the number of remaining AT games may not be added in the game in which the push order bell is internally won in the AT state. Further, regardless of whether or not the game is internally won in the push order bell, the number of remaining AT games may be added more frequently in the specialized zone than in the AT state.

In the configuration of the present embodiment, the longer the specialized zone, the longer the AT state to be transferred later will continue, and as a result, more profits can be obtained. In addition, it is possible to suppress ball ejection without giving a bad impression to the player. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 74.

In FIGS. 74 (a1) and 74 (a2), an example of the transition of profit when the AT state is a net increase of 3 sheets and the special zone is a net increase of 1.5 sheets is shown by a solid line. Further, as a comparison target, an example of the transition of profit when the AT state continues is shown by a broken line.

In the example of FIG. 74 (a1), it is shown that the ball ejection is suppressed as compared with the case where the AT state continues (broken line). Further, in this specialized zone, profits can be obtained even though it is less than the AT state, and the number of remaining AT games can be obtained, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the interest of the game to decline.

In the example of FIG. 74 (a2) as well as in FIG. 74 (a1), it is shown that the ball ejection is suppressed as compared with the case where the AT state continues (broken line). Further, the special zone (the period during which the ball ejection is suppressed is longer than that in the AT state) is longer than that in FIG. 74 (a1). In contrast to the period in which the second AT state is set in FIG. 74 (a1), the special zone continues in FIG. 74 (a2), and the net increase in the number of sheets is smaller than that in FIG. 74 (a1) during this period. It is shown that However, in FIG. 74 (a2), while the period during which the payout is suppressed becomes longer, a larger number of remaining AT games can be obtained, so that the period during which the second AT state is set is shown in FIG. 74. It will be longer than (a1), and as a result, more profit can be obtained. In this way, even if the period for suppressing the payout is extended, it is possible to make it difficult for the interest of the game to decline.

In the AT state (AT (1) and AT (2) in FIG. 74), there may be a configuration in which an additional lottery or the like is not performed, or a configuration in which benefits that facilitate profits are more difficult to obtain than in the specialized zone. .. In this configuration, it may be possible to manage the length of the AT state by using the period for suppressing the ball ejection.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the ball ejection is suppressed while notifying the operating conditions in the specialized zone, but the operating conditions may not be notified in this specialized zone. FIGS. 74 (b1) and 74 (b2) show an example of the transition of profit in the example of FIGS. 74 (a1) and 74 (a2) when the ball is output in the same manner as in the normal state without notifying the operating conditions in the special zone. It is shown. As in FIGS. 74 (a1) and 74 (a2), an example of the transition of profit when the AT state continues as a comparison target is shown by a broken line.

In the example of FIGS. 74 (b1) and 74 (b2), since the operation condition is not notified in the special zone, the profit is reduced as compared with the case of FIGS. 74 (a1) and 74 (a2) (for example, 1). (2 cards are reduced per game, etc.), so it is possible to prevent the situation where too many balls are thrown out. However, depending on the length of the special zone, the player may fall into a state of loss (Fig. 74 (b2)), so the AT remaining game will surely turn positive in the second AT state. It is preferable to get a number. For example, there is a configuration in which the amount of increase in the number of remaining AT games and the acquisition probability are increased according to the length of the specialized zone.

In the present embodiment, the half-navigation state is set between the AT state and the AT state. However, for example, the half-navigation state may be changed without fail after the end of the AT state. .. Even with this configuration, it may be possible to suppress ball ejection. Further, the half navigation may be in the state (preparation period) before the transition to the AT state (or ART), the bonus internal winning state, the CZ, etc., and is not limited to the specialized zone.

On the other hand, the special zone is not limited to a configuration in which only half navigation is executed, and may be a configuration in which, for example, full navigation can be executed but the execution frequency is reduced. As such a configuration, the presence or absence of execution may be determined by lottery, or the full navigation may be executed every time the number of games or the number of internal winnings of the target combination of the full navigation reaches a certain number of times. Further, the configuration may be such that both the case where the half navigation is executed and the case where the full navigation is executed exist.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one of the left middle right, left and right middle, middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left is the correct operation order, the first of the correct operation orders. By displaying only the stop operation (half navigation), there are two options (two options). As another configuration, the operation order is not shown until the first stop operation is performed (for example, "???"), and when the first stop operation matches the correct operation order, the remaining correct operation order is obtained. By displaying, the configuration may be such that there are three options (three options). Further, by displaying two candidates for the first stop operation, one that matches the operation order of the correct answer and one that does not, the configuration may be such that there are four options (four options). Further, by not showing the correct operation order until all the reels are stopped (for example, "???"), there may be a configuration in which there are six options (six options). However, it is preferable that some kind of notification (for example, display of a corresponding image, output of a corresponding voice) is performed so that it can be grasped that the push order bell is internally won.

In addition, unlike this embodiment, when the privilege type "X" is set and a configuration is adopted in which one player wins a prize if he / she does not follow the half navigation, the decrease in life can be easily avoided. Will end up. For this reason, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a single winning combination is won with a probability of 50% regardless of whether the half navigation is followed or not. Further, in this configuration, even if a half-navigation is missed, an opportunity to add the number of remaining AT games and an opportunity to avoid a decrease in life can be given. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a single winning combination is won with a probability of 50% in both cases where the half navigation is followed and when the half navigation is not followed, but this probability is not limited to 50% and is biased. May be good. In addition, for example, in a game in which the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Z" are set, the life is reduced and a great disadvantage is obtained unless a single winning combination is won. Therefore, the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Y" are set. Only in the case of "Z", even if the half-navigation is not followed, it may be possible to win a prize in one piece.

In this embodiment, the number of remaining AT games is added during the period when the number of balls is suppressed, but in order not to diminish the interest of the game during the period when the number of balls is suppressed. , Any configuration may be used as long as some benefits can be obtained during the period when the ball is suppressed. Such a privilege may be, for example, a privilege such as shifting to an advantageous state or a longer period of the advantageous state already set, or a game table such as a game table setting value or an internal game state. It may be a privilege to obtain information. Furthermore, for example, when an environment for each user is provided on the game console, image data or music data for customization thereof, or images that can be downloaded on a mobile terminal owned by the player, etc. It may be a privilege that has nothing to do with the game, such as information such as music. Further, these combinations may be used.

[Regarding the configuration of specialized zones (4)]
In the special zone, one of a plurality of types of benefits is set based on the scenario. In this scenario, a plurality of scenarios having different average values (or expected values) of the number of remaining AT games that can be acquired are prepared (FIG. 27 (a)). Here, in the privilege type shown in FIG. 27A, if the production mode A is selected, it is possible to grasp which scenario is in the third game, and if the production mode B is selected, which is in the first game. You can grasp whether it is a scenario. By setting a common privilege type for a plurality of scenarios from the beginning, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp which scenario while the common privilege type is displayed. In addition, you can enjoy by guessing the scenario and predicting how many AT remaining games can be obtained from the guessed scenario. In the present embodiment, the privilege type is set in the continuous game, but the privilege type may be set by sandwiching the game in which the privilege type is not set (not the continuous game).

In the present embodiment, the privilege type may be set in the privilege type arrangements [1] to [6] when shifting to the special zone, or the privilege type may be set according to the progress of the game. Although a scenario prepared in advance is used when setting the privilege type, a configuration in which a lottery for the privilege type is performed as necessary without using such a scenario may be adopted. When such a structure for performing lottery is adopted, the winning probability of the privilege type may change depending on the situation. For example, when the life value is 1, the winning probability of the privilege type "H" may be increased, or the winning probability of the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Z" may be decreased.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode B is selected, an image is displayed by using one frame (one frame) for one privilege type. For example, the privilege type is adopted. When any two or more of "A", "B", and "C" are continuous, two frames (or more) are used to display a special image of the size corresponding to these areas. You may. As a specific example, when the privilege types after 5 and 6 games are "A" and "C", respectively, the image of "Yoshimune" corresponding to the privilege type "A" after 5 games is not displayed for 2 frames. Only the left half of the special image of the size of is displayed, and the right half of the special image is displayed instead of displaying the image of "princess" corresponding to the next privilege type "C". In this example, although the privilege types "A" and "C" cannot be grasped, any of the privilege types "A", "B", and "C" is 2 when the left half of the special image is displayed. It is possible to make the player understand that one or more consecutive images are continuous. In this case, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation while keeping the number of types of benefits.

[Regarding the configuration of specialized zones (5)]
In the present embodiment, when the condition device numbers 5 to 7 are internally won, any of the privilege type sequences [3] to [6] is promoted. In this embodiment, the number of games to be added is arranged only from [0] to [2], so even if the privilege type arrangements [3] to [6] are updated by promotion, the number of games to be added is the same as the number of games to be added. Inconsistencies (for example, the changed privilege type does not correspond to the previously set number of games to be added) may occur, or the number of games to be added may be drawn again to correct this. There is no need to say. The process of promotion of the privilege type array is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and for example, the priority of promotion may be set for the privilege type arrays [3] to [6]. Further, for example, the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Z" may be promoted to "H" in addition to the privilege types "A", "B", and "C". Further, the promotion lottery may be executed for each game regardless of the condition device that has been internally elected. Furthermore, if the number of AT remaining games acquired is small (for example, if it is below the average for each scenario or if the minimum value of AT remaining games is below this), the life is 1. In the case of, a process of promoting the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Z" may be performed with high probability.

Further, not only the privilege type arrangements [3] to [6] but also the privilege type arrangements [1] to [2] may be subject to promotion. In this configuration, the number of games to be added corresponding to the privilege type targeted for promotion may already be set, so the number of games to be added corresponding to the privilege type after the change may be drawn again. .. For example, in a state where 5 is set as the number of games scheduled to be added corresponding to the privilege type "A", if the game is promoted to the privilege type "B", the number of games scheduled to be added corresponding to the privilege type "B" does not have 5, so a lottery is required again. Therefore, the rate of re-lottery may be reduced by promoting the privilege type for which the corresponding number of scheduled games to be added is set at a lower frequency than the other privilege types. Since the effect mode A displays only the information about the privilege type arrays [0] to [1], the privilege type promotion effect is less frequently executed in the effect mode A. However, since more specific information is displayed in the effect mode A, it is preferable not to change it so much because changing this information may result in misleading the player. Further, the privilege type may be simply promoted with the same probability. In this case, even if the privilege type that is not displayed in the effect mode A is promoted, the privilege type promotion effect is not executed. Therefore, the execution frequency of the privilege type promotion effect is lower than that in the effect mode B.

[About pt high probability mode]
In the present embodiment, the CZ lottery and the AT lottery are executed by acquiring the pt, and it can be said that the high probability mode in which the pt is more easily acquired is advantageous to the player. This high-probability mode is managed using the number of pt high-probability sets and the number of pt high-probability remaining games, but not limited to these parameters, arbitrary conditions are adopted for the start and end of the high-probability mode. can do.

Various configurations can be adopted for the number of pt high-probability sets and the number of pt high-probability remaining games described in the present embodiment. For example, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the pt high-probability set number lottery is executed regardless of whether or not the high-probability mode (pt high-probability flag is on), but in the high-probability mode, pt The high-probability set number lottery may not be executed, and the high-probability mode has more (or less) pt high-probability set number given in the pt high-probability set number lottery than the normal mode. It may be a configuration. Further, the number of pt high probability sets to be given is not limited to the configuration determined by lottery, and may be a configuration in which a fixed value is set.

Further, a configuration is adopted in which 10 pt high-probability remaining games are given when shifting to the state B or when the number of pt high-probability sets is subtracted by 1 (step S1019 in FIG. 16 and step S1259 in FIG. 20). As for this value, not only an arbitrary value can be adopted, but also a configuration in which a different value is set depending on the lottery can be adopted. Further, the configuration may be such that the number of pt high probability sets is given instead of giving the number of pt high probability remaining games when shifting to the state B.

Further, when setting the number of pt high-probability sets and the number of pt high-probability remaining games, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set by lottery, but to the high-probability mode when the state A is changed to the state B. The transition probability of is preferably higher than the transition probability to the high probability mode in the normal mode of the state B. In the present embodiment, when the state A is changed to the state B, the mode is changed to the 100% high probability mode, whereas in the normal mode of the state B, the mode is changed by the lottery based on the conditional device (pt high probability set number is given). Will be). That is, the transition probability (100%) to the high probability mode when transitioning from the state A to the state B is higher than the transition probability (less than 100%) to the high probability mode in the normal mode of the state B. There is.

In addition, a precursory period may be provided when shifting to the high probability mode. Further, in the present embodiment, if the cumulative acquisition pt reaches 1000 when the number of pt high-probability remaining games becomes 0, even if the pt high-probability set number remains, this is discarded and the CZ lottery or The AT lottery is executed, but when not only the number of pt high-probability remaining games but also the number of pt high-probability sets becomes 0 and the cumulative acquisition pt reaches 1000, the CZ lottery or AT lottery May be configured to execute.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, a configuration in which the internal winning probability of the re-game combination does not change is used, but the present embodiment and the modified example can also be applied to a configuration in which a so-called RT is provided. Further, although the present embodiment uses a configuration in which the bonus combination is not provided, the present embodiment and the modified example can be applied to the configuration in which the bonus combination is provided. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 57 to 61, the configuration using the conditional device for winning the replay combination of the conditional device numbers 1 to 4 has been described, but the combination, the conditional device, the symbol combination, and the like to be used are limited to this configuration. It's not a thing.

In the present embodiment, as the limit of the state B, two states are adopted: the state B continues for 1500 games and the net increase from the minimum value exceeds 2400, but this numerical value is predetermined. Anything can be used as long as it is used.

Further, the state B is an example of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and has an end condition (limit) different from the main end condition, but is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. ..

For example, a configuration in which AT (or AR) ends when the number of remaining AT games satisfies the end condition, and a configuration in which the AT (or AR) ends (forced termination) even though the AT (or AR) does not satisfy the above end condition. If adopted, the configuration may be such that automatic settlement or cancellation is executed when the condition for forced termination is satisfied. Further, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which the bonus ends when the number of remaining games satisfies the end condition, and a configuration in which the bonus ends (forced termination) even though the bonus does not satisfy this end condition is adopted. The configuration may be such that automatic settlement or cancellation is executed when the condition for forced termination is satisfied. In this way, when a second gaming state (for example, state B, AT, bonus) that is more advantageous than the first gaming state (for example, state A, non-AT, non-bonus) is provided. In addition, the automatic settlement or the stop may be executed according to the end condition of the second gaming state. In this configuration, the end condition can be grasped by executing automatic settlement or stop.

In the present embodiment, the CZ, AT state, and special zone are adopted as the states in which the operation navigation is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and may be so-called AR or the like. In addition, a configuration is adopted in which the period of the AT state is managed by the number of remaining AT games. It may be adopted.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the flags and variables related to the state B are initialized at the end of the state B (step S1F21 in FIG. 38 (b)). Such information is not limited to the variables used in the present embodiment, and may be configured to determine whether or not to execute automatic settlement and termination using various variables and flags. For example, as a condition for operating the automatic settlement function, when the number of continuous games in the AT state is 200 or more, the number of operation navigations in the AT state is 50 or more, and the acquisition difference from the start to the end of the AT state. When the number of sheets exceeds a certain level, such a thing may be adopted. Further, the timing of determining these conditions is not limited to the configuration of determining at the end of the advantageous section such as the state B, and the corresponding flag is set to on when the above conditions are satisfied, and the advantageous section is determined. It may be configured to execute automatic settlement and stop according to this flag at the end of. When the variables and flags described here are adopted, these variables and flags are initialized at the end of state B.

Further, when the automatic settlement is executed, the signal may be output through the information output circuit 334. This signal may be configured to be output only when the automatic settlement function or the stop function is enabled. In this configuration, the player may be able to grasp that the automatic settlement function and the stop function are enabled. Further, regardless of whether it is valid or invalid, a signal may be output when the execution conditions (= limiter reached) of the automatic settlement function and the stop function are satisfied. In this configuration, it may be possible to know the number of times the player has reached the limiter.

Further, regarding the automatic settlement function, in addition to paying out the stored game medium (medal), the information provided for the stored game may be stored in an external recording medium (storage). Transfer of records of game media being played).

The state of the switch when the power is turned on is used for enabling and disabling the automatic settlement and stop functions. Therefore, for example, if the power is turned off immediately before the limiter is reached, the power is reset to either valid or invalid, and then the power is turned on again to reach the limiter, automatic settlement or stop is executed according to the reset state.

In the present embodiment, a slot machine 100 using a medal (coin) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball (for example, a pachinko ball) is used for playing a game. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

The slot machine is a slot machine that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game machine) or personal computer by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes digitized data corresponding to a medal, and the game medium is input from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). The payout of the game medium includes outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , Such modifications and alterations are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most preferable actions and effects arising from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

<< Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment >>
Hereinafter, the configurations of the invention described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.
In the above explanation,

A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, and
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and
An internal lottery means (for example, main control unit 300) that derives one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more combinations or misses.
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, the stop control means (for example, stop control means) that stops the reels corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. Main control unit 300) and
A payout control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that controls payout of the game medium according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means.
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, an effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420), and
A game control means (for example, main control unit 300) that can control the progress of the game and change the ease of acquiring the game medium, and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means has a first state (for example, privilege types "A", "B", "C") or a second state different from the first state (for example, privilege types "X", "Y", "C"). It is a means that can set either one of "Z").
The plurality of types of lottery results include a plurality of types of lottery results (for example, condition device numbers 8 to 13) belonging to a predetermined group.
The lottery result belonging to the predetermined group includes the first lottery result (for example, condition device number 8).
The stop control means
In the game in which the first lottery result is derived, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated according to the first operation condition (for example, the timing at which the symbol of one card combination can be drawn in the left middle right), the said A plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of small winning combination 6).
In the game in which the first lottery result is derived, the second operation condition is different from the first operation condition (for example, the timing at which the symbol of one reel can be drawn in the left and right). It is a means for stopping the plurality of reels in the second stopping mode (for example, a combination of symbols of one piece) when operated according to the above.
The game control means
In the game in which the first state is set and the first lottery result is derived, the game in the first stop mode is more than the game in the second stop mode. Make the medium easy to acquire (for example, the number of remaining AT games will increase).
In the game in which the second state is set and the first lottery result is derived, the game in the second stop mode is more than the game in the first stop mode. It is a means to make the medium easy to acquire (for example, although the number of AT remaining games is not added, the chance of acquiring the AT remaining games is secured by avoiding the life decrease).
The production means
In the game in which the first state is set, the first effect corresponding to the first state (for example, the display of the image corresponding to the privilege types "A", "B", and "C") is executed.
In the game in which the second state is set, the second effect corresponding to the second state (for example, the display of the image corresponding to the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Z") is executed.
In a game in which a lottery result belonging to the predetermined group is derived, a group effect (for example, half navigation) indicating that the lottery result belonging to the predetermined group has been derived can be executed before the stop operation becomes effective. Means,
A game table characterized by the above is described (see [Regarding the configuration of the specialized zone (1)]).

In addition, the game console described above
The lottery result belonging to the predetermined group includes a second lottery result (for example, condition device number 9) different from the first lottery result.
The stop control means
In the game in which the second lottery result is derived, when the stop button is operated according to the first operation condition (for example, the timing at which the symbol of one card combination can be drawn in the left middle right), the plurality of Reel is stopped in the third stop mode (for example, a combination of symbols of one piece),
In the game in which the second lottery result is derived, when the stop button is operated according to the second operation condition (for example, the timing at which the symbol of one reel can be drawn in the left and right), the plurality of It is a means for stopping the reel in the fourth stopping mode (for example, the symbol combination of the small winning combination 6).
The game control means
In the game in which the first state is set and the second lottery result is derived, the game in the case of the fourth stop mode is more than the case of the game in the case of the third stop mode. Make the medium easy to acquire (for example, the number of remaining AT games will increase).
In the game in which the second state is set and the result of the second lottery is derived, the game in the third stop mode is more than the game in the fourth stop mode. It is a means to make the medium easy to acquire (for example, although the number of AT remaining games is not added, the chance of acquiring the AT remaining games is secured by avoiding the life decrease).
A game table characterized by the above is described (see [Regarding the configuration of the specialized zone (1)]).

In addition, the game console described above
The game control means
A predetermined privilege (for example, the number of remaining AT games) that facilitates acquisition of the game medium when the first state is set and the first stop mode is obtained in the game from which the first lottery result is derived. Addition),
It is a means for granting the predetermined privilege when the second state is set and the first stop mode is obtained in the game from which the first lottery result is derived.
A game table characterized by the above is described (see [Regarding the configuration of the specialized zone (1)]).
In addition, the game console described above
The game control means is a means capable of setting a normal game and a special game (for example, AT state, see FIG. 12) which is more advantageous than the normal game.
The state in which the game medium is easily acquired is a state that is advantageous in the special game.
A game table characterized by the above is described (see [Regarding the configuration of the specialized zone (1)]).

Also, in the above description,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, and
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and
An internal lottery means (for example, main control unit 300) that derives one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more combinations or misses.
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, the stop control means (for example, stop control means) that stops the reels corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. Main control unit 300) and
A payout control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that controls payout of the game medium according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means.
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, an effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420), and
A game control means (for example, main control unit 300) that can control the progress of the game and change the ease of acquiring the game medium, and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means has a first state (for example, privilege types "A", "B", "C") or a second state different from the first state (for example, privilege types "X", "Y", "C"). It is a means that can set either one of "Z").
The plurality of types of lottery results include a first lottery result and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result.
The game control means
In the game in which the first state is set, when the first lottery result is derived, the game medium is made easier to obtain than when the second lottery result is derived.
In the game in which the second state is set, when the second lottery result is derived, it is a means for making the game medium more easily acquired than when the first lottery result is derived. Yes,
The production means
In the game in which the first state is set, the first effect corresponding to the first state (for example, the display of the image corresponding to the privilege types "A", "B", and "C") is executed.
In a game in which the second state is set, a means for executing a second effect corresponding to the second state (for example, displaying an image corresponding to the privilege types "X", "Y", and "Z"). Is,
A game table, characterized by the above, is described (see the modified example described in the last paragraph of [About the configuration of the specialized zone (1)]).

<Direction mode of ED production>
Next, the production mode of the ED effect will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the ED effect in chronological order.

The effect executed in the ED state is mainly composed of an ED notification effect (in the present specification, it may be simply referred to as "ED notification") and an ED effect. Needless to say, in the ED state, other effects (for example, small role announcement effect, button effect, etc.) may be executed.

The ED notification is an effect of notifying (suggesting) that the gaming state shifts to the ED state. The mode of producing the ED notification is not particularly limited, but in this example, either the ED notification 1 shown in FIG. 75 (1) or the ED notification 2 shown in FIG. 75 (2) is executed. The ED notification 1 shown in FIG. 75 (1) is an effect including a character image of Yoshimune and a character display of "ED!" For notifying (suggesting) the transition to the ED state, and the ED notification shown in FIG. 2 is a production including a character image of Yoshimune and a character display of "celebration ED!" That announces (suggests) the transition to the ED state.

The ED effect is an effect executed in the ED state after the execution of the ED notification. The mode of the ED effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the ED effect 2 shown in FIG. 75 (5) is executed after the execution of the ED effect 1 shown in FIGS. 75 (3) to (4).

The ED effect 1 shown in FIGS. 75 (3) to 75 (4) is a continuous effect executed over a predetermined number of games (9G in this example), and is a scene (scenes 1 to 9 in this example) for each game. Is a production that switches. The ED effect 2 shown in FIG. 5 (5) is an effect that is continued until the end condition of the state B (advantageous section) is satisfied after the end of the ED effect 1, and it is the character image of Yoshimune and the ED state. It is a production that includes the character display of "celebration" to announce (suggest).

The production modes of the ED notification 1 shown in FIG. 75 (1) and the ED notification 2 shown in FIG. 75 (2) may be adopted as a part of the ED production. Further, depending on the content and timing of the ED start condition, only the ED effect 2 shown in FIG. 75 (5) is executed without executing the ED effect 1 shown in FIGS. 75 (3) to (4). You may.

Further, the ED effect 1 may be an effect in which the scenes (scenes 1 to 9) are switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 20 seconds). In this case, the total time of the ED effect 1 is 9 at full weight. It may be the same as the time required for a round trip. Further, the ED effect 1 is not limited to the effect composed of a plurality of scenes, and may be an effect composed of one scene (moving image or still image). In this case, the total of the ED effect 1 The time may be the same as the time required when the game is played 9 times at the fastest, or the ED effect 1 may be completed in the first game in the ED state.

<Additional production>
Next, an example of the additional effect will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the additional effect during normal time during AT in chronological order.

In the slot machine 100, when the game state is the AT state, in the AT-related process (step S1111) described with reference to FIG. 24A, an additional lottery for the number of remaining AT games is executed, and the additional lottery is won. In this case, the number of games added to the number of remaining AT games is added (added).

In this example, the additional lottery is executed in the Nth game in the AT state, and since the additional lottery is won, the number of additional games 200G is added (added) to the number of remaining AT games (400G in this example), and the remaining AT The number of games has increased to 600G.

Subsequently, in the additional effect setting (step S3405) of the effect setting process during AT described with reference to FIG. 46 (a), a plurality of types (8 types in this example) are added with reference to the additional effect set shown in FIG. One set is selected from the effect sets, and the additional effect is executed based on the composition of the effect of the selected additional effect set and the number of G's.

In this example, the set No. Since the additional production set of 7 (production composition = continuous production 4G + notification 1G, number of production G = 5G) was selected, after executing 4G continuous production in N to N + 3 games, 1G notification production in N + 4 games. (Additional notice) is being executed.

Specifically, in the 4G continuous production executed in the N to N + 3 games, as shown in FIG. 76 (1), the production is started from the N game that won the additional lottery, and then the scene is switched for each game. , As shown in FIG. 76 (2), in the final game N + 3 game, the effect suggesting that the number of games was added (added) to the number of remaining AT games (in this example, the character of Yoshimune won the duel). The production including the scene) is being executed. Further, in the 1G notification effect executed in the N + 4 game after the continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (3), the effect of notifying the number of additional games added (in this example, the character display of "+200" is displayed. The production including) is being executed.

In this example, an example of starting continuous production in the N game won in the additional lottery is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the next N + 1 game of the N game won in the additional lottery. You may start continuous production from the game.

<ED production (Example 1)>
Next, the ED effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the ED effect according to the first embodiment in chronological order.

In the slot machine 100, when the game state is the AT state, in the AT-related process (step S1111) described with reference to FIG. 24A, an additional lottery for the number of remaining AT games is executed, and the additional lottery is won. In this case, the number of games added to the number of remaining AT games is added (added).

In this example, the additional lottery is executed in the N + 1 game in the AT state, and since the additional lottery is won, the number of additional games 300G is added (added) to the number of remaining AT games (400G in this example), and the remaining AT games The number has increased to 700G.

Subsequently, in the additional effect setting (step S3405) of the effect setting process during AT described with reference to FIG. 46 (a), a plurality of types (8 types in this example) are added with reference to the additional effect set shown in FIG. One set is selected from the effect sets, and the additional effect is executed based on the composition of the effect of the selected additional effect set and the number of G's.

In this example, the set No. Since the additional effect set of 1 (the composition of the effect = notification 1G, the number of effects G = 1G) is selected, the 1G notification effect (additional notification) is executed in the N + 1 game. In this 1G notification effect, as shown in FIG. 77 (2), an effect of announcing the number of additional games added (in this example, an effect including character display of "+300") is executed.

Subsequently, in the ED state transition determination process (step S1D19) of the update process during AT described with reference to FIG. 36 (a), the sum of the number of games played in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games is calculated. When 700G (game) is exceeded, it is determined that the ED start condition is satisfied, and the game state is set to the ED state.

In this example, since the ED start condition is satisfied in the N + 1 game in the AT state, the game state is set to the ED state.

Subsequently, in the ED effect setting process 1 described with reference to FIG. 48, when the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during AT and the continuous continuous delivery is not set in the additional effect. The ED notification effect of 1G is set, and the ED effect is started from the next game (steps S3513 and S3515 of the ED effect setting process 1).

In this example, since the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during AT and the continuous continuous firing is not set in the additional effect, the 1G ED notification effect is set in the N + 1 game. As shown in FIG. 77 (3), the 1G ED notification effect from the next N + 2 game (in this example, the character image of Yoshimune and the character display "celebration ED!" That announces (suggests) the transition to the ED state are displayed. ED notification including) has started. Further, after the N + 3 game after the ED notification, the ED effect is started as shown in FIG. 77 (4).

According to this example, when continuous continuous firing is not set in the additional production, the 1G ED notification production is performed so that the notification can be made as soon as possible, so that the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, the transition to the ED state can be easily linked to the result of the lottery, which can give the player a sense of conviction.

In addition, in the N + 1 game of this example, when continuous continuous firing is set in the additional effect, the ED notification is not executed until the notification effect (additional notification) of the additional effect is executed, and the ED notification is not executed instead of the additional effect. May be executed. Further, when the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process, the ED notification may be executed at the timing of the additional notification after the continuous production by configuring the additional effect to execute the continuous continuous operation. With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play can be sustained until the ED notification.

<ED production (Example 2)>
Next, the ED effect according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the ED effect according to the second embodiment in chronological order.

In the ED effect according to the first embodiment, an example of executing the 1G notification effect (additional notification) when the additional lottery is won is shown, but in this example, the 1G notification effect (additional notification) is performed when the additional lottery is won. It is configured so that the 1G ED notification effect is executed instead of executing the additional notification).

Specifically, in this example, the additional lottery is executed in the N + 1 game in the AT state, and since the additional lottery is won, the number of additional games 300G is added (added) to the number of remaining AT games (400G in this example). Although the number of AT remaining games has increased to 700G, the 1G notification effect (additional notification) is not executed in the same N + 1 game.

Subsequently, in this example, in the N + 1 game in the AT state, the sum of the number of games played in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games exceeds 700 G (game), and the ED start condition is satisfied. , The game state is set to the ED state.

Subsequently, in this example, since the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during AT and the additional effect is not set, the 1G ED notification effect is set in the N + 1 game. , As shown in FIG. 78 (2), the ED notification effect (in this example, the character image of Yoshimune and the ED notification including the character display of "celebration ED!" That announces (suggests) the transition to the ED state). It has started. Further, after the N + 2 game after the ED notification, the ED effect is started as shown in FIG. 78 (3).

If the additional lottery is won, an additional effect including a continuous effect with a long effect time may be selected. However, in this example, in the N + 1 game, the additional game 300G is confirmed when the start lever 135 is operated. Since the first sub-control unit 400 can grasp that the ED start condition is satisfied and shifts to the ED state, the ED effect is not an additional effect so that the effect mode and the game state (ED state) do not match. Is configured to do.

According to this example, the effect mode and the game state (ED state) can be matched, and the discomfort in the effect can be eliminated. In addition, when the additional effect is not executed, the 1G ED notification effect is immediately performed, so that the player can be given a sense of security.

If the configuration for confirming the additional game is adopted at the time of the third stop instead of the operation of the start lever 135 (for example, in the case of the special zone), the ED notification may be started after the third stop or after the payout. , The ED notification may be started after the button effect or the like is performed. Further, in other embodiments, the ED notification may be performed in the game in which the ED start condition is satisfied, or the ED notification may be performed in the game following the game in which the ED start condition is satisfied. Further, in other embodiments as well, both the additional notification and the ED notification may be performed in the game in which the ED start condition is satisfied.

<ED production (Example 3)>
Next, the ED effect according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the ED effect according to the third embodiment in chronological order.

In the slot machine 100, when the game state is the AT state, in the AT-related process (step S1111) described with reference to FIG. 24A, an additional lottery for the number of remaining AT games is executed, and the additional lottery is won. In this case, the number of games added to the number of remaining AT games is added (added).

In this example, the additional lottery is executed in the N game in the AT state, and since the additional lottery is won, the number of additional games 200G is added (added) to the number of remaining AT games (400G in this example), and the remaining AT games. The number has increased to 600G.

Subsequently, in the additional effect setting (step S3405) of the effect setting process during AT described with reference to FIG. 46 (a), a plurality of types (8 types in this example) are added with reference to the additional effect set shown in FIG. One set is selected from the effect sets, and the additional effect is executed based on the composition of the effect of the selected additional effect set and the number of G's.

In this example, the set No. Since the additional production set of 7 (production configuration = continuous production 4G + notification 1G, number of production G = 5G) is selected, 4G continuous production is executed in the N to N + 3 games. As described with reference to FIG. 76, the set No. When the additional effect set of 7 is selected, normally, the continuous effect of 4G is executed and then the notification effect of 1G (additional notification) is executed. However, in this example, instead of announcing the additional effect. ED notification will be given (details will be described later).

In the 4G continuous production executed in the N to N + 3 games, as shown in FIG. 79 (1), after starting the production from the N game that won the additional lottery, the scene is switched for each game, and FIG. 79 (2) ), In the final game N + 3 game, the production suggesting that the number of games was added (added) to the number of remaining AT games (in this example, the production including the scene where the character of Yoshimune won the duel). To execute.

Subsequently, in this example, the additional lottery is executed in the N + 1 game in the AT state, and since the additional lottery is won, the number of additional games 100G is added (added) to the number of remaining AT games (600G in this example). The number of AT remaining games has increased to 700G.

In the ED state transition determination process (step S1D19) of the update process during AT described with reference to FIG. 36 (a), the sum of the number of games played in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games is 700 G (game). ) Is exceeded, it is determined that the ED start condition is satisfied, and the game state is set to the ED state.

In this example, since the ED start condition is satisfied in the N + 1 game in the AT state, the game state is set to the ED state.

Subsequently, in the ED effect setting process 1 described with reference to FIG. 48, when the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during AT and continuous continuous firing is set in the additional effect. By overwriting the notification effect of the additional effect being set with the effect for ED notification, the ED notification is performed instead of the notification of the additional effect (steps S3509 and S3511 of the ED effect setting process 1).

In this example, since the ED start condition is satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during AT and the continuous continuous firing is set in the additional effect, the ED notification effect of the additional effect being set is announced. By overwriting the effect, as shown in FIG. 79 (3), instead of announcing the additional effect in the N + 4 game, the ED notification effect (in this example, the character image of Yoshimune and the transition to the ED state are performed. ED notification including the character display of "celebration ED!" To announce (suggest). Further, after the N + 5 game after the ED notification, the ED effect is started as shown in FIG. 79 (4).

According to this example, by giving priority to the continuous production during execution, the flow of the continuous production is not interrupted, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the continuous production is executed. Since the ending effect is not suddenly performed inside, it is possible to reduce the upset to the player. In addition, after the ongoing production is continued, the ED notification is performed instead of the additional production notification, so that the notification can be performed in a natural flow without impairing the flow of the running production. Does not give a sense of discomfort or surprise to.

The timing of the ED notification is not limited to this example, and for example, after executing the notification of the additional effect, another continuous effect may be executed, and then the ED notification may be performed. Further, the continuous effect according to the present embodiment is not limited to the continuous effect of the additional effect, and for example, the gaming state changes from the first gaming state (for example, CZ) to the second gaming state (for example, AT). It may be a continuous production suggesting, a continuous production suggesting that AT continues, or the like.

<ED production (Example 4)>
Next, the ED effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the ED effect according to the fourth embodiment in chronological order.

In the ED effect setting process 1 described with reference to FIG. 48, the ED start condition is not satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the AT update process (or the special update process), and the state B end determination process is performed. When it is determined that the number of remaining games in B is 10 G or less, the set effect state (for example, CZ, AT, special zone) or the set effect (for example, continuous additional effect) is determined. Regardless of the production) etc., the interruption production (1G ED notification production) is set, and the ED production is started from the next game. (Steps S3521 and S3523 of ED effect setting process 1).

On the other hand, in the state B end determination process, before it is determined that the number of remaining games in the state B is 10 G or less, the ED start condition in the ED state transition determination process of the AT update process (or specialization update process). If is satisfied, the 1G ED notification effect may be performed after the 4G precursor effect is performed (for example, steps S3517 and S3519 of the ED effect setting process 1).

In this example, in the N game in the AT state, the sum of the number of games played in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games exceeds 700 G (game), and the ED start condition is satisfied. Is set to the ED state, and then, as shown in FIGS. 80 (2) to 80 (3), after performing a 4G precursor effect (continuous effect) in the N + 1 to N + 4 games, as shown in FIG. 80 (4). , N + 5 games, 1G ED notification production. In addition, the precursor effect of this example has the same effect mode as the 4G continuous effect of the additional effect.

According to this example, since the ED notification is performed after the game is excited by continuous production or the like, it may be possible to emphasize that the player has entered the ED state without astonishing the player. In addition, as a continuous production (precursor production) before the announcement of the ED, in order to perform the same production as the continuous production of the additional production, the player is surprised to shift to the ED state while making him think that he has won the additional lottery. Can be done. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a continuous effect (precursor effect) before the ED notification, a dedicated effect different from the continuous effect of the additional effect may be executed.

<ED production (Example 5)>
Next, the ED effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the ED effect according to the fifth embodiment in chronological order.

In the ED effect setting process 1 described with reference to FIG. 48, the ED start condition is not satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the AT update process (or the special update process), and the state B end determination process is performed. When it is determined that the number of remaining games in B is 10 G or less, the set effect state (for example, CZ, AT, special zone) or the set effect (for example, continuous additional effect) is determined. Regardless of the production) etc., the interruption production (1G ED notification production) is set, and the ED production is started from the next game. (Steps S3521 and S3523 of ED effect setting process 1).

In this example, in the N + 1 game in the AT state, it is determined that the number of remaining games in the state B is 10 G or less. Therefore, after setting the game state to the ED state, an interrupt effect (1 G ED notification effect) is performed. After setting and performing a 1G ED notification effect in the next N + 2 game as shown in FIG. 81 (2), the N + 3 to N + 11 games are set and as shown in FIGS. 81 (3) to (4). We are doing ED production.

The ED effect of this example is a continuous effect executed over the same number of games as the number of remaining games in state B (9 games in this example), and all the N + 11 games in which the number of remaining games in state B becomes 0. The scene ends. That is, in this example, since the ED effect composed of the number of scenes (9 scenes in this example) corresponding to the number of remaining games in the state B is executed, the end timing of the state B (advantageous section) and the end of the ED effect are executed. The timing can be matched, and it is possible to provide a natural effect.

In addition, in the case where the ED notification is performed in the game (N + 1 game in this example) in which it is determined that the remaining number of games in the state B is 10 G or less, the end timing of the state B (advantageous section) If you want to match the end timing of the ED effect, you can create an ED effect consisting of the number of scenes (10 scenes in this example) that matches the number of remaining games in state B (10 games of N + 2 to N + 11 games in this example). It may be configured to run.

For example, when the remaining number of games in state B is 10G and you want to execute 10G continuous production and 1G ED notification production, if you delay 1G ED notification production, before executing all 10G continuous production. There is a possibility that the AT state will end, but according to this example, since the ED notification effect is immediately executed, such a situation can be avoided.

<ED production (Example 6)>
Next, the ED effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the ED effect according to the sixth embodiment in chronological order.

In the ED effect setting process 1 described with reference to FIG. 48, the ED start condition is not satisfied in the ED state transition determination process of the AT update process (or the special update process), and the state B end determination process is performed. When it is determined that the number of remaining games in B is 10 G or less, the set effect state (for example, CZ, AT, special zone) or the set effect (for example, continuous additional effect) is determined. The interrupt effect (1G ED notification effect) is set regardless of the effect) and the like, and the ED effect is started from the next game (steps S3521 and S3523 of the ED effect setting process 1).

In this example, in the N + 1 game in the AT state, since it is determined that the number of remaining games in the state B is 10 G or less during the execution of the additional effect (continuous effect), after the game state is set to the ED state. , An interrupt effect (1G ED notification effect) is set, and as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to (3), the additional effect (continuous effect) is interrupted in the next N + 2 game. After stopping the production (continuous production) and performing the 1G ED notification production, the ED production is started from the N + 3 game as shown in FIG. 82 (4).

According to this example, even if the timing of the additional effect and the ED notification overlap, the ED notification effect is executed immediately, so that the AT state ends before all the ED effects are executed. It can be avoided.

<ED production (Example 7)>
Next, the ED effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the ED effect according to the seventh embodiment in chronological order.

In the ED effect setting process 2 described with reference to FIG. 49, when the remaining number of games in the state B is 50 G or less, after setting the 1 G ED notification effect, the ED effect (number of games) is started from the next game of the ED notification. Is set to start (indefinite effect) (steps S3605 and S3607 of ED effect setting process 2).

In this example, in the N + 1 game in the AT state, it is determined that the number of remaining games in the state B is 50 G or less. Therefore, after setting the game state to the ED state, as shown in FIG. 83 (3), After performing the 1G ED notification effect in the next N + 2 game, as shown in FIG. 83 (4), the ED effect (the effect in which the number of games is indefinite) is started from the next N + 3 game. In the ED effect of this example, an effect (dripping image) composed of one scene (moving image or still image) is adopted.

According to this example, when the number of remaining games in the state B is 50 G or less, the player is given a 1 G ED notification effect so that the AT can be notified as soon as possible before the AT ends due to the arrival of the limiter. It can give a sense of security. Further, since the ED effect in which the number of games is indefinite is executed after the ED notification, the ED effect can be ended at the same time when the limiter is reached, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the effect. In addition, in the case of a production in which the scene is switched for each game, it may not be possible to enjoy all the productions depending on the progress time of the game, but in this example, the production is composed of one scene (moving image) as the ED production (moving image). Since such a situation can be avoided by adopting a free-flowing image), the player's willingness to play is not diminished.

Further, according to this example, when the ending effect is started less than the predetermined number of games, the number of games until the advantageous state end condition is satisfied is small, so that the ending effect is immediately started to notify the player. It reassures the player and does not surprise the player because the game does not end suddenly with the limiter.

<ED production (Example 8)>
Next, the ED effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the ED effect according to the eighth embodiment in chronological order.

In the ED effect setting process 2 described with reference to FIG. 49, when the number of remaining games in the state B is more than 50 G, the rare role is internally won, and the number of remaining AT games is added to the lottery, the addition is added. By overwriting the 1G notification production of the production with the ED notification production, the ED notification is performed instead of the 1G notification of the additional production, and the remaining number of games in the state B is 50G or more. Set to start the ED production (50G production) from the next game of the announcement.

In this example, in the N + 1 game in the AT state, the sum of the number of games in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games exceeds 700 G (game), and the ED start condition is satisfied. After setting to the ED state, as shown in FIG. 84 (3), the AT effect being executed is continued, and in the N + 5 game in the ED state, the remaining number of games in the state B is more than 50G, and the role of rare ( In this example, it was determined that the cherry) was internally won and the lottery for adding the number of remaining AT games was won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 84 (4), 1G is replaced with the 1G notification of the additional effect. After performing the ED notification effect of, as shown in FIG. 84 (5), the ED effect (50G effect) is started from the next N + 6 game.

If the player shifts to the ED state with a large number of remaining games in the state B, the AT may proceed with little change in the production, so that the player's willingness to play may decrease. According to this, since it is possible to perform the ED notification production while continuing the AT and specialized production, it is possible to perform various productions and maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, while continuing the ongoing production, the ED notification is performed instead of the additional production notification, so the notification can be performed in a natural flow without impairing the flow of the ongoing production, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. And does not give a surprise.

Further, according to this example, when the number of games to the limiter is more than a predetermined number (50 G in this example), the situation where it is not possible to determine whether the AT state or the ending state is maintained, and the player feels expectation. It is possible to carry out the ending production to the end while embracing.

In this example, an example of performing ED notification instead of the 1G notification of the additional effect is shown, but when the additional effect is composed of the continuous effect and the notification effect, the continuous effect is executed first. An ED notification may be performed instead of the subsequent notification effect of the additional effect.

<ED production (Example 9)>
Next, the ED effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the ED effect according to the ninth embodiment in chronological order.

In the ED effect setting process 1 described with reference to FIG. 48, in the ED state transition determination process of the update process during specialization, the sum of the number of games of each of the CZ, AT, and special zone and the number of remaining AT games is 700 G ( If it is determined that the game) has been exceeded, a 4G precursor effect (specialized effect) is performed, and then a 1G ED notification effect is performed (steps S3517 and S3519 of the ED effect setting process 1).

In this example, in the N + 1 game in the specialized zone, it is determined that the sum of the number of games played in each of the CZ, AT, and specialized zones and the number of remaining AT games exceeds 700 G (game), so the game state is ED. After setting to the state, as shown in FIG. 85 (2), after starting the 4G precursor effect (specialized effect) from the next N + 2 game, as shown in FIG. 85 (3), 1 G in the N + 6 game. ED announcement production is performed. That is, in this example, when the ED start condition is satisfied in the specialized zone, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the ED state, while the first sub-control unit 400 continues the specialized zone. Perform the production as if it were.

Specifically, in the special zone, the icon is displayed based on the privilege type managed by the main control unit 300, but in this example, since the game state shifts to the ED state after the N + 1 game, the main control Information about the privilege type is not transmitted from the unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Therefore, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 selects information on a fake privilege type by lottery or the like, displays an icon based on the information, and produces an effect as if the special zone continues. Run.

Half navigation is adopted in the bell navigation in the special zone, and in the special zone, it is harder for the player to make a profit than in the chance zone, AT state, and ED state, and the net increase in the number of medals decreases, but the main control Since the game state is the ED state in the unit 300, the full navigation is executed in the bell navigation. For this reason, by executing full navigation in the precursory production (specialized production) of 4G, the player may be able to detect the transition to the ED state in advance, and the player will not be half-navigated. There is no disadvantage.

<Invention 1 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the present invention 1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. The indicated reels 110 to 112) are provided, and the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the game result is derived by the stopping mode of the plurality of reels. A game control means (for example, a game control means) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of types of game states in a game table in which one game is completed and a prize can be generated according to the game result. It includes a game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and a game state update process shown in FIG. 29, and an effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4) for controlling the effect by the effect means. The plurality of gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, the state A (non-advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state (for example, FIG. The state B (advantageous section) shown in 12) is included, and the game control means is satisfied with a predetermined condition satisfied by the consumption of a part of the right of the second game state in the second game state. When satisfied (for example, when the AT end condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0, when the number of AT sets becomes 0, acquisition of a game medium from the start to the end of AT). Specialization when the difference number becomes 0, etc.), when the AT is not won in the chance zone shown in FIG. 12, or when the end condition of the state B is satisfied in the normal state (state B) shown in FIG. (When the number of sets of zones becomes 0), the second gaming state is terminated, and even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the second gaming state, the predetermined condition is different from the predetermined condition. Advantageous state end condition (for example, condition regarding the difference number of game media acquired in the second gaming state (advantageous section), amount of rights regarding the acquired second gaming state (advantageous section) (for example, the number of acquired AT games, etc.) Conditions related to the number of acquired AT sets, the number of different numbers that can be acquired, etc.), conditions related to the amount of rights related to the second game state (advantageous section) consumed, conditions related to the number of remaining games in the second game state) are satisfied. (For example, when the number of games played in the second game state reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 G), or when the net increase number of game media in the second game state reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 2400 cards). When the second game letter is reached) When the state is terminated and the ending start condition is satisfied in the second game state (for example, the sum of the number of games played in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games exceeds 700 G (game). In some cases, or when it is determined that the number of remaining games in state B is 10 G or less), the second game state is not ended according to the predetermined condition until the advantageous state end condition is satisfied. It is a means capable of continuing the game state, and the effect control means can execute a predetermined continuous effect (for example, the continuous effect of the additional effect shown in FIG. 47) over a plurality of games, and the second effect. When the ending start condition is satisfied in the game state of, the ending effect (for example, the ED effect shown in FIG. 75) can be started, and the predetermined continuous effect is executed in the first game in which the ending start condition is satisfied. If not, the ending effect is started from the first game or the next game of the first game (in the example shown in FIG. 78, the ED effect is started from the N + 1 game in which the ending start condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when the predetermined continuous effect is executed in the first game, the ending effect is started after the last game of the predetermined continuous effect (in the example shown in FIG. 79, the ending effect is started). The game table is characterized in that the ending start condition is satisfied in the N + 1 game, the continuous effect is executed, and the ED effect is started from the N + 4 game after the last game of the continuous effect).

If the ending start condition is satisfied in the second game state, the second game state will not end under a predetermined condition. Therefore, by executing the ending effect as soon as possible, the player is in the state (ending state). However, if an effect indicating that the ending state has been entered during the execution of the continuous effect is performed, the flow of the effect may be cut off. According to the game console according to the invention 1 of the present application, by giving priority to the continuous production during execution, the flow of the continuous production is not interrupted, and the player is not uncomfortable. , Since the ending effect is not suddenly performed during the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to reduce the upset to the player.

Further, the predetermined continuous effect is a notification effect regarding the continuation of the second gaming state (for example, an additional notification shown in FIG. 76 (3), and a notification regarding the remaining AT (for example, adding the remaining game of AT, AT). Addition of set, addition of AT difference number, suggestion of AT set continuation rate, suggestion of number of navigations, decrease of remaining AT games, decrease of AT set, decrease of AT difference number, suggestion of decrease of AT set continuation rate, etc.)) The effect is included, and the effect control means is a game after the game scheduled to perform the notification effect in the predetermined continuous effect when the predetermined continuous effect is executed in the first game. It may be a means for starting the ending effect from.

With such a configuration, the production of whether or not to grant the right is an production that is of interest to the player, but by performing such a production to the end and then starting the ending production, the player can perform the production. It is possible to prevent the ending announcement from disturbing the desired production, and the player's willingness to play is not diminished.

Further, the predetermined continuous effect is an effect including a notification effect regarding whether or not the right regarding the second gaming state has been granted (for example, an additional notification shown in FIG. 76 (3)), and the effect control means. Starts the ending effect and does not perform the notification effect in the game in which the announcement effect is scheduled to be performed in the predetermined continuous effect when the predetermined continuous effect is executed in the first game. It may be a means.

With such a configuration, since the ending effect is started at the part of the effect that announces whether or not to grant the right, the continuous effect that has been executed without preparing a dedicated continuous effect to announce the ending. It is possible to make the player think that it was a production for announcing the start of the ending production.

Further, the internal lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery shown in FIG. 15) for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more winning combinations or losing, and each of the plurality of reels. Correspondingly provided, a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and the internal lottery after the plurality of reels start to fluctuate. A stop control means (for example, the reel stop control shown in FIG. 15) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed is provided based on the lottery result derived by the means. The plurality of types of lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, a push order bell), and the stop control means has the plurality of stop buttons in a game in which the first lottery result is derived. In a game in which the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode and the first lottery result is derived when the reels are operated according to the first operation condition, the plurality of stop buttons perform the first operation. It is a means for stopping the plurality of reels in the second stop mode when operated according to a second operation condition different from the condition, and the plurality of reels are the first stop mode rather than the second stop mode. When the game is stopped in the stop mode, a game result that generates more prizes is derived, and the effect control means is said to be said when the first lottery result is derived in the second game state. It may be a means capable of performing the first display in which the first operation condition can be specified before the stop operation becomes effective.

With such a configuration, the player can maintain a state in which it is easy for the player to make a profit until the end condition of the second game state is satisfied (it becomes a happy section where the ball can be taken out), and the additional notice is given. Can also enhance the joy of the player.

Further, the effect control means performs the first display in the game in which the first lottery result is derived after the ending start condition is satisfied than before the ending start condition is satisfied. It may be a means with high frequency.

With such a configuration, it is possible to predict the ending state based on the frequency of occurrence of the first display (navigation) even if the ending effect is not performed.

Further, the advantageous state end condition is a condition that is satisfied when the number of games in the second game state (for example, the number of games that can be continued in state B) reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 G). Alternatively, the difference between the number of game values used by the player in the second game state and the number of game values given in the second game state (for example, the value of the MY counter) is a predetermined number. The condition may be satisfied when (for example, 2400 sheets) is reached.

<Invention 2 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the invention 2-1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by providing the reels 110 to 112) shown in 1 and using the game value, and the game result can be obtained by the stopping mode of the plurality of reels. A game table in which one game is completed by being derived and a prize can be generated according to the game result, and the first game state (for example, the state A (non-advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12). And a game in which one game state can be set from a plurality of types of game states including a second game state (for example, a state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) which is more advantageous than the first game state. Based on the control means (for example, the game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and the game state update process shown in FIG. 29), the number of used game values in the second game state, and the number of paid out game values. , The acquired number updating means for updating the total number of the game values acquired by the player (for example, the MY counter updating process shown in FIG. 39A), and the effect controlling means for controlling the effect by the effect means (for example, A predetermined sub-control unit 400) shown in FIG. 4 is provided, and the game control means is satisfied by consuming a part of the rights of the second game state in the second game state. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the AT end condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0, when the number of AT sets becomes 0, the game medium from the start to the end of AT). When the acquisition difference number of cards becomes 0, etc.), when the AT is not won in the chance zone shown in FIG. 12, or when the end condition of the state B is satisfied in the normal state (state B) shown in FIG. (When the number of sets of the special zone becomes 0), the second gaming state is terminated, and even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the second gaming state, the predetermined condition is met. Is a condition relating to the difference number of game media acquired in the different advantageous state end conditions (for example, the second gaming state (advantageous section)), and the amount of rights relating to the acquired second gaming state (advantageous section) (for example, the acquired AT game). Conditions related to the number, the number of AT sets acquired, the number of difference sheets that can be acquired, etc.), conditions related to the amount of rights related to the second game state (advantageous section) consumed, conditions related to the number of remaining games in the second game state) are satisfied. By (for example, the game times in the second game state) When the number reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 G), or when the net increase number of game media in the second game state reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 2400), the second game When the state is terminated and any one of the plurality of types of ending start conditions is satisfied in the second game state, the advantageous state end condition without ending the second game state according to the predetermined condition. It is a means for continuing the second gaming state until the condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state end condition is a condition relating to the number of games played in the second gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "first condition". For example, it is a condition including the state B (the number of games that can be continued in the state B), and the plurality of types of ending start conditions include a first ending start condition and a second ending start condition, and the first ending start condition is. , The number of games until the first condition is satisfied becomes the first number of games (for example, 10G) (for example, when it is determined that the number of remaining games in the state B is 10G or less). The second ending condition is that when the total number updated by the acquisition number updating means reaches a predetermined acquisition number which is a threshold value (for example, the value of the MY counter exceeds 2200). The second ending condition is a condition that may be satisfied before the first ending start condition, and the effect control means is the second gaming state. When any one of the plurality of types of ending start conditions is satisfied, the ending effect can be started, and the ending effect is an effect executed over the second number of games. When the first ending start condition is satisfied before the second ending start condition, the effect control means starts with the game satisfying the first ending start condition or the next game of the game. The production is started (in the example shown in FIG. 81, the ED production is started from the next N + 2 game of the N + 1 game in which the first ending start condition is satisfied), while the above-mentioned is performed before the first ending start condition. When the second ending start condition is satisfied, the ending effect is started in a game after the game satisfying the second ending start condition (for example, when the value of the MY counter exceeds 2200 sheets). In addition, the game counter is characterized in that it is a means in which the ending effect may be started in a game after the game.

Further, the game console according to the present invention 2-2 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel shown in FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. 110 to 112), the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the game result is derived by the stopping mode of the plurality of reels. This is a game table in which one game is completed and a prize can be generated according to the game result, and the first game state (for example, the state A (non-advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) and the first game. A game control means (for example, a game control means that can set one game state from a plurality of types of game states including a second game state (for example, a state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) that is more advantageous than one game state). , The game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and the game state update process shown in FIG. 29, and the right granting means for granting the right regarding the continuation of the second game state (for example, AT shown in FIG. 24 (a)). The game control means includes the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4) for controlling the effect by the effect means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4). When a predetermined condition satisfied by the consumption of the right in the second gaming state is satisfied in the second gaming state (for example, when the AT end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of remaining AT games becomes 0). In the case of, the number of AT sets becomes 0, the acquisition difference number of game media from the start to the end of AT becomes 0, etc.), or the AT is not won in the chance zone shown in FIG. The second gaming state is terminated when the end condition of the state B is satisfied in the normal state (state B) shown in FIG. 12 or when the number of sets of the special zone becomes 0), and the first game state is described. Even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the second gaming state, the difference number of game media acquired in the advantageous state end condition (for example, the second gaming state (advantageous section)) different from the predetermined condition. Conditions related to, conditions related to the amount of rights related to the acquired second game state (advantageous section) (for example, the number of acquired AT games, the number of acquired AT sets, the number of difference that can be acquired, etc.), the second game state consumed (advantageous) When the conditions regarding the amount of rights related to the section) and the conditions regarding the number of remaining games in the second gaming state are satisfied (for example, the number of games played in the second gaming state reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500G)). If you do, or in the second game state When the net increase in the number of game media in the game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400), the second game state is terminated, and any one of a plurality of types of ending start conditions is set in the second game state. When one is satisfied, it is a means capable of continuing the second gaming state until the advantageous state ending condition is satisfied without ending the second gaming state according to the predetermined condition, and the advantageous state. The end condition is a condition relating to the number of games played in the second game state (hereinafter, referred to as "first condition". For example, it is a condition including the state B (the number of games that can be continued), and the plurality of types of ending start conditions include a first ending start condition and a second ending start condition, and the first ending start condition is. , The condition is satisfied when the number of games until the first condition is satisfied becomes a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 G), and the second ending start condition is consumed in the second game state. The above-mentioned rights (for example, already consumed AT games, AT sets, already executed navigation, already acquired difference number, etc.) and the unconsumed said-mentioned rights (for example, acquired but not consumed AT games, etc. The sum of the number of games in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games exceeds 700G (games) depending on the amount of AT set, the number of differences expected to be acquired in future games, etc. The second ending condition is a condition that may be satisfied before the first ending start condition, and the effect control means is the second gaming state. When any one of the plurality of ending start conditions is satisfied, an ending effect suggesting that any one of the plurality of ending start conditions is satisfied can be started. When the first ending start condition is satisfied before the ending start condition, the ending effect is started from the game satisfying the first ending start condition or the next game of the game (shown in FIG. 81). In the example, the ED effect is started from the next N + 2 game of the N + 1 game in which the first ending start condition is satisfied.) On the other hand, the second ending start condition is satisfied before the first ending start condition. In this case, the ending effect is started in a game after the game satisfying the second ending start condition (in the example shown in FIG. 80, after the N game satisfying the second ending start condition). The ED effect is started from the N + 5 game of the above), and the ending effect is a predetermined game that is completed from the time when the first ending condition is satisfied to the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is a game table characterized in that it is an effect executed over a number of times (for example, 10G of the N + 2 to N + 11 games shown in FIG. 81).

According to the game consoles according to the inventions 2-1 and 2-2 of the present application, when the ending effect is started under the first ending start condition, the advantageous state end condition is satisfied after the game in the second game state is digested. It is possible to finish the ending effect by, and the second ending start condition may be satisfied before the first ending start condition, and the second ending effect starts immediately under the second ending start condition. Since it is not necessary to do so, it is possible to leave the pleasure that the ending state may be satisfied internally, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

Further, the effect means is a means capable of executing the first continuous effect over a plurality of games when the second ending start condition is satisfied before the first ending start condition. , The first continuous effect may be an effect including a notification effect notifying that the second ending start condition has been satisfied.

With such a configuration, if the second ending start condition is satisfied first, there is a time margin until the end of the advantageous state, so instead of immediately starting the ending effect, the continuous effect is performed. By announcing the ending, the player's expectation can be gradually raised.

Further, the effect means means that when the first continuous effect is executed, the first continuous effect is terminated before the first ending start condition is satisfied, and the ending effect is started. It may be.

With such a configuration, the ending effect can be executed to the end by starting the ending effect at the timing when the first ending start condition is satisfied even in the middle of the continuous effect, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Will not be given.

Further, the second number of games may be the first number of games.

With such a configuration, the length of the ending effect is the same as the length of the first ending start condition, and when the first ending start condition is satisfied, the ending is immediately announced to produce the ending effect. Can be executed to the end without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, the internal lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery shown in FIG. 15) for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more winning combinations or losing, and each of the plurality of reels. Correspondingly provided, a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and the internal lottery after the plurality of reels start to fluctuate. A stop control means (for example, the reel stop control shown in FIG. 15) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed is provided based on the lottery result derived by the means. The plurality of types of lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, a push order bell), and the stop control means has the plurality of stop buttons in a game in which the first lottery result is derived. In a game in which the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode and the first lottery result is derived when the reels are operated according to the first operation condition, the plurality of stop buttons perform the first operation. It is a means for stopping the plurality of reels in the second stop mode when operated according to a second operation condition different from the condition, and the plurality of reels are the first stop mode rather than the second stop mode. When the game is stopped in the stop mode, a game result that generates more prizes is derived, and the effect control means is said to be said when the first lottery result is derived in the second game state. It may be a means capable of performing the first display in which the first operation condition can be specified before the stop operation becomes effective.

With such a configuration, the player can maintain a state in which it is easy for the player to make a profit until the end condition of the second game state is satisfied (it becomes a happy section where the ball can be taken out), and the additional notice is given. Can also enhance the joy of the player.

Further, the effect control means performs the first display in the game in which the first lottery result is derived after the ending start condition is satisfied than before the ending start condition is satisfied. It may be a means with high frequency.

With such a configuration, it is possible to predict the ending state based on the frequency of occurrence of the first display (navigation) even if the ending effect is not performed.

<Invention 3 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the third invention of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. The indicated reels 110 to 112) are provided, and the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the game result is derived by the stopping mode of the plurality of reels. As a result, one game is completed, and a game table in which a prize can be generated according to the game result, the first game state (for example, the state A (non-advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) and A game control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of types of game states including a second game state (for example, a state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) which is more advantageous than the first game state. (For example, the game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and the game state update process shown in FIG. 29) and the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4) for controlling the effect by the effect means. , And the game control means satisfies a predetermined condition satisfied by consuming a part of the right of the second game state in the second game state (for example, AT end condition). (For example, when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0, the number of AT sets becomes 0, the difference in the number of game media acquired from the start to the end of AT becomes 0, etc.) Or, when the AT is not won in the chance zone shown in FIG. 12, when the end condition of the state B is satisfied in the normal state (state B) shown in FIG. 12, and when the number of sets of the special zone becomes 0. ) Ends the second gaming state, and even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the second gaming state, the advantageous state ending condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the second gaming state is terminated and the ending start condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, the advantageous state ending condition (for example, the second) without ending the second gaming state according to the predetermined condition. Conditions related to the difference number of game media acquired in the game state (advantageous section) of, the amount of rights related to the acquired second game state (advantageous section) (for example, the number of acquired AT games, the number of acquired AT sets, the difference that can be acquired) The second gaming state may be continued until the conditions regarding the number of games, etc.), the conditions regarding the amount of rights related to the consumed second gaming state (advantageous section), and the conditions regarding the number of remaining games in the second gaming state) are satisfied. It is a possible means, and the above-mentioned advantageous state The end condition is a condition relating to the number of games played in the second game state (hereinafter, referred to as "first condition". For example, the condition includes the state B (the number of games that can be continued in the state B), and the effect control means satisfies the ending start condition by means capable of starting the ending effect when the ending start condition is satisfied by the game control means. In the first game, when the number of games until the first condition is satisfied is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 G) (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the first game. The ending effect is started from one game or the next game of the first game (in the example shown in FIG. 83, the ED effect is started from the next N + 2 game of the N + 1 game in which the ending start condition is satisfied). In the first game, if the number of games until the first condition is satisfied is larger than the predetermined number of games, the ending effect is started in a game after the first game ( In the example shown in FIG. 84, the ED effect may be started from the N + 5 game after the N + 1 game in which the ending start condition is satisfied).

When entering the ending effect, it is confirmed that it will continue to the second game state, so if the ending effect is started at an early stage, the feeling of excitement that may end under the specified conditions will be lost. According to the game console according to the invention 3 of the present application, since the ending can be delayed and announced, the player's willingness to play can be maintained, and the ending effect is started in less than a predetermined number of games. In that case, since the number of games until the advantageous state end condition is satisfied is small, the ending effect is immediately started to inform the player to reassure him, and the limiter does not end the game suddenly, which surprises the player. Never.

Further, the ending effect may be an effect capable of performing the game for a maximum number of games from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect.

With such a configuration, if the number of games until the advantageous state end condition is satisfied is more than a predetermined number of times, the situation in which it cannot be determined whether the AT state or the ending state is maintained is maintained, and the player feels expectation. It is possible to execute the ending effect to the end while embracing, and if the number of games until the advantageous state end condition is satisfied is less than the predetermined number, the ending effect can be started immediately. It is possible to see the production as much as possible.

Further, the effect means is a means capable of executing the first continuous effect over a plurality of games in the first case, and the first continuous effect satisfies the ending start condition. It may be a production including a notification production to announce.

With such a configuration, if the ending condition is satisfied before the predetermined number of games, there is a time margin until the end of the advantageous state, so the ending effect is not started immediately but the continuous effect is performed. By announcing the ending after that, the player's expectation can be gradually raised.

Further, the internal lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery shown in FIG. 15) for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more winning combinations or losing, and each of the plurality of reels. Correspondingly provided, a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and the internal lottery after the plurality of reels start to fluctuate. A stop control means (for example, the reel stop control shown in FIG. 15) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed is provided based on the lottery result derived by the means. The plurality of types of lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, a push order bell), and the stop control means has the plurality of stop buttons in a game in which the first lottery result is derived. In a game in which the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode and the first lottery result is derived when the reels are operated according to the first operation condition, the plurality of stop buttons perform the first operation. It is a means for stopping the plurality of reels in the second stop mode when operated according to a second operation condition different from the condition, and the plurality of reels are the first stop mode rather than the second stop mode. When the game is stopped in the stop mode, a game result that generates more prizes is derived, and the effect control means is said to be said when the first lottery result is derived in the second game state. It may be a means capable of performing the first display in which the first operation condition can be specified before the stop operation becomes effective.

With such a configuration, the player can maintain a state in which it is easy for the player to make a profit until the end condition of the second game state is satisfied (it becomes a happy section where the ball can be taken out), and the additional notice is given. Can also enhance the joy of the player.

Further, the effect control means performs the first display in the game in which the first lottery result is derived after the ending start condition is satisfied than before the ending start condition is satisfied. It may be a means with high frequency.

With such a configuration, it is possible to predict the ending state based on the frequency of occurrence of the first display (navigation) even if the ending effect is not performed.

<Invention 4 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the present invention 4 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and rotationally driven. ~ 112) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. After the internal lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery shown in FIG. 15) for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to one or more winning combinations or losing, and the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control shown in FIG. 15) that performs stop control for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed, and the above. The game value giving means (for example, the medal payout shown in FIG. 15) that gives the game value according to the stopping mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means, and the game progress is controlled to acquire the game value. A game table including a game control means whose ease of play can be changed (for example, a game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and a game state update process shown in FIG. 29), and the game control means is a game table. A first gaming state (for example, state A (non-advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (for example, state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12). One game state can be set from at least a plurality of game states including at least, and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set (for example, winning an AT lottery). It is possible to end the first gaming state and set the second gaming state, and based on information about player interests in the first gaming state (eg, the number of game media paid out). It is a means capable of changing the ease of acquiring the game value (for example, the ease of adding the number of AT games) in the second game state set after a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is a game table.

According to the invention 4 of the present application, the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state after the transition can be changed by the information regarding the player's profit in the first game state. It becomes possible to appropriately control the payout of the game value through the second game state.

The "first gaming state" and the "second gaming state" according to the present invention 4 may be a combination of different gaming states. For example, the normal state, the CZ state, and the CZ state described with reference to FIG. 12 may be used. In addition to the AT state, the special zone, and the ED state, it may be a combination of game states such as RT, AT, ART, bonus, and AT or ART pullback zone.

Further, "the predetermined condition is satisfied" according to the invention 4 of the present application is not limited to winning the AT lottery, for example, the number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, and the number of points is the default point. It includes the fact that the number has been reached, that the predetermined condition device has been internally won (or won), that the end condition of the bonus has been met, and the like.

Further, the combination of "first game state"-> "determined condition is satisfied"-> "second game state" according to the present invention 4 is "normal game"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state". Not limited to, for example, "CZ state"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state", "Bonus"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state", "Normal state"-> "Number of games is default" "The number of games has been reached"-> "AT state", "AT state"-> "The number of games has reached the default number of games"-> "Specialized zone", "Normal game"-> "The number of points is the default number of points" Has reached "→" AT state "," AT state "→" The number of points has reached the default number of points "→" Specialized zone "," AT state "→" The number of points has reached the default number of points "->" Pseudo-bonus "," Normal state "->" Internally won (or won) a predetermined condition device "->" AT state "," Normal state "->" Internally won (or won a prize) in a predetermined condition device ) ”→“ Bonus ”,“ Bonus ”→“ Bonus end condition met ”→“ Normal state ”,“ Bonus ”→“ Bonus end condition met ”→“ AT state ”etc. Good.

Further, the "information on the player's profit" according to the invention 4 of the present application is not limited to the number of payouts of the game medium, for example, the payout rate in the first game state, per predetermined unit (for example, 50 game media). Information on the number of games (base), the number of winnings of the winning combination of the specific payout, etc., and the next AT state after the end of the AT state for a certain period (for example, the period from the start of the advantageous section to the winning of the AT) Information such as the decrease (decrease rate) and increase (increase rate) of the game medium in the period until the start, the period from the AT state to the CZ state, the bonus period, the CZ state, etc., and the RT It also includes information on replays and stay RTs, such as the stay rate, the number of games played, and the number of times RTs are displayed that shift to a high probability of replays.

Further, the "easiness of acquiring a game medium" according to the present invention 4 is not limited to the ease of adding the number of AT games, for example, the ease of adding the difference number in AT and the acquisition of the number of AT sets. Ease of ease, ease of entering the specialized zone, high and low frequency of push order bell navigation, good transition to RT on ART machines (high and low probability of push order promotion replay navigation), good Ease of transition to RT, high and low frequency of replay navigation, ease of continuation of a state where game media are easy to acquire (for example, AT, ART, RT, bonus), state where game media are easy to acquire It may be easy to shift to (AT high probability, AT specialized zone).

Further, the information regarding the player's profit is information regarding the addition of the game value in the first gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "game value giving information"), and the game control means is subject to the predetermined conditions. When the game value-adding information is satisfied, when the game value-adding information is advantageous to the player (for example, when a high-base game is performed), when the game value-adding information is not advantageous (for example, low). Compared to the case where the base game is performed, the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state set after the predetermined condition is satisfied is changed disadvantageously for the player (for example,). In some cases, the probability of winning the AT additional lottery is lowered, and the number of games won in the AT additional lottery is reduced).

With such a configuration, if the development is advantageous in the first gaming state, it is possible to make the game progress slowly as a whole by lowering the performance of the second gaming state.

Further, the second gaming state may be a state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

With such a configuration, in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state, it is possible to proceed with the game while considering how to play in the advantageous second gaming state, and the player's satisfaction. The degree can be increased.

Further, the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4) for controlling the effect by the effect means is provided, and the plurality of lottery results include a predetermined lottery result (for example, the condition shown in FIG. 10). In the game in which the push order bells of the device numbers 8 to 13 are included, and the stop control means is derived from the predetermined lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are set to a third operation condition (for example, “1” in FIG. When the reels are operated according to the incorrect answer pressing order shown in "Remarks", any one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the first stop mode (for example, small winning combinations 7 to 54 shown in FIGS. 7 to 9). ), And in the game in which the predetermined lottery result is derived, the correct answer shown in the fourth operating condition (for example, "Remarks" in FIG. 10) in which the plurality of stop buttons are different from the third operating condition. This is a means for stopping the plurality of reels in a second stopping mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 6 shown in FIG. 7) when the reels are operated according to the pushing order of the above. , The game value is added more when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, 12 small winning combinations 6 are used). , Other small winning combinations 7 to 54 are one piece) means, and when the predetermined lottery result is derived in the second gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button becomes effective. It may be a means capable of performing a display (for example, push order navigation) in which the fourth operation condition can be specified before the above.

Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that does not change depending on the information regarding the player's profit in the first gaming state.

With such a configuration, the conditions for transitioning to the second gaming state do not change depending on the information regarding the player's profit in the first gaming state, so that the player is unfair regarding the transition to the second gaming state. It is possible to prevent feeling. If the predetermined condition is the first hit of the AT, the lottery for the first hit of the AT will not be affected regardless of the way of playing in the first game state, so that the player may decide the speed of the first hit of the AT. I don't feel unfair.

Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of games set as the ceiling) are digested in the first game state.

With such a configuration, a player who can distinguish between high-base games and low-base games must finish in front of the ceiling by hitting low-base games and high-base games according to his / her budget. It is possible to reduce the situation where the player does not get the budget or finishes the game without hitting, and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.

<Invention 5 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the present invention 5 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and rotationally driven. ~ 112) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. After the internal lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery shown in FIG. 15) for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to one or more winning combinations or losing, and the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control shown in FIG. 15) that performs stop control for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed, and the above. The game value giving means (for example, the medal payout shown in FIG. 15) that gives the game value according to the stopping mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means, and the game progress is controlled to acquire the game value. A game table including a game control means whose ease of play can be changed (for example, a game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and a game state update process shown in FIG. 29), and the game control means is a game table. A first gaming state (for example, state A (non-advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (for example, state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12). One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a plurality of game states, and the first game state is terminated based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. The second gaming state can be set, and the predetermined determination is based on the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first gaming state (for example, the timing when the player presses the left reel 110). It is a means capable of changing the ease of acquiring the game value (for example, the ease of adding the number of AT games) in the second gaming state set after the condition of is satisfied. It is a game table to play.

According to the invention 5 of the present application, the ease of acquiring the game value in the second gaming state after the transition can be changed depending on the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first gaming state. It is possible to appropriately control the payout of the game value through the game state and the second game state.
Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, each of which has one or more combinations. Alternatively, an internal lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery shown in FIG. 15) for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss, and the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result derived from the above, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control shown in FIG. 15) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed and the stop control means The game value giving means (for example, the medal payout shown in FIG. 15) that gives the game value according to the stopping mode of the plurality of stopped reels, and the ease of acquiring the game value by controlling the progress of the game. A game table including a changeable game control means (for example, a game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and a game state update process shown in FIG. 29), and the game control means is the first game. A plurality of states including at least a state (for example, a state A (non-advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) and a second gaming state (for example, a state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) different from the first gaming state. One game state can be set from the game state, and the first game state is set based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning an AT lottery) in the state where the first game state is set. It is possible to end the game state and set the second game state, and the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first game state (for example, the timing when the player presses the left reel 110). ), A means capable of changing the ease of acquiring the game value (for example, the ease of adding the number of AT games) in the second gaming state set after the predetermined condition is satisfied. The plurality of types of lottery results include the first lottery result, and the stop control means operates the stop button by the first operation in the game in which the first lottery result is derived. When the above-mentioned multiple reels are stopped in the first stop mode and the stop button is operated by the second operation in the game in which the first lottery result is derived, the plurality of reels are stopped. Stop the reel in the second stop mode It is a means for stopping, and the game value giving means has more game values when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The game control means is a means for giving, and when the first lottery result is derived in the first game state and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the first The second game is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied, as compared with the case where the first lottery result is derived in one game state and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. It is a game table characterized in that the ease of obtaining the game value in the state may be changed disadvantageously for the player.
According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state after the transition is changed depending on the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first game state, and the first When a game in which a large amount of game value is given is performed in the game state, the ease of acquiring the game value may be changed disadvantageously for the player in the second game state after the transition. It becomes possible to appropriately control the payout of the game value through the game state of the above and the second game state.
Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that does not change depending on the status of giving the game value to the player in the game in which the first lottery result is derived in the first game state.

The "first gaming state" and the "second gaming state" according to the invention 5 of the present application may be a combination of different gaming states. For example, the normal state, the CZ state, and the CZ state described with reference to FIG. 12 may be used. In addition to the AT state, the special zone, and the ED state, it may be a combination of game states such as RT, AT, ART, bonus, and AT or ART pullback zone.

Further, "the predetermined condition is satisfied" according to the invention 5 of the present application is not limited to winning the AT lottery, for example, the number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, and the number of points is the default point. It includes the fact that the number has been reached, that the predetermined condition device has been internally won (or won), that the end condition of the bonus has been met, and the like.

Further, the combination of "first game state"-> "determined condition is satisfied"-> "second game state" according to the present invention 4 is "normal game"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state". Not limited to, for example, "CZ state"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state", "Bonus"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state", "Normal state"-> "Number of games is default" "The number of games has been reached"-> "AT state", "AT state"-> "The number of games has reached the default number of games"-> "Specialized zone", "Normal game"-> "The number of points is the default number of points" Has reached "→" AT state "," AT state "→" The number of points has reached the default number of points "→" Specialized zone "," AT state "→" The number of points has reached the default number of points "->" Pseudo-bonus "," Normal state "->" Internally won (or won) a predetermined condition device "->" AT state "," Normal state "->" Internally won (or won a prize) in a predetermined condition device ) ”→“ Bonus ”,“ Bonus ”→“ Bonus end condition met ”→“ Normal state ”,“ Bonus ”→“ Bonus end condition met ”→“ AT state ”etc. Good.

Further, the "operation result of the stop button" according to the invention 5 of the present application is not limited to the timing when the player presses the left reel, for example, the timing when the middle reel or the right reel is pressed, and the pressing order of the stop button (forward pressing). , Reverse push), the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed by operating the stop button is also included.

Further, the "ease of acquiring game value" according to the present invention 5 is not limited to the ease of adding the number of AT games, for example, the ease of adding the difference number in AT and the acquisition of the number of AT sets. Ease of ease, ease of entering the specialized zone, high and low frequency of push order bell navigation, good transition to RT on ART machines (high and low probability of push order promotion replay navigation), good Ease of transition to RT, high and low frequency of replay navigation, ease of continuation of a state where game value is easy to obtain (for example, AT, ART, RT, bonus), state where game value is easy to obtain It may be easy to shift to (AT high probability, AT specialized zone).

Further, in the first game state, the player presses the stop button for each game in the first operation condition (for example, operation timing (including operation aiming at a specific symbol on the reel), operation order (push order)). Second operation condition (for example, operation timing (operation aiming at a specific symbol on the reel)) rather than the first operation according to the first operation (for example, the stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 10 to 19 shown in FIG. 11B). (Including), the second operation (for example, the stop operation of the left reel pressing positions 0 to 9 shown in FIG. 11B) according to the operation order (pushing order)) is more profitable for the player. (For example, a game medium, a high ball output rate, a high number of games (base) per predetermined unit (for example, 50 game media), a large number of winning combinations of a specific payout winning combination, a certain period (for example, advantageous) Games in the period from the start of the section to the winning of the AT, the period from the end of the AT state to the start of the next AT state, the period from the AT state to the CZ state, the bonus period, the period of the CZ state, etc.) The decrease (decrease rate) of the medium is small (or the increase rate (increase rate) is large), the stay rate of RT is high, the number of games is large, the number of RTs that shift to the high probability of replay is large, etc.) The game control means is more likely to acquire the second operation than the first operation in the first gaming state, the first operation is more than the second operation. Compared to the case where the number is increased, the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state set after the predetermined condition is satisfied is changed disadvantageously for the player (for example, AT addition lottery). In some cases, the winning probability is lowered, and the number of games won in the AT additional lottery is reduced).

With such a configuration, if the development is advantageous in the first gaming state, it is possible to make the game progress slowly as a whole by lowering the performance of the second gaming state.

In addition, the plurality of types of lottery results include the first lottery result (for example, in addition to the condition device number 15 shown in FIG. 11, general replays in which there is no difference in payout depending on the operation, common bells, and other winning combinations in any order. ) Is included, and the stop control means stops the plurality of reels in the first stop mode when the stop button is operated by the first operation in the game from which the first lottery result is derived. (For example, in the game in which the first lottery result is derived by stopping at (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 1 shown in FIG. 6), when the stop button is operated by the second operation, The plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 17 or the re-game combination 18 shown in FIG. 6), and the game control means is said to be in the first gaming state. When the first lottery result is derived and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the first lottery result is derived in the first gaming state, and the plurality of reels are derived. Compared to the case where the game is stopped in the first stop mode, the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state set after the predetermined condition is satisfied is changed more disadvantageously for the player (for example). , The probability of winning the AT additional lottery is lowered, and the number of games won in the AT additional lottery is reduced).

With such a configuration, when a game (high-base game) in which the game value is easily acquired in the first game state is performed, the acquisition performance in the second game state is lowered, resulting in excessive output. It is possible to reduce gambling without throwing balls.

Further, even if the game value adding means is a means that does not make a difference in giving the game value between the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stopping mode and the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode. Good.

With such a configuration, it is not possible to determine the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state depending on the payout of the game value, so that the game playability can be improved.

Further, the first operation condition and the second operation condition include conditions relating to the operation timing of the stop button (for example, the timing when the left reel 110 is pressed) or the operation order (for example, forward push and reverse push). It may be a condition.

With such a configuration, the player can change the way of playing by his / her own operation, and the satisfaction level of the player can be enhanced.

Further, the plurality of types of lottery results include a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, in addition to the condition device number 16 shown in FIG. 11, cherry, watermelon, push order bell, and color push. The stop control means includes, when the stop button is operated by the first operation in the game from which the second lottery result is derived, the stop control means makes the plurality of reels a third. In a game in which the game is stopped in a stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 57 or the small winning combination 58 shown in FIG. 9) and the second lottery result is derived, the stop button is operated by the second operation. When this is done, the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stopping mode (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 55 or the small winning combination 56 shown in FIG. 9), and the game value-adding means is said. When the plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop mode, more of the game value is given when the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 12 small winning combinations 55 and 56). , Small winning combination 57, 58 is 8) means, in the game control means, the second lottery result is derived in the first game state, and the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode. If this is the case, the second lottery result is derived in the first gaming state, and the setting is made after the predetermined conditions are satisfied, as compared with the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop mode. There may be a case where the ease of acquiring the game value in the second gaming state is changed disadvantageously for the player.

With such a configuration, by separating the lottery result that affects the second game state and the lottery result that does not affect the second game state but has a change in payout, each game can be played by the player. It is possible to give a choice of which operation method to play, and it is possible to expand the range of games.

Further, in the first game state, the game value in the first game state is higher in the case of performing each game and the second operation than in the case of performing each game and the first operation. The total amount of grant may be likely to be large.

With such a configuration, when performing a high-base game in the first game state, the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state after the transition is lowered, so that excessive balls are not output. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, the second gaming state may be a state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

With such a configuration, in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state, it is possible to proceed with the game while considering how to play in the advantageous second gaming state, and the player's satisfaction. The degree can be increased.

Further, the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4) for controlling the effect by the effect means is provided, and the plurality of lottery results include the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A third lottery result different from the lottery result (for example, the push order bell of the condition device numbers 8 to 13 shown in FIG. 10) is included, and the stop control means is used in the game in which the third lottery result is derived. , When the plurality of stop buttons are operated according to a third operation condition (for example, the pressing order of incorrect answers shown in "Remarks" of FIG. 10), the plurality of reels are stopped in a fifth stop mode (for example, for example). In the game in which the game is stopped at any of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combinations 7 to 54 shown in FIGS. 7 to 9 and the third lottery result is derived, the plurality of stop buttons are used with the third operation condition. Is operated according to a different fourth operating condition (for example, the correct pressing order shown in "Remarks" of FIG. 10), the plurality of reels are stopped in the sixth stopping mode (for example, the small combination shown in FIG. 7). It is a means for stopping at the symbol combination corresponding to 6), and the game value adding means is a case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the sixth stop mode rather than a case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the fifth stop mode. Is a means for adding a lot of the game value (for example, 12 small winning combinations 6 and 1 other small winning combination 7 to 54), and the effecting means is the first in the second gaming state. When the result of the third lottery is derived, it is possible to display (for example, push order navigation) in which the fourth operation condition can be specified before the stop operation of the stop button becomes effective. There may be.

Further, the predetermined condition may be a condition that does not change depending on the information regarding the player's profit in the first gaming state.

With such a configuration, the conditions for transitioning to the second gaming state do not change depending on the information regarding the player's profit in the first gaming state, so that the player is unfair regarding the transition to the second gaming state. It is possible to prevent feeling. If the predetermined condition is the first hit of the AT, the lottery for the first hit of the AT will not be affected regardless of the way of playing in the first game state, so that the player may decide the speed of the first hit of the AT. I don't feel unfair.

<< Embodiment 2 >>
Next, the slot machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the game console of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 106. In the following, only the configuration different from the slot machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described in order to avoid duplicate explanations.

<Type of game state>
First, with reference to FIG. 86, the types of gaming states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described. FIG. 86 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG.

In the first embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 12, when the number of special zone sets is larger than 0 and the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 in the AT state, the game shifts to the special zone. However, in the second embodiment, when the special zone start condition is satisfied (in this example, when the special zone right lottery is won in the AT state), the special zone shifts (arrow (F) in FIG. 86). ..

<Initial value of AT residual number>
In the first embodiment, an example in which the AT game is managed by the number of games (the number of remaining AT games) is shown, but in the second embodiment, the AT game is managed by the difference number (the number of remaining AT games). The management method (transition condition, etc.) of the AT game is not limited to the difference number, and may be the number of medals paid out, the number of times the push order bell is navigated, or the like.

In the first embodiment, in the normal middle update process described with reference to FIG. 30, the initial value of the number of remaining AT games is determined using the table of FIG. 31 (a) or FIG. 31 (b). In the second form, the initial value of the AT residual number is determined by using the AT winning AT residual number initial value lottery table of FIG. 87 (d) (step S1B03 of FIG. 100).

Here, since the AT winning in the normal middle update process is the AT winning (AT direct hit) in the normal state in the AT residual number initial value lottery table at the time of winning, in this example, there is a 70% probability that 100 cards will be won. A 20% probability of 150 sheets, a 7% probability of 200 sheets, and a 3% probability of 250 sheets are set as the initial values of the AT residual number.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the CZ middle update process described with reference to FIG. 35, the initial value of the number of remaining AT games is determined using the table of FIG. 22 (d), but in the second embodiment, the initial value is determined. Using the winning AT residual number initial value lottery table of FIG. 87 (d), the initial value of the AT residual number is determined (step S1C05 of FIG. 101).

Here, since the AT winning in the CZ middle update process is the AT winning in the CZ in the AT residual number initial value lottery table at the time of winning, in this example, for example, when the BAR right is acquired, 70 A% probability of 150 sheets, a 25% probability of 200 sheets, and a 5% probability of 250 sheets are set as the initial values of the AT residual number of sheets.

<AT related processing>
Next, the AT-related processing according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 2A is a flowchart of AT-related processing according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 24A.

The AT-related processing according to the second embodiment is obtained by applying the processing of steps S1417 to S1420 instead of the processing of steps S1401 to S1409 of the AT-related processing according to the first embodiment.

Specifically, in step S1417, the zone determination process during AT is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 90, but in this AT middle zone determination process, it is determined whether or not the remaining AT difference number is within the zone.

In step S1418, a lottery for adding the remaining number of ATs is performed based on the determination result of the zone determination process during AT in step S1417. In this example, when the determination result of the zone determination process during AT is set to be outside the zone, the AT residual number addition lottery is performed using the AT residual number addition lottery table shown in FIG. 89A. When the inside of the zone is set in the determination result of the zone determination process during AT, the AT residual number additional lottery is performed using the AT residual number additional lottery table for the specialized zone shown in FIG. 89 (e).

In this lottery, the lottery type (see the column of the lottery type in FIG. 10) associated with the internal winning combination and the lottery table for adding the remaining number of ATs in FIG. 89 (a) or FIG.

For example, when the determination result of the zone determination process during AT is outside the zone and the condition device (for example, condition device number 7) corresponding to the lottery type D is internally won, the AT shown in FIG. 89 (a). Refer to the lottery table for adding the remaining number of sheets, and the AT residual number is added with a probability of 40%, and the breakdown is 10 sheets with a probability of 90% and 20 sheets with a probability of 10%.

Further, when the determination result of the zone determination process during AT is in the zone and the condition device (for example, condition device number 7) corresponding to the lottery type D is internally won, the special feature shown in FIG. 89 (e). Refer to the lottery table for adding the number of AT residuals for the conversion zone, and the number of AT residuals is added with a probability of 100%, and the breakdown is 10 with a probability of 90% and 20 with a probability of 10%. ..

Here, in this example, the additional winning probability of the AT residual number additional lottery table for the special zone shown in FIG. 89 (e) is based on the additional winning probability of the AT residual number additional lottery table shown in FIG. 89 (a). Is also getting higher. That is, when the determination result of the zone determination process during AT is within the zone, the probability of winning the addition is higher than when the determination result is outside the zone, and the addition is easy. The probabilities and values of these tables are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery for adding the AT residual number is executed for all the conditional devices, but this lottery may not be executed depending on the conditional device.

In step S1419, it is determined whether or not the lottery for adding the AT residual number in step S1418 has been won, and if it is won, the lottery result is added (added) to the current AT residual number in the next step S1420. , Step S1411.

In step S1411, a lottery (special zone right lottery) is executed as to whether or not to acquire the right to move to the special zone (the number of special zone sets). In this lottery, the lottery type (see the column of the lottery type in FIG. 10) associated with the internal winning combination and the special zone right lottery table in FIG. 89 (b) or FIG.

For example, when the determination result of the zone determination process during AT is outside the zone and the condition device (for example, condition device number 7) corresponding to the lottery type D is internally won, the special feature shown in FIG. 89 (b). Refer to the conversion zone right lottery table (low probability) and win this lottery with a 10% probability.

Further, when the determination result of the zone determination process during AT is in the zone and the condition device (for example, condition device number 7) corresponding to the lottery type D is internally won, the special feature shown in FIG. 89 (c). Refer to the conversion zone right lottery table (high probability) and win this lottery with a 20% probability.

Here, in this example, the winning probability of the special zone right lottery table (high probability) shown in FIG. 89 (c) is higher than the winning probability of the special zone right lottery table (low probability) shown in FIG. 89 (b). Is also getting higher. That is, when the determination result of the zone determination process during AT is within the zone, the winning probability of the special zone right lottery is higher than when the determination result is outside the zone, and it is easy to shift to the special zone. The probabilities and values of these tables are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the special zone right lottery is executed for all the conditional devices, but this lottery may not be executed depending on the conditional device. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1413.

In step S1413, it is determined whether or not the special zone right lottery in step S1411 has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1415, and if not, the AT-related process ends.

In step S1415, 1 is added to the value of the number of specialized zone sets, and this AT-related processing ends. The number of games remaining in the special zone (initial number of games) is determined by drawing the number of special zone initial games in FIG. 89 (d) in step S1D51 of the special zone initial setting process described later using FIG. 103 (a). It is decided by the special zone initial G number lottery using.

<Specialization related processing>
Next, the specialization-related processing according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b). FIG. 6 is a flowchart of specialization-related processing according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 24 (b).

In the specialization-related processing according to the second embodiment, the processing of steps S1426 to S1429 is executed instead of the processing of steps S1421 to S1425 of the specialization-related processing according to the first embodiment.

In this example, since the special zone is managed by the number of games (the number of games remaining in the special zone), in step S1426, 1 is subtracted from the number of games remaining in the special zone for each game during the special zone. In step S1427, the AT residual number additional lottery is performed using the special zone AT residual number additional lottery table shown in FIG. 89 (e). In step S1428, it is determined whether or not the lottery for adding the AT residual number in step S1427 is won, and if it is won, the lottery result is added (added) to the current AT residual number in the next step S1429. , End this specialization related process.

<AT middle zone judgment processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the zone determination process during AT (step S1417) in the AT-related process of FIG. 88 (a) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the zone determination process during AT in the AT-related process of FIG. 88 (a).

In step S1431, it is determined whether or not the remaining AT difference number is the intrazone difference number. Here, when the remaining AT difference number is within a certain zone (30 or more and 50 or less in this example), it is determined that the remaining AT difference number is the intrazone difference number, and the process proceeds to step S1433. In other cases, it is determined that the remaining AT difference number is the out-of-zone difference number (not the in-zone difference number), and the process proceeds to step S1437.

In step S1433, it is determined once whether or not the number of AT residuals has been added within the numerical range of the zone (30 or more and 50 or less), or whether or not the special zone right lottery has been won. If either one is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1437, and if neither is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1435.

In step S1435, the determination result is set in the zone, and in step S1437, the determination result is set outside the zone, and then the zone determination process during AT is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT remaining number is determined based on the AT remaining number during AT, and the AT remaining number addition lottery table referred to outside the zone and inside the zone is changed. It is configured to change the winning probability of the special zone right lottery by changing the additional winning probability of the difference number and changing the special zone right lottery table referred to outside the zone and inside the zone.

With such a configuration, unlike the case where a zone is provided according to the number of games (for example, when 300 to 600 G of AT is set as a zone), when a zone is provided according to the number of AT residuals, navigation within the zone is performed. By lowering the probability (decreasing the net increase number), the number of games that stay in the zone becomes longer than when the net increase is high, so it is possible to make it easier to receive an additional lottery after AT.

Here, when a zone is provided based on the number of AT residuals, the number of AT residuals may exceed the upper value of the zone due to addition or the like and enter the same zone again, but each time a lottery is performed with a high probability. If you repeat the addition, there is a risk that the gambling spirit will remain high due to too many balls, so in this example, even if you enter the zone after winning the addition, winning the special zone, or entering the zone , It is configured to perform an additional lottery with a low winning probability (determination process of step S1433). The information inside or outside the zone determined in the zone determination process during AT may be used for other game control such as the navigation probability of the instruction information for the next game transition.

Further, in this example, once the additional lottery is won in the zone, the judgment result is set to be outside the zone, so that the additional lottery with a low winning probability will be performed in the subsequent games. When entering a second zone (for example, 130 or more and 150 or less) different from the zone (for example, 30 or more and 50 or less), or when the number of remaining sheets is larger than that of the second zone (for example, 151 or more). When it reaches, an additional lottery with a high probability of winning may be performed in the second zone.

In addition, if the player enters the first zone again after entering the second zone, an additional lottery with a high probability of winning may be performed, or if the predetermined number of games is exhausted after the additional lottery is performed once. Or, when a predetermined number of game media are acquired, the lottery in the first zone may be returned from the low-probability lottery to the high-probability lottery. Further, in the case of drawing with a low probability regardless of the remaining number of sheets in the zone, the lottery may be performed with a numerical value such as medium probability, which has a lower expected value than high probability but higher expected value than low probability. .. Further, the range of the zone may be a specification in which a lottery is performed each time an addition or the first hit is made, or the numerical range of the zone may be changed by entering the special zone.

The initial value of the numerical range of the zone at the time of winning the AT is preferably in the range of 100 to 0 when the initial value of the AT residual number is 100. In this case, it is difficult to give the player the feeling that nothing has been done by having the player play the game in the zone with a high probability of addition and a low net increase.

<Zone management of AT residual number>
Next, zone management of the number of AT residual sheets will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of zone management of the AT residual number in time series, and FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an effect example during zone management of the AT residual number.

Here, in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a scenario is selected by lottery in the special zone and a privilege type is set for each game (up to 30 games) according to this scenario (FIG. 27). In No. 2, the effect illustrated in FIG. 92 is configured to be executed during the zone management of the remaining number of ATs.

FIG. 91A shows the state at the start of AT. In this example, in the normal state, the initial value of the AT residual number is determined to be 100 by the lottery using the winning AT residual number initial value lottery table of FIG. 87 (d). In addition, after the shift to AT, the AT-related zone determination process is executed in the AT-related process, and in this AT-in-zone determination process, the AT residual number is in the numerical range of the zone (30 or more and 50 or less in this example). It is determined that it is out of the range of, and the outside of the zone is set as the determination result.

In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 92A, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of AT residual sheets (in this example, the “remaining number” indicating that the number of AT residual sheets is 100. The display including the character display of "100 sheets") and the number of game media acquired during AT (in this example, the character display of "acquired 0 sheets" indicating that the number of game media acquired during AT is 0. Display).

FIG. 91 (b) shows a state in which the number of AT residual sheets is reduced to 40 from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a). In this example, there is no addition of the AT residual number during AT, and the AT residual number is reduced from 100 to 40 due to the digestion of the game in AT. Therefore, in the AT middle zone determination process, the AT residual number is reduced. Is within the numerical range of the zone (30 or more and 50 or less in this example), and the zone is set as the determination result.

In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 92B, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of AT residual sheets (in this example, the “remaining number” indicating that the number of AT residual sheets is 40. Display including the character display of "40 sheets") and the number of game media acquired during AT (in this example, the character display of "acquired 60 sheets" indicating that the number of game media acquired during AT is 60. Display). Further, since the determination result is in the zone, the outer edge of the display indicating that the current AT residual number is in the zone (in this example, the AT residual number (40 remaining) is colored (in this example). For example, by performing a display surrounded by a band (aura) of yellow), the player is notified that the number of AT residuals is in the zone.

FIG. 91 (c) shows an example in which the number of AT residual sheets is reduced to 20 from the state shown in FIG. 91 (b). In this example, since the AT residual number decreased from 40 to 20 due to the digestion of the game in AT, the AT residual number is in the numerical range of the zone in the zone determination process during AT (30 or more and 50 in this example). It is determined that it is out of the range of (sheets or less), and out of zone is set as the determination result.

In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of AT residual sheets (in this example, the "remaining number" indicating that the number of AT residual sheets is 20. Display including the character display of "20 sheets") and the number of game media acquired during AT (in this example, the character display of "acquired 80 sheets" indicating that the number of game media acquired during AT is 80 sheets Display).

In FIG. 91 (d), in the state shown in FIG. 91 (c) (when the number of AT residuals is outside the zone), the number of AT residuals is increased by 20 by winning the additional lottery for the number of AT residuals. An example is shown. In this example, the number of AT residual sheets has increased by 20 to 40, so that the number of AT residual sheets is within the numerical range of the zone (30 or more and 50 or less in this example) in the zone determination process during AT. It is determined that the inside of the zone is set as the judgment result.

In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of AT residuals (in this example, the "remaining" indicating that the number of AT residuals is 40. Display including the character display of "40 sheets") and the number of game media acquired during AT (in this example, the character display of "acquired 80 sheets" indicating that the number of game media acquired during AT is 80. (Display including) and a display indicating the added AT residual number (in this example, a display including the character display of “+20!” Indicates that the added AT residual number is 20). Further, since the determination result is in the zone, the outer edge of the display indicating that the current residual number of sheets is in the zone (in this example, the AT residual number of sheets (remaining 40 sheets)) is colored (for example). By performing a display surrounded by a band (aura) of yellow), the player is notified that the number of AT residuals is in the zone.

In FIG. 91 (e), in the state shown in FIG. 91 (d) (when the number of AT residuals is in the zone), the number of AT residuals is increased by 20 by winning the additional lottery for the number of AT residuals. An example is shown. In this example, the number of AT residual sheets has increased by 20 to 60, so that the number of AT residual sheets is within the numerical range of the zone (30 or more and 50 or less in this example) in the zone determination process during AT. It is determined to be outside, and the outside of the zone is set as the determination result.

In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (e), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of AT residuals (in this example, the "remaining" indicating that the number of AT residuals is 60. Display including the character display of "60 sheets") and the number of game media acquired during AT (in this example, the character display of "acquired 80 sheets" indicating that the number of game media acquired during AT is 80 sheets (Display including) and a display indicating the added AT residual number (in this example, a display including the character display of “+20!” Indicates that the added AT residual number is 20).

FIG. 91 (f) shows an example in which the number of AT residual sheets is reduced to 40 from the state shown in FIG. 91 (e). In this example, after the addition in the zone is performed once, the number of AT residuals is reduced to 40, and the AT residual number is entered into the same zone again. Although it is within the numerical range of (30 or more and 50 or less in this example), it is once determined that there was an addition within the zone, and the outside of the zone is set as the determination result.

In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (f), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of AT residuals (in this example, the "remaining" indicating that the number of AT residuals is 40. Display including the character display of "40 sheets") and the number of game media acquired during AT (in this example, the character display of "acquired 100 sheets" indicating that the number of game media acquired during AT is 100. Display). Since the determination result is outside the zone, no indication is given to suggest that the current remaining number of sheets is within the zone.

As described above, in the zone management of the AT residual number according to the present embodiment, once the AT residual number is added in the zone, it is not determined to be in the zone again in the same zone. , It is configured so that the number of AT residual sheets is not added. For this reason, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the number of residual sheets suddenly increases due to repeated addition and determination in the zone, and to prevent excessive gambling.

The numerical range of the zone is not limited to 30 or more and 50 or less, but it is preferable to set the numerical range so that the determination within the zone is made once from the start of AT to the end of AT. Further, the zone is not limited to one, and for example, in addition to the zone of the first numerical range (for example, 30 or more and 50 or less), the zone of the second numerical range (for example, 130 or more and 150 or less) is used. It may be provided.

In addition, the numerical range of one zone is changed from the first numerical range (for example, 30 or more and 50 or less) to the second numerical range (for example, 60 or more and 70 or less) according to the AT level and mode. You may. With such a configuration, the player may enjoy guessing the current AT situation due to the ease of addition and the like.

Further, in this example, once there is an addition in the zone, it is configured not to be added again in the same zone. For example, when the number of AT residuals enters the zone. May be configured to always determine that it is in the zone. With such a configuration, if the remaining number of sheets is small regardless of whether or not it is added, the remaining number of sheets will increase even if it is out of order or a single piece, and it is expected that it will re-enter the zone. It becomes possible to have.

In addition, contrary to this example, if the addition does not occur in the zone, the judgment in the zone is not made even if the addition is made in the zone again, and the addition occurs and the addition is made in the zone or the addition is made. It may be configured so that the judgment in the zone is made when the player jumps over the zone and then returns to the zone again. In addition, when the addition occurs in the zone of the first numerical range (for example, 30 or more and 50 or less) and then enters the zone of the second numerical range (for example, 130 or more and 150 or less), it is considered to be in the zone. It may be configured to determine. Further, in this example, the determination in the zone is performed based on the presence or absence of addition in the zone, but the determination in the zone may be performed depending on whether or not the special zone right lottery is won.

Further, the mode of the production is not limited to this example, and for example, when zone management or the like is performed by the remaining number of sheets, or when the zone is determined in advance, FIG. 92 (h) and FIG. As shown, a display suggesting a numerical range of zones (30 or more and 50 or less, and 70 or more and 90 or less in this example) may be displayed.

In addition, when the zone is no longer a zone, as shown in FIG. 92 (j), the zone is deleted by deleting the display suggesting the numerical range of the zone (30 or more and 50 or less in this example). It may be configured not to display the suggestion. In addition, the display and the inside and outside of the internal zone (information indicating the determination result of the zone determination process during AT) do not have to match, and when the zone is not internally entered (determination result of the zone determination process during AT). Even if the information indicating is outside the zone), a display suggesting that the information is within the zone may be displayed in a certain numerical range (for example, 30 or more and 50 or less).

Further, even when entering the zone, the navigation level (navigation frequency) is configured to be high after the addition occurs, so that the navigation level is, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (j). When changes from Lv1 (low frequency of navigation) to Lv4 (high frequency of navigation), zone management of the remaining number of sheets is immediately terminated, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be configured to shift to another gaming state (ED state in this example).

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, the details of the instruction information setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the instruction information setting process according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 28.

In the instruction information setting process according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S152 to S1529 are executed instead of the processes of the instruction information setting processes S1501 to S1515 according to the first embodiment.

Specifically, in step S1521, it is determined whether or not the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 13) has been internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1523, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1523, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is abnormal. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1525, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1525, a state-specific bell navigation display lottery (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “bell navigation display lottery”) is performed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 94, but in this bell navigation display lottery, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to set the instruction information of the correct push order (bell navigation, full navigation) of the push order bell.

In step S1527, it is determined whether or not the bell navigation display lottery in step S1525 has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1529, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1529, the correct push order (bell navigation, full navigation) of the push order bell is set as the instruction information, and the instruction information setting process ends.

In this example, the internal winning of the push order bell is one of the conditions for executing the full navigation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the push order bell or the fall avoidance replay (the game state is the game). It may be a condition that the player has been internally elected as a replay role to avoid falling (shifting) to a disadvantageous state for the person.

<Bell navigation display lottery by state>
Next, the state-specific bell navigation display lottery executed in the instruction information setting process of FIG. 93 will be described with reference to FIG. 94.

In the state-specific bell navigation display lottery executed in the instruction information setting process of FIG. 93, the instruction information of the correct push order (bell navigation, full navigation) of the push order bell is referred to by referring to the navigation lottery table provided for each non-normal game state. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to set.

<Bell navigation display lottery by state / CZ or special zone>
FIG. 94A is a diagram showing an example of a navigation lottery table for CZ or a special zone.

When the game state is CZ or a special zone, the bell navigation display lottery is performed with reference to this CZ or special zone navigation lottery table. In the example shown in FIG. 94 (a), the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery of CZ is 100%, and the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery of the special zone is 50%.

In this example, the navigation rate at the time of winning the push order bell is set to 100% because most of the players are in a state of getting the ball first during CZ. On the other hand, in the special zone, although the navigation rate is not 100%, the AT residual number is added in the specialized state (the state where it is easy to be added), and the AT residual number before the transition to the special zone is not subtracted. Therefore, the configuration is adopted so as not to be disadvantageous to the player.

As in this example, by setting the navigation rate of the special zone to less than 100%, it is unfortunate that the special zone is a special zone for the player while suppressing the sudden increase in the number of balls. It has the effect of alleviating the feeling. In this example, the navigation rate of the specialized zone is set to 50%, but it is preferable that the net increase in the number of sheets per 1G is 0 or more (maintaining the status quo or more).

<Bell navigation display lottery by state / AT>
FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT navigation lottery table.

When the game state is AT, the bell navigation display lottery is performed with reference to this AT navigation lottery table. In this example, the winning probability of the Bell Navi display lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the AT residual number additional lottery, and the additional lottery is won compared to before winning the AT residual number additional lottery (addition = not occurring). After that (addition = already generated), the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery is configured to be higher.

In the example shown in FIG. 94 (b), the navigation rate before winning the additional lottery for the remaining number of ATs (addition = not generated) is 50% or 70%, and after winning the additional lottery (addition = generated). The navigation rate of) is 80% or 100%, and the latter has a higher navigation rate than the former (the frequency of navigation is higher).

As described above, in this example, the navigation rate is low from the start of the AT to the occurrence of the addition, and in the AT of this example in which the difference number is managed, the progress of the game in the AT progresses. It is getting slower (it takes time to finish AT). With such a configuration, although the AT has entered (shifted), the situation where the AT ends immediately without adding the remaining number of sheets is reduced, and the decrease in the player's motivation to play is reduced. Is possible.

Further, in this example, the additional lottery is always possible during the AT, and the relationship of "the progress of the game in the AT is slow" = "the number of times the additional lottery is performed is large" is established. , The player can have a strong sense of expectation for the addition while the navigation rate is low, and can maintain the sense of expectation of the player.

In this example, after winning the additional lottery (addition = generated), the navigation rate is high until the end of AT, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the additional lottery. The navigation rate may be set to be high only for a certain number of games (for example, several games) after winning the game, or when the judgment result of the next zone judgment process during AT is out of the zone, AT It may be configured to return to the same navigation rate as before winning the additional lottery for the remaining number of sheets (addition = not generated).

Further, in this example, the winning probability of the bell navigation display lottery is different depending on the judgment result of the zone judgment processing during AT, and the case where it is judged to be out of the zone rather than the case where it is judged to be in the zone (zone = inside). (Zone = outside) is configured so that the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery is higher.

In the example shown in FIG. 94 (b), the navigation rate is 50% when it is determined to be in the zone (zone = inside) before winning the additional lottery for the remaining number of ATs (addition = not occurring). When it is determined to be out of the zone (zone = outside), the navigation rate is 70%, and the latter has a higher navigation rate than the former (the frequency of navigation is higher). In addition, after winning the additional lottery (addition = already generated), the navigation rate is 80% when it is determined to be within the zone (zone = inside), and when it is determined to be outside the zone (zone = outside). The navigation rate is 100%, and the latter has a higher navigation rate than the former (the frequency of navigation is higher).

As described above, in this example, the zone in which the winning probability of the additional lottery increases (advantageous for the player) is set according to the remaining number of ATs. If the remaining number of ATs is in the zone, if the navigation rate is high, the player will exit the zone immediately, and the number of games that the player can expect will be shortened.In this example, the zone should not be so. Inside, by lowering the navigation rate compared to outside the zone, adjustments are made so that additions are likely to occur inside the zone as much as possible.

On the other hand, if the addition is continuous in the zone, the AT will be easy to continue for a long time, so once the addition occurs, the navigation rate will be higher than when the addition has not occurred, and the additional lottery will be done by increasing the net increase number. The number of times it is done is reduced. Further, even if the AT ends immediately after the addition, the player can add the AT once, so that the AT can be finished with a sense of conviction as compared with the case where the AT ends without the addition. ..

In addition, each state of occurrence and non-occurrence of the addition in this example is not limited to the one by the addition lottery of the AT residual number, for example, when the addition lottery of the number of navigations is won, the addition before the winning is not generated. , You may change it to an additional occurrence, and if you win the additional lottery of the number of payouts, you may change from the non-addition occurrence before winning to the additional occurrence, to the special zone, pseudo bonus, or bonus In the case of rushing, the addition may be changed from the non-addition before the rush to the addition occurrence. That is, the game console according to the present invention is configured such that AT progress is slow with a low net increase until a certain right is granted, and AT progress is fast with a high net increase after a certain right is granted. You just have to.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 92 (h) to 92 (k), the effect according to the navigation rate (in this example, the display of the character string of "Lv1" suggesting the navigation rate of 50% and the navigation rate of 70% are displayed. The suggestion "Lv2" character string is displayed, the "Lv3" character string suggesting a navigation rate of 80%, and the "Lv4" character string suggesting a navigation rate of 100%) may be displayed. With such a configuration, since the actual frequency of occurrence of navigation and the effect suggesting the navigation rate can be linked, it may be possible to give the player a sense of conviction and expectation.

<Bell navigation display lottery by state / ED>
FIG. 94 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an ED navigation lottery table.

When the game state is ED, the bell navigation display lottery is performed with reference to this ED navigation lottery table. In this example, the smaller the number of remaining games in the state B (the number of remaining G in the state B), the higher the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 94 (c), the navigation rate is 50% when the number of remaining Gs in the state B is 1201 to 1500, the navigation rate is 70% when the number is 901 to 1200, and the navigation rate is 601 to 900. The navigation rate is 80%, the navigation rate in the case of 301 to 600 is 90%, the navigation rate in the case of 1 to 300 is 100%, and the smaller the number of remaining Gs in the state B, the higher the navigation rate (navigation). Frequently occurs).

Since the ED entry condition in this embodiment is "the number of acquired sheets + the number of planned differences acquired> 2000" (see step S1E61 in FIG. 104 (a)), the AT is set at an early stage after the start of the advantageous section (state B). If you win, there will be a lot of remaining advantageous sections (navigable period), and if you set the navigation rate to 100%, the net increase in the number of sheets (MY counter) will increase even though there are many remaining advantageous sections. There is a possibility that the AT will end immediately after reaching the predetermined limiter (2400 sheets). Therefore, when the number of remaining Gs in the state B is large, the time required to reach the limiter (2400 sheets) is reduced by lowering the navigation rate and increasing the net increase as compared with the case where the number of remaining Gs in the state B is small. I'm late.

On the other hand, when the number of remaining Gs in the state B is small (for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section is close to 1500G), the navigation rate is set to 100% in order to allow the player to acquire the game medium for the limiter (2400 sheets) firmly. The net increase is increased, and the limiter (2400 sheets) is reached quickly.

In addition, even during the ED, as in the AT, the effect according to the navigation rate may be performed as shown in FIGS. 92 (h) to 92 (k). With such a configuration, even during ED, the actual frequency of occurrence of navigation and the effect suggesting the navigation rate can be linked, so that the player can be given a sense of conviction and expectation. There is.

Further, the method of the bell navigation display lottery is not limited to this example. For example, if the bell navigation display lottery is not won in a certain game state, there is a possibility that no navigation will occur regardless of the AT state. Therefore, even if the number of consecutive non-winnings in the Bell Navi display lottery (the number of consecutive non-winnings) is counted and the number of times exceeds a certain value, the next Bell Navi display lottery will always be won. Good.

In addition, the navigation is hidden due to the non-winning of the bell navigation display lottery, but if the player accidentally pushes the correct answer of the push order bell and the push order bells are aligned, the above-mentioned number of consecutive non-winning times May or may not be reset. In addition, when the number of consecutive non-winning games is reset, it is advantageous for the player by the amount of success of the push order bell by himself, so that the enjoyment of each game of the player can be increased. Further, when the number of consecutive non-winnings is not reset, it is possible to avoid the situation where the AT does not advance at all, so that there is an effect that the game console behaves closer to the designer's assumption.

<Change in navigation rate depending on the presence or absence of addition>
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the change in the navigation rate depending on the presence or absence of the addition will be described. FIG. 95 (a) is a graph showing an example of the relationship between the presence / absence of addition and the number of AT residual sheets, and FIG. 95 (b) is a graph showing an example of the relationship between the presence / absence of addition and the number of acquired sheets.

The graph shown by the solid line in FIG. 95 (a) shows the AT when the AT progresses in a state where the navigation rate is low without any addition, and then the AT is won in the AT residual number addition lottery and the navigation rate is high. It shows the change in the number of remaining sheets, and is due to the game console according to the present embodiment.

In the game console according to the present embodiment, since the addition has not occurred at the start of AT, the navigation probability is low immediately after the start of AT (the net increase number is low), and the progress of the game until the end of AT is slow (inclination of the graph). Is in a loose state).

On the other hand, the graph shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 95 (a) shows the change in the number of AT residual sheets when the AT progresses in a state where the navigation rate is high immediately after the start of the AT, and the game console according to the comparative example. belongs to.

Since the game console according to the comparative example has a specification that the net increase number is high immediately after the start of AT, the game progresses quickly until the end of AT (the slope of the graph is steep), and it is early after the start of AT. AT will end.

In the comparative example, the fact that the AT ends earlier means that the chances of the additional lottery during the AT are reduced, but as in the game table according to the present embodiment, the AT residual number additional lottery is won. Until this is done, if the navigation rate is lowered and the net increase is low, the chances of additional lottery during AT can be increased compared to the comparative example, and AT ends without any additional lottery occurring during AT. It is possible to reduce the situation that would end up. In addition, in a game table that manages ATs by the difference number of sheets, such as the game table according to the present embodiment, the difference number of sheets acquired is obtained except when the player intentionally ignores the push order navigation. Is guaranteed to be acquired, so even a low net increase will not hurt the player.

Further, in the game console according to the present embodiment, since the navigation rate is increased after the addition occurs, the game can be digested with a high net increase, and the game is performed by performing an effect that raises the expectation of the player. It becomes possible to liven up. On the other hand, by increasing the net increase after the addition occurs, the time until the AT ends will be shorter than when the addition does not occur, but the chances of the additional lottery during the AT will decrease. It is also possible to moderately suppress gambling by not giving too much privilege to the player.

In the game console according to the present embodiment, if the lottery for adding the remaining number of ATs is never won during AT, as shown in the graph shown by the broken line in FIG. 95 (a), the game until the end of AT. The state in which the progress of the graph is slow (the state in which the slope of the graph is gentle) is maintained.

Each graph shown in FIG. 95 (b) is a graph drawn by replacing the AT residual number in FIG. 95 (a) with the acquired number. Of these, the graph shown by the solid line in Fig. (B) shows the case where the AT progresses in a state where the navigation rate is low without any addition, and then the AT residual number addition lottery is won and the navigation rate shifts to a high state. It shows the change in the number of acquired cards in the above, and is due to the game console according to the present embodiment.

In the game console according to the present embodiment, since the addition does not occur at the start of AT, the navigation probability is low immediately after the start of AT (the net increase number is low), and the number of acquired game media gradually increases halfway (graph). The slope becomes loose). On the other hand, after the addition of AT occurs, by increasing the navigation rate, the game can be digested with a high net increase, so the number of acquired game media increases rapidly after the addition (the slope of the graph is steep). become).

<Change in navigation rate due to zone management of AT residual number>
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a change in the navigation rate due to zone management of the number of AT residual sheets will be described. Note that FIG. 96A is a graph showing an example of the relationship between the zone management of the number of AT residual sheets and the number of AT residual sheets, and FIG. 96B is a graph showing the AT residual number when an addition occurs in the zone. It is a graph which showed the change of the difference number of sheets.

In the graph shown by the solid line in FIG. 96 (a), after the AT progresses in a state where the AT residual number is outside the zone and the navigation rate is high, the AT residual number enters the zone and the navigation rate shifts to a low state. It shows the change of the AT residual number when the AT progresses in the state where the AT residual number enters the zone again and the navigation rate is high, and is based on the game console according to the present embodiment.

In the game console according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 95, during AT, the navigation rate is changed depending on the presence or absence of additional winning to adjust the net increase number, but in addition to this, the AT residual number is adjusted. In zone management, when the number of AT residuals enters the zone (in the zone where the winning probability of the additional lottery is high), the navigation rate is lowered to make the net increase low, so that the game progresses until the end of AT. It is late (the rate of stay at AT is high).

If the zone is set according to the number of games and the winning probability of the additional lottery is increased in a predetermined game section as in the conventional game table, the opportunity to increase the winning probability of the additional lottery is lost after the game period has elapsed. However, in the game console according to the present embodiment, by performing zone management based on the number of AT residuals, the player proceeds with the game while grasping the situation such as the presence or absence of addition, and adjusts the stay rate in the zone. Is possible.

Further, in this example, a range in which the AT residual number is 30 or more and 50 or less is added to form a zone with a high probability of lottery, and when the zone is entered from the range of 51 or more and 100 or less, the navigation rate is lowered. By making the net increase low, the chances of additional lottery in the zone are increased, and it is configured so that additional lottery is likely to occur during the period of high probability of additional lottery. Further, in the zone, by lowering the net increase number of sheets even during AT, the number of acquired game media does not increase sharply, and the effect of not inciting the gambling spirit of the player can be expected.

The graph shown by the solid line in FIG. 96B shows the change in the number of AT residuals when the additional lottery is won in the zone when the number of AT residuals enters the zone and the navigation rate shifts to a low state. It is shown and is based on the game console according to the present embodiment.

As described above, in the game console according to the present embodiment, since the navigation rate is increased after the addition occurs, the game can be digested with a high net increase, and the AT residual number rapidly decreases after the addition (graph). The slope becomes steep). Therefore, the period from the start of AT to the end of AT is shorter than that of the example described with reference to FIG. 96 (a) (when the addition has not occurred).

In the graph shown in FIG. 96 (b), after the addition occurred, the navigation rate remained high (high net increase) both inside and outside the zone, but it re-entered the zone. In that case, the stay rate may be changed by lowering the net increase in the number of sheets.

In addition, various patterns can be considered for adjusting the net increase number, but for the maximum net increase number, the addition has already occurred and is out of the zone> the addition has already occurred and is inside the zone> the addition has not occurred and is out of the zone> the addition has not occurred and is in the zone It is preferable to have a magnitude relationship (see, for example, FIG. 94 (b)). It should be noted that, with respect to the case where the addition has already occurred and is inside the zone and the addition has not occurred and is outside the zone, there may be a magnitude relationship in which the addition has been generated and is within the zone <the addition has not occurred and is outside the zone.

Further, in the graphs shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, an example of reducing the net increase in the number of sheets when entering the zone is shown, but the condition for reducing the net increase in the number of sheets may be another condition. For example, in the case of shifting to the additional specialized state (specialized zone), if it is configured to reduce the net increase number while giving benefits, it is possible to suppress gambling and not to give dissatisfaction to the player. Is possible. In addition, the additional number may be changed depending on whether or not the special zone is won, and the net increase may be changed as the right to the ball output rate and the remaining number of sheets in the advantageous section decreases. It is also possible to extend the life of AT by lowering it.

FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the AT navigation lottery table described with reference to FIG. 94 (b).
In the modified example AT navigation lottery table, the navigation rate before winning the additional lottery for the remaining number of ATs (addition = not generated) is 100% or 80%, and after winning the additional lottery (addition = generated). The navigation rate of) is 70% or 50%, and the latter has a lower navigation rate than the former (the frequency of navigation is lower).

In this way, in the modified example, the navigation rate is low after the addition occurs, and in the AT of this example in which the difference number is managed, the progress of the game in the AT is slowed down (until the end of the AT). It takes time). With such a configuration, the added right can be slowly digested, and the player may be able to thoroughly enjoy the game.

Further, in the modified example, the navigation rate is 100% when it is determined to be in the zone (inside the zone) before winning the lottery for adding the remaining number of ATs (addition = not occurring), and it is determined to be out of the zone. When this is done (zone = outside), the navigation rate is 80%, and the latter has a lower navigation rate than the former (the frequency of navigation is lower). In addition, after winning the additional lottery (addition = generated), the navigation rate is 70% when it is determined to be within the zone (zone = inside), and when it is determined to be outside the zone (zone = outside). The navigation rate is 50%, and the latter has a lower navigation rate than the former (the frequency of navigation is lower).

As described above, in the modified example, by lowering the navigation rate outside the zone than inside the zone, it is possible to make adjustments so that the addition is likely to occur outside the zone as much as possible.

<Adjustment of the number of acquired sheets in ED>
Next, the adjustment of the number of acquired sheets in the ED will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. Note that FIG. 97 is a graph showing a variation image of the number of acquired sheets in the ED.

As described with reference to FIG. 94 (c), in the game console according to the present embodiment, when the game state is ED, the bell navigation display lottery is performed with reference to the ED navigation lottery table, so that the state B The smaller the number of remaining games (state B remaining G number), the higher the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery.

Specifically, as shown in the ED navigation lottery table of FIG. 94 (c), when the number of remaining Gs in the state B is large (for example, when the number of remaining Gs in the state B is 901 to 1200G), the number of remaining games When the number of remaining G in state B is small (for example, when the number of remaining G in state B is 1 to 300 G) while the net increase in the number of sheets is lowered (because there are many opportunities to acquire game media), By increasing the net increase in the number of sheets, the player is configured to acquire a large number of game media. That is, the average net increase in the number of sheets from the start to the end of the ED changes depending on the timing of entering the ED (shifting to the ED) in the advantageous section.

The graph shown in FIG. 97A shows an example in which the transition from CZ to ED in the game section of 600 to 900 G in AT and the number of acquired sheets reached the limiter (2400 sheets) in the game section of 1200 to 1500 G. There is.

In this example, in the game section of 601 to 900 G (state B remaining G number is 601 to 900 G), navigation is executed at a navigation rate of 80%, followed by 901 to 1200 G (state B remaining G number 301 to 600 G). In the section, navigation is executed at a navigation rate of 90%, and in the subsequent game section of 1201 to 1500 G (state B remaining G number is 1 to 300 G), navigation is executed at a navigation rate of 100%. Therefore, the navigation rate is higher and the net increase is higher in the following game section of 901 to 1200G (state B remaining G number is 301 to 600G) than in the game section of 601 to 900G (state B remaining G number is 601 to 900G). Therefore, the navigation rate is higher and the net increase is higher in the following game section of 1201 to 1500 G (state B remaining G number is 1 to 300 G) than in this game section.

Further, the graph shown in FIG. 97B shows an example in which the game transition from CZ to ED in the game section of 900 to 1200 G in AT, and the number of acquired sheets reaches the limiter (2400 sheets) in the same section.

In this example, in the game section of 901 to 1200 G (state B remaining G number is 301 to 600 G), navigation is executed at a navigation rate of 90%, and then 1201 to 1500 G (state B remaining G number is 1 to 300 G). In the section, navigation is executed at a navigation rate of 100%. Therefore, the navigation rate is higher and the net increase is higher in the following game section of 1201 to 1500 G (state B remaining G number is 1 to 300 G) than in the game section of 901 to 1200 G (state B remaining G number is 301 to 600 G). It becomes.

In this example, the net increase number is changed according to the number of remaining Gs in the state B, but the net increase number may be changed in consideration of the value of the acquired number (MY counter). Specifically, when the number of acquired sheets is small and the number of remaining G in state B is small, it is difficult to acquire 2400 sheets by 1500 G, so the net increase number may be set to the maximum. Further, although it depends on the design of the net increase number of sheets and the design of the ED, when the ED is shifted to the state where the number of remaining Gs in the state B is small, it may not be possible to obtain 2400 sheets by 1500G.

Further, in this example, the winning probability (navigation rate) of the CZ bell navigation display lottery is set to 100% and the net increase number is kept constant, but like the ED, the navigation rate (net increase number) is based on the number of games and the like. May be changed.

99 (b) and FIG. 9 (c) are diagrams showing a modified example of the ED navigation lottery table described with reference to FIG. 94 (c).
In the navigation lottery table for ED shown in FIG. 94 (c), the smaller the number of games remaining in state B (the number of remaining G in state B), the higher the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery. In the ED navigation lottery table of the modified example shown in 99 (b), the navigation rate is set regardless of the number of remaining Gs in the state B.

According to the modified example, the number of remaining games is predicted according to the degree of change in the frequency of occurrence of navigation because the navigation rate is different regardless of the number of remaining Gs in state B, not in stages according to the number of remaining Gs in state B. If the ED is entered at an early stage in the advantageous section, the player may be entertained by the large change in the navigation rate in the remaining games.

Further, in the ED navigation lottery table of the modified example shown in FIG. 99 (c), the navigation rate is determined by the number of remaining Gs in the state B at the time of ED entry (at the time of transition to ED), and this navigation is performed until the ED is completed. It is configured to maintain the rate.

FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are graphs showing an example of a change in the number of acquired sheets when the navigation rate is determined by the number of remaining G in the state B at the time of entering the ED (at the time of transition to the ED).

In the example shown in FIG. 98 (a), the navigation lottery table for ED shown in FIG. 99 (c) is referred to at the time of ED transition, and the navigation is based on the number of remaining Gs in the state B at the time of ED entry (1201 to 1500 G in this example). The rate is determined to be 50%, and this navigation rate is maintained until the end of ED. Further, FIG. 98 (b) refers to the ED navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 99 (c) at the time of ED transition, and the navigation rate is based on the number of remaining Gs in the state B at the time of ED entry (301 to 600 G in this example). Is determined to be 90%, and this navigation rate is maintained until the end of ED.

As in this example, if the frequency of the bell navigation is changed according to the state B remaining G number at the time of ED entry, the net increase number does not change during the ED, and the game medium is increased with the same net increase until the limiter is reached, during AT. Regardless of the timing of entering the ED, it is possible to adjust the number of games when the limiter is reached to almost the same number of games (for example, after 1400G and less than 1500G). When the ED is entered immediately before 1500G, it is preferable to set the net increase number to the maximum, but in that case, 1500G may be digested before reaching the limiter.

<Normal update process>
Next, the details of the normal intermediate update process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the normal intermediate update process according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 30 above.

In the normal error update process according to the second embodiment, the process of step S1B03 of the normal error update process according to the first embodiment is changed. In this example, the game state is set to the AT state in step S1B03. , The AT residual number initial value lottery described with reference to FIG. 87 (d) is executed, and the initial value (lottery result) is set for the AT residual number.

<Update process during CZ>
Next, the details of the update process during CZ according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the update process during CZ according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 35.

In the CZ middle update process according to the second embodiment, the process of step S1C05 of the CZ middle update process according to the first embodiment is changed. In this example, the game state is set to the AT state in step S1C05. , The AT residual number initial value lottery described with reference to FIG. 87 (d) is executed, and the initial value (lottery result) is set for the AT residual number.

<Update process during AT>
Next, the details of the update process during AT according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the update process during AT according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 36A.

In the in-AT update process according to the second embodiment, the processes in steps S1D31 to S1D45 are executed instead of the processes in steps S1D01 to S1D07 of the in-AT update process according to the first embodiment.

Specifically, in step S1D31, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is out of order. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D33, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D35. In step S1D33, after adding 3 to the AT residual number, the process proceeds to step S1D09.

In step S1D35, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is a push order bell. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D37, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D09.

In step S1D37, it is determined whether or not the stop operation is performed according to the correct pressing order. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D39, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D41.

In step S1D39, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation is hidden. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D09, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D41.

In step S1D41, the value obtained by subtracting the payout number from the input number is added to the AT residual number, and then the process proceeds to step S1D09.

In step S1D43, which proceeds when the determination in step S1D09 is No, it is determined whether or not the number of AT residual sheets is less than 0. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D45, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1D19. In step S1D45, after turning on the state B end flag, the process proceeds to step S1D19.

The game console according to the present embodiment manages the AT by the AT residual number, but does not manage it by the pure difference number. Specifically, if the winning combination is lost, the net increase number is minus 3, but the player loses, so 3 is added to the AT residual number (steps S1D31 to S1D33).

Further, the AT residual number is reduced when the winning combination is the push order bell, and the AT residual number is updated regardless of whether the push order is correct or incorrect. At this time, if the push order is incorrect (when the determination in step S1D37 is No), the number of payouts may be 1 or 0, and in this case, the AT residual number increases. .. Further, when the push order is correct but the navigation is not displayed (when the determination in step S1D39 is Yes), the AT residual number is not updated, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, for the condition devices other than the push order bell and the disengagement, the AT residual number is not updated regardless of the payout. Various patterns can be considered as to whether or not to update the AT residual number, and management may be performed only by the difference between the input number and the payout number.

Furthermore, when the navigation of the push order bell occurs, even if the stop operation according to the navigation is not performed, the push order bell is assumed to have been acquired in the correct push order, and the AT residual number is calculated. You may update it. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from intentionally prolonging the AT. Further, when the recommended game method such as a two-card game is not performed, the AT residual number may not be updated no matter what kind of payout or the like is performed in the game.

<Specialized zone initial setting process>
Next, the details of the special zone initial setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (a). FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the special zone initial setting process according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 36B.

In the special zone initial setting process according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S1D51 to S1D53 are executed instead of the special zone initial setting process according to the first embodiment.

Specifically, in step S1D51, the special zone initial G number lottery is executed. In this special zone initial G number lottery, the special zone initial game number lottery table shown in FIG. 89 (d) is used. In this example, 10G is selected with a 30% probability, 20G is selected with a 30% probability, 30G is selected with a 20% probability, 40G is selected with a 10% probability, and 50G is selected with a 10% probability. Is selected.

In step S1D53, after setting the lottery result of the special zone initial G number lottery executed in step S1D51 to the number of games remaining in the special zone, the special zone initial setting process is terminated.

<Update processing during specialization>
Next, the details of the specialization intermediate update process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (b). FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the specializing update process according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 37.

In the specializing update process according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S1E01 to S1E05 are executed instead of the specializing update process according to the first embodiment.

Specifically, in step S1E01, it is determined whether or not the number of games remaining in the special zone is 0 or less. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1E03, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1E05.

In step S1E03, the gaming state is set to the AT state, and the process proceeds to step S1E05.

In step S1E05, the ED state transition determination process is executed, and the update process during specialization is terminated. The details of the ED state transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 (a), but in this ED state transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the ED start condition described with reference to FIG. 12 is satisfied. I do.

In this example, the special zone is managed by the number of games, but it may be managed by the remaining number of games as in the AT.

<ED state transition judgment processing>
Next, the details of the ED state transition determination process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a). FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the ED state transition determination process according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 38A.

In the ED state transition determination process according to the second embodiment, the process of step S1E61 of the ED state transition determination process according to the first embodiment is changed, and in step S1E61, the total number of acquired sheets and the planned acquisition difference number is 2000 sheets. If it exceeds, it is determined that the ED start condition is satisfied.

<Production setting process during AT>
Next, the details of the effect setting process during AT according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (a). FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the effect setting process during AT according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 46A.

In the in-AT effect setting process according to the second embodiment, the process in step S3401 of the in-AT effect setting process according to the first embodiment is deleted.

<Specialized production setting process>
Next, the details of the specializing effect setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b). FIG. 6B is a flowchart of the specializing effect setting process according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 46B.

In the specializing effect setting process according to the second embodiment, the processing of steps S3431 to S3435 is executed instead of the processing of steps S3411 to S3419 of the specializing effect setting process according to the first embodiment.

Specifically, in step S3431, an effect of displaying the current number of games remaining in the special zone is set. If there is the number of games remaining in the special zone that was displayed earlier, the subtraction from that value to the current number of games remaining in the special zone is displayed.

In step S3433, the AT residual number additional lottery table for the special zone shown in FIG. 89E is used to perform an AT residual number additional lottery, and it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S3435, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3421.

In step S3435, an additional effect is set according to the difference number obtained by the AT residual number addition lottery, and the process proceeds to step S3421.

<Game status update command processing>
Next, the details of the game state update command processing according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the game state update command process according to the second embodiment, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 50.

In the game state update command process according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S3A51 to S3A61 are executed instead of the processes of the game state update command processes S3A03 to S3A35 according to the first embodiment.

Specifically, in step S3A51, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is AT or a specialized zone, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S3A53 to display the number of AT residuals (for example, FIG. 92A). ~ Display showing the number of AT residual sheets shown in FIG. 3F) is updated, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S3A55.

In step S3A55, it is determined whether or not the game state is AT, special zone, or ED, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S3A57 to display the number of acquired sheets (for example, FIGS. 92A to 92). The number of game media acquired during the AT shown in (f)) is updated, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S3A59.

In step S3A59, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has shifted from AT to the specialized zone, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S3A61 to set an effect suggesting the start of the specialized zone, and if not applicable. The process proceeds to step S3A41.

<Invention 6-1 to 6-3 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the present invention 6-1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a variable display unit (for example, FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. The display window 113) shown in 1 is provided, and the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is derived to the variable display unit. This is a game table in which one game is completed and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display unit, and one game state can be set from a plurality of game states. Means (for example, the game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and the game state update process shown in FIG. 29) and the start operation receiving means for receiving the start operation for starting the game (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 1). ), A lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed based on the reception of the start operation, and the lottery result can be derived (for example, the winning combination internal lottery shown in FIG. 15) and the reception of the start operation. The variable display unit is stopped based on the stop operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) for stopping and displaying the variable display unit, the lottery result, and the operation conditions of the stop operation unit. A stop control means for controlling (for example, the reel stop control shown in FIG. 15) and a game value giving means (for example, a medal shown in FIG. 15) capable of giving a game value based on a display result derived to the variable display unit. (Payout) and notification means capable of notifying information indicating the operation conditions of the stop operation means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4, and the instruction information shown in FIG. 93). A setting process), and the plurality of gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a state A (non-advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. The gaming state (for example, the state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) is included, and the stop control means has a lottery result (for example, the condition device number 8 shown in FIGS. 10 and 93) determined by the lottery means. The stop operation means is the first in a game in which a push order bell of ~ 13 or a fall avoidance replay (a replay role for avoiding a fall (transition) of a game state to a disadvantageous state for a player) is derived. When the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition (for example, the pressing order of the correct answer shown in "Remarks" of FIG. 10), the first display result (for example, the bell (small winning combination 6) shown in FIG. 7) is displayed on the variable display unit. Design association corresponding to In the game in which the predetermined lottery result is derived by the lottery means, the stop operation means is different from the first stop operation condition (for example, the second stop operation condition (for example, FIG. 10). When the operation is performed according to the incorrect answer pressing order shown in "Remarks", a second display result (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the deviation) different from the first display result is derived from the variable display unit. As a means, the notification means can notify a first notification (for example, full navigation) indicating the first stop operation condition when the predetermined lottery result is derived in the second gaming state. When a certain condition is satisfied by means (for example, addition of the right of advantageous state (addition of the number of AT games, addition of the number of AT differences, addition of the AT set, addition of the number of AT navigations)), a special state is granted. (Granting an additional special zone, granting a high probability, etc.), increasing the frequency of AT navigation, paying out the game medium), the frequency of performing the first notification changes before and after the certain condition is satisfied ( For example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), after winning the additional lottery (addition = generated), the bell navigation display is displayed more than before winning the additional lottery for the remaining number of ATs (addition = not generated). It is a game table, which is a means (with a high probability of winning a lottery (navigation rate)).

According to the game console according to the invention 6-1 of the present application, the frequency of performing the first notification changes before and after a certain condition is satisfied. Therefore, the frequency of the first notification is changed when a certain condition is satisfied. It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Further, if the frequency of the first notification is relatively low before the privilege is given, the progress of the game can be delayed in the second game state in which the predetermined lottery is executed, and the number of lottery is increased. This can increase the chances of the benefits being granted.

Further, the game console according to the invention 6-2 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a variable display unit (for example, the display shown in FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. A window 113) is provided, and a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one game can be played by deriving the display result to the variable display unit. A game control means (for example, a game control means) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, which is a game table that is finished and can generate a prize according to a display result derived to the variable display unit. The game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and the game state update process shown in FIG. 29, the start operation receiving means for receiving the start operation for starting the game (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 1), and the above. A lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed based on the reception of the start operation, and the lottery means (for example, the internal lottery of the winning combination shown in FIG. 15) capable of deriving the lottery result and the variable display are displayed based on the reception of the start operation. A stop operation means for stopping and displaying the variable display unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and a stop for controlling the stop of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation conditions of the stop operation means. A control means (for example, the reel stop control shown in FIG. 15), a game value giving means capable of giving a game value based on a display result derived to the variable display unit (for example, a medal payout shown in FIG. 15), and With a notification means capable of transmitting information indicating an operation condition of the stop operation means (for example, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, a first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4, and an instruction information setting process shown in FIG. 93). , Benefits that are advantageous to the player (for example, addition of the right of advantageous state (addition of the number of AT games, addition of the number of AT differences, addition of the AT set, addition of the number of AT navigations)), granting of a special state (additional special) Benefit granting means (for example, AT-related processing shown in FIG. 88 (a), FIG. 88 (b)) capable of granting a privilege granting means (for example, granting a conversion zone, granting a high probability, etc.), increasing the frequency of AT navigation, paying out a game medium) The specialization-related process shown in FIG. 100, the normal medium update process shown in FIG. 100, and the CZ medium update process shown in FIG. 101 are included, and the plurality of gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, shown in FIG. 12). A state A (non-advantageous section)) and a second gaming state (for example, a state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) that is more advantageous than the first gaming state are included, and the privilege granting means is described above. Smell in the second gaming state If the player wins a predetermined lottery (for example, the AT lottery shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the lottery for adding the remaining number of ATs shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), the special zone right lottery), the above-mentioned privilege The stop control means is a game in which the first lottery result (for example, the push order bells of the condition device numbers 8 to 13 shown in FIGS. 10 and 93) is derived by the lottery means. In the above, when the stop operation means is operated according to the first stop operation condition (for example, the pressing order of the correct answer shown in "Remarks" of FIG. 10), the first display result (for example, for example) is displayed on the variable display unit. In the game in which the bell (symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 6) shown in FIG. 7) is derived and the first lottery result is derived by the lottery means, the stop operation means is the first stop operation condition. Is a second stop operation condition different from the first display result on the variable display unit when the operation is performed according to a different second stop operation condition (for example, the pressing order of incorrect answers shown in "Remarks" of FIG. 10). In the game in which the display result (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss) is derived, and the second lottery result (for example, the re-game combinations 3 to 16 shown in FIG. 6) is derived by the lottery means. When the stop operation means is operated according to the third stop operation condition (for example, the first right stop), the third display result (for example, the replay combinations 3 to 16 shown in FIG. 6) is displayed on the variable display unit. In a game in which the corresponding symbol combination) is derived and the second lottery result is derived by the lottery means, the stop operation means has a fourth stop operation condition (for example, different from the third stop operation condition). A means for deriving a fourth display result (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a deviation) different from the third display result to the variable display unit when operated according to the left first stop or the middle first stop). When the first lottery result is derived in the second gaming state, the notification means can notify the first notification (for example, full navigation) indicating the first stop operation condition. By means, the frequency of performing the first notification is higher after the privilege is granted than before the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means (for example, the lottery for adding the remaining number of ATs is won). As shown in Fig. 94 (b), the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery is higher after winning the additional lottery (addition = already generated) than before (addition = not occurring). , When the second lottery result is derived in the second gaming state, the third stop operation condition It is a means that can give the second notification according to the above, and is a means that does not change the frequency of performing the second notification before and after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game console according to the invention 6-2 of the present application, the first notification is performed more frequently after the privilege is granted than before the privilege is granted. The frequency of notification can be increased, and the player's willingness to play can be increased. In addition, since the frequency of the first notification is relatively low before the privilege is given, the progress of the game can be delayed in the second game state in which the predetermined lottery is executed, and the number of lottery is increased. This can increase the chances of the benefits being granted. In addition, since the frequency of the second notification regarding the second lottery result does not change before and after the privilege is granted, the frequency of notification to the player does not decrease extremely, which gives the player anxiety. Never.

Further, the game console according to the invention 6-3 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a variable display unit (for example, the display shown in FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. A window 113) is provided, and a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one game can be played by deriving the display result to the variable display unit. A game control means (for example, a game control means) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, which is a game table that is finished and can generate a prize according to a display result derived to the variable display unit. The game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and the game state update process shown in FIG. 29, the start operation receiving means for receiving the start operation for starting the game (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 1), and the above. A lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed based on the reception of the start operation, and the lottery means (for example, the internal lottery of the winning combination shown in FIG. 15) capable of deriving the lottery result and the variable display are displayed based on the reception of the start operation. A stop operation means for stopping and displaying the variable display unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and a stop for controlling the stop of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation conditions of the stop operation means. A control means (for example, the reel stop control shown in FIG. 15), a game value giving means capable of giving a game value based on a display result derived to the variable display unit (for example, a medal payout shown in FIG. 15), and With a notification means capable of transmitting information indicating an operation condition of the stop operation means (for example, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, a first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4, and an instruction information setting process shown in FIG. 93). , Benefits that are advantageous to the player (for example, addition of the right of advantageous state (addition of the number of AT games, addition of the number of AT differences, addition of the AT set, addition of the number of AT navigations)), granting of a special state (additional special) Benefit granting means (for example, AT-related processing shown in FIG. 88 (a), FIG. 88 (b)) capable of granting a privilege granting means (for example, granting a conversion zone, granting a high probability, etc.), increasing the frequency of AT navigation, paying out a game medium) The specialization-related process shown in FIG. 100, the normal medium update process shown in FIG. 100, and the CZ medium update process shown in FIG. 101 are included, and the plurality of gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, shown in FIG. 12). A state A (non-advantageous section)) and a second gaming state (for example, a state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) that is more advantageous than the first gaming state are included, and the privilege granting means is described above. Smell in the second gaming state If the player wins a predetermined lottery (for example, the AT lottery shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the lottery for adding the remaining number of ATs shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), the special zone right lottery), the above-mentioned privilege The stop control means is a means for imparting a lottery result (for example, a push order bell of condition device numbers 8 to 13 shown in FIGS. 10 and 93, and a fall avoidance replay (game). In the game in which the state is derived (a replay combination that prevents the state from falling (shifting) to a state that is disadvantageous to the player), the stop operation means is set to the first stop operation condition (for example, “Remarks” in FIG. 10). When the operation is performed according to the correct pressing order shown), the first display result (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell (small winning combination 6) shown in FIG. 7) is derived from the variable display unit, and the lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined lottery result is derived, the stop operation means pushes an incorrect answer as shown in the second stop operation condition different from the first stop operation condition (for example, "Remarks" in FIG. 10). When operated according to the order), it is a means for deriving a second display result (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the deviation) different from the first display result to the variable display unit, and the notification means is When the predetermined lottery result is derived in the second gaming state, the first notification (for example, full navigation) indicating the first stop operation condition can be notified by the privilege giving means. The frequency of performing the first notification is higher after the privilege is granted than before the privilege is granted (for example, before winning the additional lottery for the remaining number of ATs (addition = not occurring)). Also, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), after winning the additional lottery (addition = already generated), the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery is higher), and the privilege granting means is When the privilege is not granted in the second gaming state, the gaming table is a means for granting the privilege more easily than after the privilege is granted.

According to the game console according to the invention 6-3 of the present application, the first notification is performed more frequently after the privilege is granted than before the privilege is granted. The frequency of notification can be increased, and the player's willingness to play can be increased. In addition, since the frequency of the first notification is relatively low before the privilege is given, the progress of the game can be delayed in the second game state in which the predetermined lottery is executed, and the number of lottery is increased. This can increase the chances of the benefits being granted. In addition, before the privilege is given, the frequency of the first notification is relatively low, and while the net increase in the number of sheets is reduced, the privilege is easily given, so that the player's motivation to play is not reduced, and the player It becomes possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction of.

In addition, according to the present invention, "the frequency of performing the first notification is higher (or higher) after the privilege is granted than before the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means". "The certain period after the award is given is more than the certain period (for example, one, a plurality, or all games) before the award is given by the award-giving means. "Frequency of one notification is high" is included, and the "frequency" according to the present invention includes not only the uniform frequency in the certain period but also the average frequency in the certain period.

In addition, the period during which the first notification change (high → low or low → high) continues is not particularly limited. For example, at the end of the period, the next additional lottery is performed until a specific game is digested. There is an average net increase from the start of AT until winning, until the next privilege is granted, until entering the next zone, until reaching the limiter, until the end of AT, until the ED entry condition is satisfied. It may be until the number of sheets is reached, until the transition to the specialized zone, and so on. Further, after the end of the period, the net increase number before the change may be returned, or the net increase number may be set between the current net increase number and the net increase number before the change.

Further, the notification means may be a means that, when the certain condition is satisfied, the frequency of performing the first notification becomes higher after the certain condition is satisfied than before.

With such a configuration, since the frequency of performing the first notification is higher after the certain condition is satisfied than before the certain condition is satisfied, the first notification is performed when the certain condition is satisfied. The frequency of notification can be increased, and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

In addition, privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, AT-related processing shown in FIG. 88A, specialization-related processing shown in FIG. 88B, normal update processing shown in FIG. 100, The privilege granting means includes the CZ middle update process shown in FIG. 101, and the privilege granting means has a predetermined lottery (for example, the AT lottery shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (for example)) in the second gaming state. It is a means capable of granting the privilege when the lottery for adding the remaining number of ATs shown in b) and the special zone right lottery) are won, and the certain condition is the granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means. You may.

Further, the game value-imparting means imparts more game value when the first display result is derived than when the second display result is derived to the variable display unit. The game control means is satisfied by consuming a part of the rights of the second game state (for example, the number of AT residuals, the number of navigations, the number of payouts) in the second game state. When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of AT residuals or the number of payouts reaches a certain number, or when the number of navigations reaches a certain number), the second gaming state is terminated. It is a means, and in the second gaming state, the number of games until the same amount of the right is consumed after the privilege is granted than before the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. May be less likely (the progress of the game in the second gaming state is likely to be faster, and the gaming period in the second gaming state is likely to be shorter).

With such a configuration, the frequency of the first notification can be increased along with the granting of benefits, and the player's motivation to play can be increased, while the progress of the game in the second gaming state is accelerated. It is possible to prevent excessive balls from being thrown out, and it is possible to suppress gambling.

Further, the right is the difference between the number of game values used by the player in the second gaming state and the number of game values granted by the game value imparting means (hereinafter, referred to as "acquisition difference number"). (For example, the number of AT residual sheets), and the predetermined condition may be a condition including that the acquired difference number reaches a certain number.

With such a configuration, in addition to being able to play a game with sharpness by changing the frequency of the first notification before and after the awarding of the privilege, it also includes that the number of acquisition difference reaches a certain number. Since the second gaming state can be terminated when the conditions are met, it is possible to give equal benefits to the players regardless of the frequency of the first notification, and the disagreement between the players. Not only can the sense of fairness be eliminated, but gambling can be suppressed.

Further, the right is a right relating to the number of times the notification means makes the first notification in the second gaming state (for example, the number of times of navigation), and the predetermined condition is the first by the notification means. It may be a condition including the number of times of notification of the above reaches a certain number of times.

With such a configuration, in addition to being able to perform a well-balanced game by changing the frequency of the first notification before and after the privilege is granted, the number of times of the first notification reaches a certain number of times. Since the second gaming state can be terminated when the conditions including the above are satisfied, the first notification can be equally given to the players, and the feeling of unfairness among the players can be eliminated. In addition to being able to, it is possible to suppress gambling.

Further, the right is a right (for example, the number of payouts) regarding the number of game values granted by the game value-giving means in the second gaming state, and the predetermined condition is determined by the game value-giving means. It may be a condition including that the number of the game values to be given reaches a certain number.

With such a configuration, in addition to being able to play a well-balanced game by changing the frequency of the first notification before and after the privilege is granted, the number of game values to be granted reaches a certain number. Since the second game state can be terminated when the conditions including the above are satisfied, the player can be equally profited regardless of the frequency of the first notification, and the game can be played. In addition to eliminating the feeling of unfairness between people, it is possible to suppress gambling.

Further, the privilege may be the grant of the right.

With such a configuration, when a predetermined lottery is won in the second gaming state, the right of the second gaming state is granted, so that the motivation to play in the second gaming state can be increased.

Further, the notification means may be a means in which when the certain condition is satisfied, the frequency of performing the first notification is lower after the certain condition is satisfied than before.

With such a configuration, the frequency of the first notification is relatively low after a certain condition is satisfied, so that the benefits given in the second gaming state can be thoroughly enjoyed. The progress of the game can be delayed in the second gaming state in which the predetermined lottery is executed, and the chance of the privilege being given can be increased by increasing the number of lottery.

Further, the game value-imparting means imparts more game value when the first display result is derived than when the second display result is derived to the variable display unit. The game control means is satisfied by consuming a part of the rights of the second game state (for example, the number of AT residuals, the number of navigations, the number of payouts) in the second game state. When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of AT residuals or the number of payouts reaches a certain number, or when the number of navigations reaches a certain number), the second gaming state is terminated. It is a means, and in the second gaming state, the number of games until the same amount of the right is consumed after the privilege is granted than before the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. (The progress of the game in the second game state tends to be faster, and the game period in the second game state tends to be shorter).

With such a configuration, it is possible to thoroughly enjoy the benefits given in the second game state, and it is possible to delay the progress of the game in the second game state in which the predetermined lottery is executed, and the lottery. By increasing the number of times, the chances of receiving benefits can be increased.

Further, in the second gaming state, the number of times the predetermined lottery is performed before consuming the same amount of the right is larger in the state where the frequency of performing the first notification is lower than in the state where the frequency of performing the first notification is high. It may be a thing.

With such a configuration, the frequency of the first notification is relatively low before the privilege is given, and the net increase in the game value is reduced, but the privilege is given by increasing the number of lottery. Opportunities can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from diminishing.

<Invention 7 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the invention 7 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a variable display unit (for example, FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. The display window 113) is provided, and the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is derived to the variable display unit. A game control means (a game control means) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, which is a game table in which a prize can be generated according to a display result derived from the variable display unit after the game is completed. For example, the game start state process shown in FIG. 16 and the game state update process shown in FIG. 29, and the start operation receiving means (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 1) for receiving the start operation for starting the game. , A lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination is performed based on the reception of the start operation, and the lottery means (for example, the internal lottery of the winning combination shown in FIG. 15) capable of deriving the lottery result and the variable display based on the reception of the start operation. Stop operation means for causing the variable display unit to stop and display (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and stop control of the variable display unit based on the lottery result and the operation conditions of the stop operation means. Stop control means to be performed (for example, reel stop control shown in FIG. 15) and game value giving means that can give game value based on the display result derived to the variable display unit (for example, medal payout shown in FIG. 15). And the notification means capable of notifying the information indicating the operation condition of the stop operation means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4, and the instruction information setting process shown in FIG. 93). ), Benefits that are advantageous to the player (for example, addition of the right of advantageous state (addition of the number of AT games, addition of the number of AT differences, addition of the AT set, addition of the number of AT navigations)), granting of a special state ( Benefit granting means (for example, AT-related processing shown in FIG. 88 (a), FIG. 88 (for example)) capable of granting an additional specialized zone (granting a high probability, increasing the frequency of AT navigation, paying out a game medium) The specialization-related process shown in b), the normal medium update process shown in FIG. 100, and the CZ medium update process shown in FIG. 101 are included, and the plurality of game states include a first game state (for example, FIG. 12). The game control means includes a state A (non-advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) and a second gaming state (for example, a state B (advantageous section) shown in FIG. 12) which is more advantageous than the first gaming state. , The second game When a predetermined condition satisfied by consuming a part of the right of the second gaming state (for example, the number of AT residuals, the number of navigations, the number of payouts) is satisfied in the state (for example, the AT end condition). (For example, when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0, the number of AT sets becomes 0, the difference in the number of game media acquired from the start to the end of AT becomes 0, etc.) Or, when the AT is not won in the chance zone shown in FIG. 12, when the end condition of the state B is satisfied in the normal state (state B) shown in FIG. 12, and when the number of sets of the special zone becomes 0. ) Ends the second gaming state, and even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the second gaming state, an advantageous state ending condition different from the predetermined condition (for example, the second Conditions related to the difference number of game media acquired in the gaming state (advantageous section), the amount of rights related to the acquired second gaming state (advantageous section) (for example, the number of acquired AT games, the number of acquired AT sets, the number of difference that can be acquired) Etc.), the condition regarding the amount of rights related to the second game state (advantageous section) consumed, the condition regarding the number of remaining games in the second game state), the means for ending the second game state. The advantageous state end condition is a condition relating to the number of games played in the second gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a "first condition". ), The stop control means is a game in which a predetermined lottery result (for example, a push order bell of condition device numbers 8 to 13 shown in FIGS. 10 and 93) is derived by the lottery means. When the stop operation means is operated according to the first stop operation condition (for example, the pressing order of the correct answer shown in "Remarks" of FIG. 10), the first display result (for example, FIG. 7) is displayed on the variable display unit. In a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to the bell (small combination 6) shown in the above is derived and a predetermined lottery result is derived by the lottery means, the stop operation means is different from the first stop operation condition. When the operation is performed according to the stop operation condition of (for example, the pressing order of incorrect answers shown in "Remarks" of FIG. 10), the variable display unit has a second display result (for example, different from the first display result). , The combination of symbols corresponding to the deviation), and the game value adding means derives the first display result more than when the second display result is derived to the variable display unit. This is a means for imparting more game value, and the notification means indicates the first stop operation condition when the predetermined lottery result is derived in the second game state. When a certain condition is satisfied in the second gaming state by means capable of notifying the first notification (for example, when the ED start condition shown in FIGS. 86 and 104 (a) is satisfied, the AT is the first If there is a hit, if there is an additional AT, if the sum of the number of games in each of the CZ, AT, and special zones and the number of remaining AT games exceeds 700G (game), or if the number of games remaining in state B (When it is determined that is 10 G or less), the first notification is performed at a frequency according to the number of games until the first condition is satisfied (for example, the ED navigation system shown in FIG. 94 (c)). As shown in the lottery table, the game table is characterized in that the smaller the number of remaining games in state B (the number of remaining G in state B), the higher the winning probability (navigation rate) of the bell navigation display lottery. ..

According to the game console according to the invention 7 of the present application, the frequency of the first notification is changed according to the number of games until the first condition is satisfied (until the second gaming state ends), so that the first notification is given. Depending on the frequency of, it can be predicted that the condition until the first condition is satisfied (until the end of the second gaming state) is approaching, and the range of ways to enjoy in the second gaming state is expanded. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play.

Further, even if the notification means is a means that, after the certain condition is satisfied, the frequency of performing the first notification is likely to increase as the number of games until the first condition is satisfied is smaller. Good.

With such a configuration, when the number of games played in the second game state is small, the player is dissatisfied even if the second game state ends by having the player acquire as much game value as possible. It is possible not to give.

Further, when the certain condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, the game control means does not end the second gaming state by the predetermined condition, but continues to satisfy the advantageous state ending condition. It may be a means for making the second gaming state sustainable.

With such a configuration, the game in the second gaming state can be continued until the advantageous state end condition is satisfied, so that the player can be entertained even after a certain condition is satisfied.

Further, based on the number of used game values and the number of paid out game values in the second game state, the total number of acquired game values (for example, the number of payouts) acquired by the player is updated. The condition for ending the advantageous state is a condition that is satisfied when the total number updated by the acquisition number updating means reaches a predetermined acquisition number that serves as a threshold value (hereinafter, referred to as "second condition"). The game control means may be a means for terminating the second game state when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied.

With such a configuration, in addition to the first condition (condition related to the number of games), the second game state may end based on the total number of game values, and the end timing of the second game state may be set. It can be adjusted and the range of games can be expanded.

Further, the certain condition may be a condition satisfied by the amount of the right consumed and the unconsumed right in the second gaming state.

With such a configuration, the frequency of the first notification can be changed according to the digested right and the undigested right, and a new enjoyment can be given to the player in the second gaming state. There is.

Further, the certain condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the total number updated by the acquisition number updating means reaches an acquisition number lower than the threshold value.

With such a configuration, the frequency of the first notification can be changed according to the total number of game values, and it may be possible to give the player new enjoyment in the second game state.

Further, when the certain condition is satisfied, the second condition may be more likely to be satisfied earlier than the first condition.

With such a configuration, it is possible to advance the end timing of the second game state based on the total number of game values, suppress excessive payout, and suppress gambling.

Further, the game console according to the present invention can also be applied to a medalless game console or an enclosed game machine. Here, the medalless game table is a game table (slot machine, etc.) in which a game can be played without using a game medium (medal, etc.), and the "enclosed game machine" is a game enclosed in the game machine. The sphere is circulated and used. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. Good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. it can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Directional image display device 272,277 Speaker 420 Various lamps 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control Department

Claims (2)

Multiple reels with multiple types of symbols and rotational drive,
A plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and
An internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more roles or misses, and
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means for performing stop control for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means, and
A game value-adding means that adds game value according to a stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means, and
It is a game table equipped with a game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and changing the ease of acquiring the game value.
The game control means
It is possible to set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state.
It is possible to end the first gaming state and set the second gaming state based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set.
Based on the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first gaming state, the ease of acquiring the gaming value in the second gaming state set after the predetermined condition is satisfied can be changed. means der such is,
The plurality of types of lottery results include the first lottery result,
The stop control means
In the game in which the first lottery result is derived, when the stop button is operated by the first operation, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode.
It is a means for stopping the plurality of reels in the second stop mode when the stop button is operated by the second operation in the game from which the first lottery result is derived.
The game value-adding means is a means for adding more game value when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. ,
When the first lottery result is derived in the first game state and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the game control means is said to be the first in the first game state. Acquisition of the game value in the second gaming state set after the predetermined condition is satisfied, as compared with the case where one lottery result is derived and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. May change ease at a disadvantage to the player,
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1 .
Wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that does not change by the application status of the game value to a player in a game where the Oite the first lottery result in the first game condition is derived,
A game table characterized by that.